| • ABOUT CINELERRA: | Cinelerra in brief. + | |
| • INSTALLATION: | Making Cinelerra work on your system. + | |
| • CONFIGURATION: | Adjusting the behavior of Cinelerra. + | |
| • CREATING A NEW PROJECT: | Creating a new project + | |
| • THE MAIN WINDOWS: | The most often used user interfaces. + | |
| • LOADING AND SAVING FILES: | Moving media between disk and Cinelerra. + | |
| • NAVIGATING THE PROJECT: | Moving around the media. + | |
| • EDITING: | Moving the media in time. + | |
| • USING EFFECTS: | Altering the media. + | |
| • SETTING PROJECT ATTRIBUTES: | Changing the way the media is displayed. + | |
| • COMPOSITING: | Overlaying different sources of video. + | |
| • KEYFRAMES: | Making effects change over time. + | |
| • CAPTURING MEDIA: | Moving media from the real world to disk. + | |
| • IMPROVING PERFORMANCE: | Making Cinelerra run better on Linux. + | |
| • TROUBLESHOOTING: | Problems with Cinelerra. + | |
| • SECRETS OF CINELERRA: | Unusual applications of Cinelerra to common problems. + | |
| • SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS: | Secrets of the more complicated effects. + | |
| • PLUGIN AUTHORING: | How to write new effects. + | |
| • KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS: | How to accelerate most commands with the keyboard. + |
Table of Contents
+ +-
+
- 1 SHORT CONTENTS +
- 2 ABOUT CINELERRA + +
- 3 INSTALLATION + +
- 4 CONFIGURATION
+
-
+
- 4.1 ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES +
- 4.2 AUDIO DRIVERS + +
- 4.3 VIDEO DRIVERS + +
- 4.4 PLAYBACK + +
- 4.5 RECORDING + +
- 4.6 PERFORMANCE + +
- 4.7 INTERFACE +
- 4.8 ABOUT +
+ - 5 CREATING A NEW PROJECT + +
- 6 THE MAIN WINDOWS + +
- 7 LOADING AND SAVING FILES + +
- 8 NAVIGATING THE PROJECT + +
- 9 EDITING + +
- 10 USING EFFECTS + +
- 11 SETTING PROJECT ATTRIBUTES + +
- 12 COMPOSITING + +
- 13 KEYFRAMES + +
- 14 CAPTURING MEDIA + +
- 15 IMPROVING PERFORMANCE + +
- 16 TROUBLESHOOTING + +
- 17 SECRETS OF CINELERRA + +
- 18 SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS
+
-
+
- 18.1 1080 TO 480 +
- 18.2 CHROMA KEY +
- 18.3 COMPRESSOR +
- 18.4 DECIMATE +
- 18.5 DEINTERLACE +
- 18.6 DIFFERENCE KEY +
- 18.7 FIELDS TO FRAMES +
- 18.8 FREEZE FRAME +
- 18.9 HISTOGRAM +
- 18.10 INVERSE TELECINE +
- 18.11 INTERPOLATE VIDEO +
- 18.12 LENS +
- 18.13 LINEARIZE +
- 18.14 LIVE AUDIO +
- 18.15 LIVE VIDEO +
- 18.16 LOOP +
- 18.17 MOTION + +
- 18.18 MOTION 2 POINT +
- 18.19 REFRAMERT +
- 18.20 REFRAME +
- 18.21 RESAMPLE +
- 18.22 REVERSE VIDEO/AUDIO +
- 18.23 SWAP FRAMES +
- 18.24 THRESHOLD +
- 18.25 TIME AVERAGE +
- 18.26 TITLER + +
- 18.27 VIDEO SCOPE +
+ - 19 PLUGIN AUTHORING + +
- 20 KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS +
Table of Contents
--
-
- SECRETS OF CINELERRA -
- 1 SHORT CONTENTS -
- 2 ABOUT CINELERRA - -
- 3 INSTALLATION - -
- 4 CONFIGURATION - -
- 5 CREATING A NEW PROJECT - -
- 6 THE MAIN WINDOWS - -
- 7 LOADING AND SAVING FILES - -
- 8 NAVIGATING THE PROJECT - -
- 9 EDITING - -
- 10 USING EFFECTS - -
- 11 SETTING PROJECT ATTRIBUTES - -
- 12 COMPOSITING - -
- 13 KEYFRAMES - -
- 14 CAPTURING MEDIA - -
- 15 IMPROVING PERFORMANCE - -
- 16 TROUBLESHOOTING - -
- 17 SECRETS OF CINELERRA - -
- 18 SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS
-
-
-
- 18.1 1080 TO 480 -
- 18.2 CHROMA KEY -
- 18.3 COMPRESSOR -
- 18.4 DECIMATE -
- 18.5 DEINTERLACE -
- 18.6 DIFFERENCE KEY -
- 18.7 FIELDS TO FRAMES -
- 18.8 FREEZE FRAME -
- 18.9 HISTOGRAM -
- 18.10 INVERSE TELECINE -
- 18.11 INTERPOLATE VIDEO -
- 18.12 LENS -
- 18.13 LINEARIZE -
- 18.14 LIVE AUDIO -
- 18.15 LIVE VIDEO -
- 18.16 LOOP -
- 18.17 MOTION - -
- 18.18 MOTION 2 POINT -
- 18.19 REFRAMERT -
- 18.20 REFRAME -
- 18.21 RESAMPLE -
- 18.22 REVERSE VIDEO/AUDIO -
- 18.23 SWAP FRAMES -
- 18.24 THRESHOLD -
- 18.25 TIME AVERAGE -
- 18.26 TITLER - -
- 18.27 VIDEO SCOPE -
- 19 PLUGIN AUTHORING - -
- 20 KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS - -
+ +
+Next: INSTALLATION, Previous: TOP, Up: TOP [Contents]
+2 ABOUT CINELERRA
BROADCAST 1.0 - -
In 1996 our first editor came out: Broadcast 1.0. It was just a window +
+In 1996 our first editor came out: Broadcast 1.0. It was just a window with a waveform in it, it could cut and paste stereo audio waveforms on a UNIX box, except unlike other audio editors it could handle files up to 2 gigabytes with only 64 megs of RAM. That was a feature normally only accessible to the highest end professional audio houses. +
-BROADCAST 2.0 - -
In 1997 Broadcast 1.0 was replaced by Broadcast 2.0. This time the +
BROADCAST 2.0 +
+In 1997 Broadcast 1.0 was replaced by Broadcast 2.0. This time the window had a menubar, patchbay, console, and transport control. Broadcast 2.0 still only handled audio but this time it handled unlimited tracks, and it could perform effects on audio and save the @@ -406,10 +463,10 @@ performed as the audio was playing back, in realtime. A user could mix unlimited numbers of tracks, adjust fade, pan, and EQ, and hear the result instantly. Amazingly this real time tweeking is still unavailable on most audio programs. - -
BROADCAST 2000 - -
But Broadcast 2.0 still didn't handle video and it wasn't very graceful +
+BROADCAST 2000 +
+But Broadcast 2.0 still didn’t handle video and it wasn’t very graceful at audio either. In 1999 video broke into the story with Broadcast 2000. This iteration of the Broadcast series could do wonders with audio and offered a pretty good video feature set. It could edit video @@ -421,13 +478,14 @@ lot of processing and editing on video and audio that would otherwise involve many hours setting up command line sequences and writing to disk. For a time it seemed as if the original dream of immersive movie making for everyone regardless of income level had arrived. +
+CINELERRA +
-CINELERRA - -
Later on Broadcast 2000 began to come short. Its audio and video was +
Later on Broadcast 2000 began to come short. Its audio and video was graceful if you knew how to use it efficiently, but quality issues and new user interface techniques were emerging. Broadcast 2000 kept the -audio interface from its ancestors, which didn't apply well to video. +audio interface from its ancestors, which didn’t apply well to video. Users likewise were maturing. No longer would it be sufficient to just edit video on a UNIX box. Most users expected on UNIX the same thing they got in Win or Mac. In mid 2000 designs for a Broadcast 2000 @@ -436,288 +494,362 @@ from the series and the software would now be called Cinelerra. Cinelerra would allow users to configure certain effects in much less time than required with Broadcast 2000. It would begin to emulate some of the features found in Win and Mac software while not attempting to -become a clone. It's interface would be designed for video from the +become a clone. It’s interface would be designed for video from the ground up, while supplementing that with the Broadcast audio interface. As always, quality improvements would happen. - -
LINUX DERIVATIVES - -
Linux became more and more fragmented after corporations adopted it. +
+LINUX DERIVATIVES +
+Linux became more and more fragmented after corporations adopted it. Threading once worked the same on all derivatives. Today there are more threading models than days of the week. We try to focus on 1 of the most popular Linux derivatives at any moment. The threading model is ported to that Linux derivative shortly before a release, but Linux derivatives quickly evolve to new threading models and everything breaks. - -
Also, there is no consistent behaviour for sound and video drivers. The +
+Also, there is no consistent behaviour for sound and video drivers. The situation with video capture has improved in that modern video sources can all be mounted like disk drives. The audio capture drivers have been a bit more reliable. +
- - + +| • ABOUT THIS MANUAL: | + |
+ +
+Up: ABOUT CINELERRA [Contents]
+2.1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL
This is the original manual for Cinelerra. This manual has been copied and translated into many languages on many websites in varying degrees of completeness. - -
Organizing information in the easiest manner for users to find out what -they need to know is sort of like cataloging the internet. They've +
+Organizing information in the easiest manner for users to find out what +they need to know is sort of like cataloging the internet. They’ve been trying to get it right for 30 years and will probably keep trying until the end of time. - -
There a lot of fragments of documentation scattered throughout the +
+There a lot of fragments of documentation scattered throughout the internet about Cinelerra. This document attempts to combine all the pieces of information in one piece. - -
Like the operating system and compiler for a piece of software, the +
+Like the operating system and compiler for a piece of software, the document writing format is the most important thing in choosing our document format. We wanted a format which would be readable regardless of corporate whims and fads. A piece of software which compiles on GCC and Linux will be usable as long as there are C compilers. Documents -written in Texinfo will be readable as long as there's a C compiler. - -
After many years of searching for the perfect documentation format -we've arrived at TexInfo. This format can be converted to HTML, +written in Texinfo will be readable as long as there’s a C compiler. +
+After many years of searching for the perfect documentation format +we’ve arrived at TexInfo. This format can be converted to HTML, printed, automatically indexed, but most importantly is not bound to any commercial word processor. - -
There are no screenshots in this manual. Screenshots become obsolete +
+There are no screenshots in this manual. Screenshots become obsolete quickly and as a result confuse the users. What looks one way in a screenshot will always look different in the real program because the real program and the manual are always evolving, never perfectly synchronized. It is true that manuals should have screenshots, but our objective in omitting screenshots is to keep the software costs minimal -so you don't have to pay for it. That includes additional labor to +so you don’t have to pay for it. That includes additional labor to synchronize the manual with the software. - -
In addition to telling you the basic editing features of Cinelerra this -manual covers tricks that won't be described anywhere else. We're +
+In addition to telling you the basic editing features of Cinelerra this +manual covers tricks that won’t be described anywhere else. We’re going to try to come up with certain things you can do with Cinelerra -that you wouldn't think of on your own. +that you wouldn’t think of on your own. +
+ + + + + + + + - + + + + + ++ +
+Next: CONFIGURATION, Previous: ABOUT CINELERRA, Up: TOP [Contents]
+3 INSTALLATION
+The Cinelerra package contains Cinelerra and most of the libraries needed to run it. We try to include all the dependancies because of the difficulty in tracking down the right versions. Also included are some utilities for handling files. The following are the general contents of all Cinelerra packages. - -
-
-
-
+
+
-
+
- Foreign language translations - These go into /usr/share/locale. -
- +
- Cinelerra executable - This goes into /usr/bin -
- +
- Cinelerra plugins - These go into /usr/lib/cinelerra in 32 bit systems and /usr/lib64/cinelerra in 64 bit systems. -
- +
- soundtest - Utility for determining sound card buffer size. -
- +
- mplexlo - Multiplexing of MPEG elementary streams without standards conformance but more efficiently. -
- +
- mpeg3cat - Utility for reading an MPEG file from a certain standard and outputting it to stdout. -
- +
- mpeg3toc, mpeg3cat, mpeg3dump - Utilities/ for indexing and reading MPEG files. -
- +
- mpeg3peek - Utility for displaying the byte offset of a frame in an MPEG file. -
| • INSTALLING AN RPM: | + | |
| • COMPILING FROM SCRATCH: | + | |
| • RUNNING CINELERRA: | + |
3.1 INSTALLING AN RPM
-Cinelerra is easiest installed by downloading an RPM and running -
rpm -U --force --nodeps hvirtual*.rpm --
on a Fedora 4 system. -
On systems which don't support RPM look for a utility called + + + +
+ +
+Next: COMPILING FROM SCRATCH, Up: INSTALLATION [Contents]
+3.1 INSTALLING AN RPM
+ +Cinelerra is easiest installed by downloading an RPM and running +
+rpm -U --force --nodeps hvirtual*.rpm +
on a Fedora 4 system. +
+On systems which don’t support RPM look for a utility called rpm2cpio. Download a Cinelerra RPM and from the / directory run +
+rpm2cpio hvirtual*.rpm | cpio -i --make-directories +
rpm2cpio hvirtual*.rpm | cpio -i --make-directories --
This doesn't always work because there are many forks of the C library, +
This doesn’t always work because there are many forks of the C library, each incompatible with the others. This is the biggest reason to compile from scratch. +
+ + - + ++ +
+Next: RUNNING CINELERRA, Previous: INSTALLING AN RPM, Up: INSTALLATION [Contents]
+3.2 COMPILING FROM SCRATCH
It should be noted that the compiler used in building Cinelerra binaries is the free GNU compiler and very conservative optimization flags. Alternative optimization flags and compilers produce varying -results. Compiling the source is hard and there's no warranty if the +results. Compiling the source is hard and there’s no warranty if the source code fails to compile, but the method for compiling starts by downloading the source code and decompressing. - -
The compilation is verified on a vanilla Fedora 4 installation, -workstation mode. Fedora doesn't install a lot of dependancies like +
+The compilation is verified on a vanilla Fedora 4 installation, +workstation mode. Fedora doesn’t install a lot of dependancies like nasm and yasm. Yes, 3 assemblers are now required to assemble -x86 code. Compiling the source is hard and there's no warranty if the +x86 code. Compiling the source is hard and there’s no warranty if the source code fails to compile, but the method for compiling starts by downloading the source code and decompressing. +
+tar jxf cinelerra*.tar.bz2 +
tar jxf cinelerra*.tar.bz2 --
The compilation is verified on a Fedora 4 installation. Fedora 4 -doesn't install a lot of the reqiured compilers. Mainly nasm and +
The compilation is verified on a Fedora 4 installation. Fedora 4 +doesn’t install a lot of the reqiured compilers. Mainly nasm and yasm, 2 of the 3 assemblers. These have to be installed manually for compilation to succeed. - -
Enter the hvirtual directory - -
cd cinelerra --
Then run - -
./configure --
This checks the build environment for the right tools and should give +
+Enter the hvirtual directory +
+cd cinelerra +
Then run +
+./configure +
This checks the build environment for the right tools and should give you an error if a tool is missing. Once that succeeds run +
+make +
make --
The make procedure should run through all the directories and put +
The make procedure should run through all the directories and put binaries in the i686 or x86_64 directories. When NFS was a lot faster, we compiled Alpha and i686 binaries in the same filesystem with the objects in different subdirectories, so all the binaries are still put in subdirectories. - -
A lot of libraries are included to get the version numbers right. Some -of the libraries don't compile on SMP systems. One solution is to +
+A lot of libraries are included to get the version numbers right. Some +of the libraries don’t compile on SMP systems. One solution is to disable SMP when rebooting and reenable it when compilation is finished. Another solution is to rerun make over and over until it gets through the offending libraries. +
-Once finished, make sure you are root and run +
Once finished, make sure you are root and run +
+make install +
make install --
to install the binaries. If installation fails it means something -failed to compile or you weren't root. Run make again and watch +
to install the binaries. If installation fails it means something +failed to compile or you weren’t root. Run make again and watch for errors. - -
Sometimes you'll want to run make clean if you're programming -something or the system libraries change. In this case, you'll +
+Sometimes you’ll want to run make clean if you’re programming +something or the system libraries change. In this case, you’ll probably need to run configure again because some libraries delete their configuration files in make clean. - -
-
-Previous: COMPILING FROM SCRATCH, -Up: INSTALLATION - +
+Previous: COMPILING FROM SCRATCH, Up: INSTALLATION [Contents]
3.3 RUNNING CINELERRA
+The simplest way to run Cinelerra is by running +
-/usr/bin/cinelerra --
This command hides a much more capable command line interface. Run +
/usr/bin/cinelerra +
This command hides a much more capable command line interface. Run cinelerra -h to get a listing of command line options. The use of these options is described in several sections. +
+For rendering from the command line See RENDERING FILES. +
+ + + + + -For rendering from the command line See RENDERING FILES. -
+ + ++ +
+Next: CREATING A NEW PROJECT, Previous: INSTALLATION, Up: TOP [Contents]
+4 CONFIGURATION
+Because of the variety of uses, Cinelerra cannot be run optimally without some intimate configuration for your specific needs. Very few parameters are adjustible at compile time. Runtime configuration is the only option for most configuration because of the multitude of parameters. - -
Here we discuss not only the configuration options but which of the -different API's in Linux are supported. - -
Go to settings->preferences and to see the options. - -
- -Here we discuss not only the configuration options but which of the +different API’s in Linux are supported. +
+Go to settings->preferences and to see the options. +
+ +| • ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES: | These environment variables are recognized by Cinelerra + | |
| • AUDIO DRIVERS: | Information about the audio drivers + | |
| • VIDEO DRIVERS: | Information about the video drivers + | |
| • PLAYBACK: | Configuring parameters related to playback. + | |
| • RECORDING: | Configuring parameters related to recording. + | |
| • PERFORMANCE: | Configuring parameters related to how fast things go. + | |
| • INTERFACE: | Configuring the user interface. + | |
| • ABOUT: | Viewing information about the program. + |
-
-Next: AUDIO DRIVERS, -Up: CONFIGURATION - +
+Next: AUDIO DRIVERS, Up: CONFIGURATION [Contents]
4.1 ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES
In UNIX derivatives, environment variables are global variables in the @@ -725,77 +857,91 @@ shell which all applications can read. They are set with a command like set VARIABLE=value. All the environment variables can be viewed with a command like env. Cinelerra recognizes the following environment variables: - -
-
-
- LADSPA_PATH - If you want to use LADSPA plugins, this must be
+
+
-
+
- LADSPA_PATH - If you want to use LADSPA plugins, this must be defined: a colon separated list of directories to search for LADSPA plugins. These are not native Cinelerra plugins. See LADSPA EFFECTS. -
+ ++++Next: VIDEO DRIVERS, Previous: ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES, Up: CONFIGURATION [Contents]
+4.2 AUDIO DRIVERS
The audio drivers are used for both recording and playback to get data to and from the hardware. Since the same drivers are used for both recording and playback, their functionality is described here in a separate section. - -
- -+ + + + ++
+ +• COMMON SOUND DRIVER ATTRIBUTES: Attributes used for more than one sound driver. + • OSS: Notes about the OSS driver + • OSS Envy24: Notes about the OSS driver for the Envy24 chip + • ALSA: Notes about the ALSA driver + • ESOUND: Notes about the ESound driver + • RAW 1394: Notes about the Raw1394 driver + • DV 1394: Notes about the DV1394 driver + • IEC 61883: Notes about the IEC 61883 driver +
-
-Next: OSS, -Up: AUDIO DRIVERS - ++- ++Next: OSS, Up: AUDIO DRIVERS [Contents]
4.2.1 COMMON SOUND DRIVER ATTRIBUTES
--
-
- DEVICE PATH
+
-
+
- DEVICE PATH
-
Usually a file in the /dev/ directory which controls the +
Usually a file in the /dev/ directory which controls the device. - -
- + +
-
BITS
-
The number of bits of precision Cinelerra should set the device for. +
The number of bits of precision Cinelerra should set the device for. This sometimes has a figuritive meaning. Some sound drivers need to be -set to 32 bits to perform 24 bit playback and won't play anything when +set to 32 bits to perform 24 bit playback and won’t play anything when set to 24 bits. Some sound drivers need to be set to 24 bits for 24 bit playback. +
+
- DEVICE PATH
-
- -
-Next: OSS Envy24, -Previous: COMMON SOUND DRIVER ATTRIBUTES, -Up: AUDIO DRIVERS +
+ ++- ++Next: OSS Envy24, Previous: COMMON SOUND DRIVER ATTRIBUTES, Up: AUDIO DRIVERS [Contents]
4.2.2 OSS
This was the first Linux sound driver. It had an open source @@ -803,31 +949,28 @@ implementation and a commercial implementation with more sound cards supported. It was the standard sound driver up to linux 2.4. It still is the only sound driver which an i386 binary can use when running on an x86_64 system. - -
+ +
-
-Next: ALSA, -Previous: OSS, -Up: AUDIO DRIVERS - ++- ++Next: ALSA, Previous: OSS, Up: AUDIO DRIVERS [Contents]
4.2.3 OSS Envy24
The commercial version of OSS had a variant for 24 bit 96 Khz soundcards. This variant required significant changes to the way the sound drivers were used, which is what the OSS Envy24 variant is for. +
-+
-
-Next: ESOUND, -Previous: OSS Envy24, -Up: AUDIO DRIVERS - ++- ++Next: ESOUND, Previous: OSS Envy24, Up: AUDIO DRIVERS [Contents]
4.2.4 ALSA
ALSA is the most common sound driver in Linux 2.6. It supports the @@ -838,346 +981,352 @@ changing. A program which works with it one day may not the next day. New wrappers are being developed on top of ALSA at such a pace, we plan to support them at regular intervals, not at every new release of a new wrapper. - -
ALSA is no longer portable between i386 and x86_64. If an i386 binary -tries to play back on an x86_64 kernel it'll crash. For this scenario, +
+ALSA is no longer portable between i386 and x86_64. If an i386 binary +tries to play back on an x86_64 kernel it’ll crash. For this scenario, use OSS. - -
+ +
-
-Next: RAW 1394, -Previous: ALSA, -Up: AUDIO DRIVERS - ++- ++Next: RAW 1394, Previous: ALSA, Up: AUDIO DRIVERS [Contents]
4.2.5 ESOUND
ESOUND was a sound server that sat on top of OSS. It was written for a window manager called Enlightenment. It supported a limited number of bits and had high latency compared to modern times but multiplexed -multiple audio sources. It's unknown whether it still works. - -
+multiple audio sources. It’s unknown whether it still works. + +
-
-Next: DV 1394, -Previous: ESOUND, -Up: AUDIO DRIVERS - ++- ++Next: DV 1394, Previous: ESOUND, Up: AUDIO DRIVERS [Contents]
4.2.6 RAW 1394
The first interface between linux software and firewire camcorders. This was the least reliable way to play audio to a camcorder. It consisted of a library on top of the kernel commands. - -
+ +
-
-Next: IEC 61883, -Previous: RAW 1394, -Up: AUDIO DRIVERS - ++- ++Next: IEC 61883, Previous: RAW 1394, Up: AUDIO DRIVERS [Contents]
4.2.7 DV 1394
The second rewrite of DV camcorder support in Linux. This was the most reliable way to play audio to a camcorder. This consisted of direct kernel commands. - -
+ +
-
-Previous: DV 1394, -Up: AUDIO DRIVERS - ++- ++Previous: DV 1394, Up: AUDIO DRIVERS [Contents]
4.2.8 IEC 61883
The third rewrite of DV camcorder support in Linux. This is a library on top of RAW 1394 which is a library on top of the kernel commands. -It's less reliable than DV 1394 but more reliable than RAW 1394. The +It’s less reliable than DV 1394 but more reliable than RAW 1394. The next rewrite ought to fix that. +
+ + - + + +
+ ++++Next: PLAYBACK, Previous: AUDIO DRIVERS, Up: CONFIGURATION [Contents]
+4.3 VIDEO DRIVERS
The audio drivers are used for both recording and playback to get data to and from the hardware. Since the same drivers are used for both recording and playback, their functionality is described here in a separate section. - -
- -+ + ++
+ +• COMMON VIDEO DRIVER ATTRIBUTES: Parameters used by more than one driver. + • X11: + • X11-XV: + • X11-OPENGL: + • BUZ: + • RAW 1394 VIDEO PLAYBACK: + • DV 1394 VIDEO PLAYBACK: + • IEC 61883 VIDEO PLAYBACK: +
-
-Next: X11, -Up: VIDEO DRIVERS - ++- ++Next: X11, Up: VIDEO DRIVERS [Contents]
4.3.1 COMMON VIDEO DRIVER ATTRIBUTES
--
-
-
+
+
-
+
-
DISPLAY
-
The is intended for dual monitor +
The is intended for dual monitor displays. Depending on the value of Display, the Compositor window will appear on a different monitor from the rest of the windows. - -
- + +
-
DEVICE PATH
-
Usually a file in the /dev/ directory +
Usually a file in the /dev/ directory which controls the device. - -
- + +
-
SWAP FIELDS
-
Make the even lines odd and the odd lines even +
Make the even lines odd and the odd lines even when sending to the device. On an NTSC or 1080i monitor the fields may need to be swapped to prevent jittery motion. - -
- + +
-
OUTPUT CHANNEL
-
Devices with multiple outputs may need a +
Devices with multiple outputs may need a specific connector to send video on. - -
- + +
-
PORT
-
The IEEE1394 standard specifies something known as the +
The IEEE1394 standard specifies something known as the port. This is probably the firewire card number in the system to use. - -
- + +
-
CHANNEL
-
The IEEE1394 standard specifies something known as the -channel. For DV cameras it's always 63. - -
The IEEE1394 standard specifies something known as the +channel. For DV cameras it’s always 63. +
+ -
DISPLAY
-
+
-
-Next: X11-XV, -Previous: COMMON VIDEO DRIVER ATTRIBUTES, -Up: VIDEO DRIVERS - ++- ++Next: X11-XV, Previous: COMMON VIDEO DRIVER ATTRIBUTES, Up: VIDEO DRIVERS [Contents]
4.3.2 X11
This was the first method of video playback on any UNIX system, valid all the way until 1999. It just writes the RGB triplet for each pixel -directly to the window. It's the slowest playback method. It's still -useful as a fallback when graphics hardware can't handle very large +directly to the window. It’s the slowest playback method. It’s still +useful as a fallback when graphics hardware can’t handle very large frames. - -
- + +
-
-Next: X11-OPENGL, -Previous: X11, -Up: VIDEO DRIVERS - ++- ++Next: X11-OPENGL, Previous: X11, Up: VIDEO DRIVERS [Contents]
4.3.3 X11-XV
This was the second big method of video playback in UNIX starting in -1999. It converts YUV to RGB in hardware with scaling. It's the -preferred playback method but can't handle large frame sizes. The +1999. It converts YUV to RGB in hardware with scaling. It’s the +preferred playback method but can’t handle large frame sizes. The maximum video size for XV is usually 1920x1080. +
-- +
-
-Next: BUZ, -Previous: X11-XV, -Up: VIDEO DRIVERS - ++- ++Next: BUZ, Previous: X11-XV, Up: VIDEO DRIVERS [Contents]
4.3.4 X11-OPENGL
The most powerful video playback method is OpenGL. With this driver, most effects are done in hardware. OpenGL allows video sizes up to the maximum texture size, which is usually larger than what XV supports, depending on the graphics driver. - -
OpenGL doesn't affect rendering. It just accelerates playback. OpenGL +
+OpenGL doesn’t affect rendering. It just accelerates playback. OpenGL relies on PBuffers and shaders to do video rendering. The graphics driver must support OpenGL 2 and Cinelerra needs to be explicitely compiled with OpenGL 2 support. This requires compiling it on a system with the OpenGL 2 headers. - -
PBuffers are known to be fickle. If the graphics card doesn't have -enough memory or doesn't have the right visuals, PBuffers won't work. -Try seeking several frames or restarting Cinelerra if OpenGL doesn't +
+PBuffers are known to be fickle. If the graphics card doesn’t have +enough memory or doesn’t have the right visuals, PBuffers won’t work. +Try seeking several frames or restarting Cinelerra if OpenGL doesn’t work. - -
Because of OpenGL limitations, X11-OpenGL processes everything in 8 bit +
+Because of OpenGL limitations, X11-OpenGL processes everything in 8 bit colormodels, although the difference between YUV and RGB is retained. - -
The scaling equation in Preferences is ignored by OpenGL. OpenGL +
+The scaling equation in Preferences is ignored by OpenGL. OpenGL always uses linear scaling. - -
Project and track sizes need to be multiples of 4 for OpenGL to work. - -
To get the most acceleration, OpenGL-enabled effects must be placed +
+Project and track sizes need to be multiples of 4 for OpenGL to work. +
+To get the most acceleration, OpenGL-enabled effects must be placed after software-only effects. All rendering before the last software-only effect is done in software. The core Cinelerra operations like camera and projector are of course OpenGL. +
-- -
-Next: RAW 1394 VIDEO PLAYBACK, -Previous: X11-OPENGL, -Up: VIDEO DRIVERS +
+ ++- ++Next: RAW 1394 VIDEO PLAYBACK, Previous: X11-OPENGL, Up: VIDEO DRIVERS [Contents]
4.3.5 BUZ
This is a method for playing motion JPEG-A files directly to a composite analog signal. It uses a popular hack of the Video4Linux 1 driver from 2000 to decompress JPEG in hardware. Sadly, even though analog output is largely obsolete, newer drivers have replaced BUZ. - -
+ +
-
-Next: DV 1394 VIDEO PLAYBACK, -Previous: BUZ, -Up: VIDEO DRIVERS - ++- ++Next: DV 1394 VIDEO PLAYBACK, Previous: BUZ, Up: VIDEO DRIVERS [Contents]
4.3.6 RAW 1394 VIDEO PLAYBACK
The first interface between linux software and firewire camcorders. This was the least reliable way to play video to a camcorder. It consisted of a library on top of the kernel commands. +
-+
-
-Next: IEC 61883 VIDEO PLAYBACK, -Previous: RAW 1394 VIDEO PLAYBACK, -Up: VIDEO DRIVERS - ++- ++Next: IEC 61883 VIDEO PLAYBACK, Previous: RAW 1394 VIDEO PLAYBACK, Up: VIDEO DRIVERS [Contents]
4.3.7 DV 1394 VIDEO PLAYBACK
The second rewrite of DV camcorder support in Linux. This was the most reliable way to play video to a camcorder. This consisted of direct kernel commands. - -
+ +
-
-Previous: DV 1394 VIDEO PLAYBACK, -Up: VIDEO DRIVERS - ++- ++Previous: DV 1394 VIDEO PLAYBACK, Up: VIDEO DRIVERS [Contents]
4.3.8 IEC 61883 VIDEO PLAYBACK
+The third rewrite of DV camcorder support in Linux. This is a library on top of RAW 1394 which is a library on top of the kernel commands. -It's less reliable than DV 1394 but more reliable than RAW 1394. The +It’s less reliable than DV 1394 but more reliable than RAW 1394. The next rewrite ought to fix that. +
- -4.4 PLAYBACK
- -- -
-Next: VIDEO OUT, -Up: PLAYBACK +
+ +++ ++Next: RECORDING, Previous: VIDEO DRIVERS, Up: CONFIGURATION [Contents]
4.4 PLAYBACK
+ + ++
+ + + +• AUDIO OUT: + • VIDEO OUT: +
+ + +4.4.1 AUDIO OUT
These determine what happens when you play sound from the timeline. +
+-
+
- SAMPLES TO SEND TO CONSOLE:
-
-
-
- SAMPLES TO SEND TO CONSOLE:
-
-
For playing audio, small fragments of sound are read from disk and +
For playing audio, small fragments of sound are read from disk and processed in a virtual console sequentially. A larger value here causes more latency when you change mixing parameters but gives more reliable playback. - -
Some sound drivers don't allow changing of the console fragment so +
+Some sound drivers don’t allow changing of the console fragment so latency is unchanged no matter what this value is. - -
A good way of ensuring high quality playback was to read bigger +
+A good way of ensuring high quality playback was to read bigger fragments from the disk and break them into smaller fragments for the soundcard. That changed when the virtual console moved from the push model to the pull model. Since different stages of the rendering pipeline can change the rate of the incoming data, it would now be real hard to disconnect size of the console fragments from the size of the fragments read from disk. - -
- + +
-
AUDIO OFFSET:
-
The ability to tell the exact playback position on Linux sound drivers -is pretty bad if it's provided at all. Since this information is +
The ability to tell the exact playback position on Linux sound drivers +is pretty bad if it’s provided at all. Since this information is required for proper video synchronization, it has to be accurate. The AUDIO OFFSET allows users to adjust the position returned by the -sound driver to reflect reality. The audio offset doesn't affect the +sound driver to reflect reality. The audio offset doesn’t affect the audio playback or rendering at all. It merely changes the synchronization of video playback. - -
The easiest way to set the audio offset is to create a timeline with 1 +
+The easiest way to set the audio offset is to create a timeline with 1 video track and one audio track. Expand the audio track and center the audio pan. The frame rate should be something over 24fps and the sampling rate should be over 32000. The frame size should be small @@ -1186,198 +1335,217 @@ a region of the timeline starting at 10 seconds and ending at 20 seconds. Drop a gradient effect on the video track and configure it to be clearly visible. Drop a synthesizer effect on the audio and configure it to be clearly audible. - -
Play the timeline from 0 and watch to see if the gradient effect starts -exactly when the audio starts. If it doesn't, expand the audio track +
+Play the timeline from 0 and watch to see if the gradient effect starts +exactly when the audio starts. If it doesn’t, expand the audio track and adjust the nudge. If the audio starts ahead of the video, decrease the nudge value. If the audio starts after the video, increase the nudge value. Once the tracks play back synchronized, copy the nudge value to the AUDIO OFFSET value in preferences. - -
Note: if you change sound drivers or you change the value of USE -SOFTWARE FOR POSITIONING INFORMATION, you'll need to change the audio +
+Note: if you change sound drivers or you change the value of USE +SOFTWARE FOR POSITIONING INFORMATION, you’ll need to change the audio offset because different sound drivers are unequally inaccurate. - -
- + +
-
VIEW FOLLOWS PLAYBACK
-
Causes the timeline window to scroll when the playback cursor moves. +
Causes the timeline window to scroll when the playback cursor moves. This can bog down the X Server or cause the timeline window to lock up for long periods of time while drawing the assetse. +
+ - USE SOFTWARE FOR POSITIONING INFORMATION -
- USE SOFTWARE FOR POSITIONING INFORMATION
-
-
Most soundcards and sound drivers don't give reliable information on +
Most soundcards and sound drivers don’t give reliable information on the number of samples the card has played. When playing video you need this information for synchronization. This option causes the sound driver to be ignored and a software timer to be used for synchronization. +
+ - AUDIO PLAYBACK IN REALTIME: -
- AUDIO PLAYBACK IN REALTIME:
-
-
Back in the days when 150Mhz was the maximum, this allowed +
Back in the days when 150Mhz was the maximum, this allowed uninterrupted playback on heavy loads. It forces the audio playback to -the highest priority in the kernel. Today it's most useful for +the highest priority in the kernel. Today it’s most useful for achieving very low latency between console tweeks and soundcard output. You must be root to get realtime priority. +
+ - AUDIO DRIVER -
- AUDIO DRIVER
-
-
There are many sound drivers for Linux. This allows selecting one +
There are many sound drivers for Linux. This allows selecting one sound driver and setting parameters specific to it. The sound drivers and their parameters are described in the sound driver section. See AUDIO DRIVERS. +
+
- SAMPLES TO SEND TO CONSOLE:
-
-
+ + +4.4.2 VIDEO OUT
These determine how video gets from the timeline to your eyes. +
+-
+
- PLAY EVERY FRAME
-
-
-
- PLAY EVERY FRAME
-
-
Causes every frame of video to be displayed even if it means falling +
Causes every frame of video to be displayed even if it means falling behind the audio. This should always be on unless you use mostly -uncompressed codecs. Most compressed codecs don't support frame +uncompressed codecs. Most compressed codecs don’t support frame dropping anymore. +
+ - - +
-
FRAMERATE ACHIEVED
-
The number of frames per second being displayed during playback. This +
The number of frames per second being displayed during playback. This is only updated during playback. +
+ - DECODE FRAMES ASYNCHRONOUSLY -
- DECODE FRAMES ASYNCHRONOUSLY
-
-
If you have lots of memory and more than one CPU, this option can +
If you have lots of memory and more than one CPU, this option can improve playback performance by decoding video on one CPU as fast as possible while dedicating other CPU to displaying video only. It assumes all playback operations are forward and no frames are dropped. Operations involving reverse playback or frame dropping are negatively impacted. - -
Since this option requires enourmous amounts of memory, it may crash if +
+Since this option requires enourmous amounts of memory, it may crash if the input frames are very large. +
- - +
-
SCALING EQUATION
-
When video playback involves any kind of scaling or translation, this -algorithm is used. This doesn't affect 1:1 playback. - -
-
-
- NEAREST NEIGHBOR ENLARGE AND REDUCE
+
When video playback involves any kind of scaling or translation, this +algorithm is used. This doesn’t affect 1:1 playback. +
+-
+
- NEAREST NEIGHBOR ENLARGE AND REDUCE
-
lowest but fastest +
lowest but fastest quality. Produces jagged edges and uneven motion. +
- - +
-
BICUBIC ENLARGE AND BILINEAR REDUCE
-
highest but slowest +
highest but slowest quality. For enlarging a bicubic interpolation is used, which blurs -slightly but doesn't reveal stair steps. For reduction a bilinear +slightly but doesn’t reveal stair steps. For reduction a bilinear interpolation is used, which produces very sharp images and reduces noise. The bilinear reduced images can be sharpened with a sharpen effect with less noise than a normal sized image. - -
- + +
-
BILINEAR ENLARGE AND BILINEAR REDUCE
-
when slight enlargement +
when slight enlargement is needed a bilinear enlargement looks better than a bicubic enlargement. +
+
- NEAREST NEIGHBOR ENLARGE AND REDUCE
-
- NEAREST NEIGHBOR ENLARGE AND REDUCE
+
- +
-
PRELOAD BUFFER FOR QUICKTIME
-
The Quicktime/AVI decoder can handle DVD sources better when this is +
The Quicktime/AVI decoder can handle DVD sources better when this is around 10000000. This reduces the amount of seeking required. Unfortunately when reading high bitrate sources from a hard drive, this tends to slow it down. For normal use this should be 0. +
- - +
-
DVD SUBTITLE TO DISPLAY
-
DVD IFO files usually contain subtitle tracks. These must be decoded +
DVD IFO files usually contain subtitle tracks. These must be decoded with by the MPEG decoder. Select Enable subtitles to enable subtitle decoding. There are usually multiple subtitle tracks starting from 0. The subtitle track to be decoded for all MPEG streams goes in the DVD subtitlee to display text box. Go to the asset corresponding to the MPEG file in the Resources window and right click. Click on Info. The number of subtitle tracks is given at the bottom. +
- - +
-
INTERPOLATE CR2 IMAGES
-
Enables interpolation of CR2 images. This is required since the raw -image in a CR2 file is a bayer pattern. The interpolation uses dcraw's +
Enables interpolation of CR2 images. This is required since the raw +image in a CR2 file is a bayer pattern. The interpolation uses dcraw’s built-in interpolation and is very slow. This operation can be disabled and the Interpolate Pixels effect used instead for fast previewing. +
- - +
-
WHITE BALANCE CR2 IMAGES
-
This enables white balancing for CR2 images if interpolation is also -enabled. It uses the camera's matrix which is contained in the CR2 +
This enables white balancing for CR2 images if interpolation is also +enabled. It uses the camera’s matrix which is contained in the CR2 file. White balancing is not performed if interpolation is not performed because white balancing needs a blending of all 3 primary -colors. - -
Disabling white balancing is useful for operations involving dark frame +colors. +
+Disabling white balancing is useful for operations involving dark frame subtraction. The dark frame and the long exposure need to have the same color matrix. - -
If you disable Interpolate CR2 Images and use the Interpolate +
+If you disable Interpolate CR2 Images and use the Interpolate Pixels effect, be aware the Interpolate Pixels effect always does -both interpolation and white balancing using the camera's matrix, +both interpolation and white balancing using the camera’s matrix, regardless of the settings in Preferences. Dark frame subtraction needs to be performed before Interpolate Pixels. +
+ - + -
-
-
VIDEO DRIVER +VIDEO DRIVER -
Normally video on the timeline goes to the compositor window during +
Normally video on the timeline goes to the compositor window during continuous playback and when the insertion point is repositioned. Instead of sending video to the Compositor window the video driver can be set to send video to another output device during continuous -playback. This doesn't affect where video goes when the insertion +playback. This doesn’t affect where video goes when the insertion point is repositioned, however. - -
The video drivers and their parameters are described in the video +
+The video drivers and their parameters are described in the video driver section. See VIDEO DRIVERS. +
+ +
- PLAY EVERY FRAME
-
-
+ ++++Next: PERFORMANCE, Previous: PLAYBACK, Up: CONFIGURATION [Contents]
+4.5 RECORDING
- ++
+ +• FILE FORMAT: + • AUDIO IN: + • VIDEO IN: + The parameters here affect what happens when you go to File->Record.... The intention was to make File->Record... go @@ -1386,15 +1554,15 @@ lengthy dialog to configure the file format. Instead the file format for recording is set here and it is applied to all recordings. Also set here is the hardware for recording, since the hardware determines the supported file format in most cases. +
-+
-
-Next: AUDIO IN, -Up: RECORDING - + - +4.5.1 FILE FORMAT
This determines the output file format for recordings. It depends @@ -1406,1027 +1574,1113 @@ configuration dialog to set the codec corresponding to audio and video. The audio and video is wrapped in a wrapper defined by the File Format menu. Different wrappers may record audio only, video only, or both. - -
Some video drivers can only record to a certain wrapper. DV, for -example, can only record to Quicktime with DV as the video compression. +
+Some video drivers can only record to a certain wrapper. DV, for +example, can only record to Quicktime with DV as the video compression. If the video driver is changed, the file format may be updated to give the supported output. If you change the file format to an unsupported format, it may not work with the video driver. +
-- -
-Next: VIDEO IN, -Previous: FILE FORMAT, -Up: RECORDING +
+ ++- ++Next: VIDEO IN, Previous: FILE FORMAT, Up: RECORDING [Contents]
4.5.2 AUDIO IN
These determine what happens when you record audio. - -
-
-
-
+
+
-
+
-
RECORD DRIVER
-
This is used for recording audio in the Record window. It may be +
This is used for recording audio in the Record window. It may be shared with the Record Driver for video if the audio and video are wrapped in the same stream. It takes variable parameters depending on the driver. The parameters have the same meaning as they do for playback. - -
-
-
-
+
+
-
+
-
DEVICE PATH
-
Usually a file in the /dev/ directory which controls the +
Usually a file in the /dev/ directory which controls the device. - -
- + +
-
BITS
-
The number of bits of precision Cinelerra should set the device for. +
The number of bits of precision Cinelerra should set the device for. This sometimes has a figuritive meaning. Some sound drivers need to be -set to 32 bits to perform 24 bit recording and won't record anything +set to 32 bits to perform 24 bit recording and won’t record anything when set to 24 bits. Some sound drivers need to be set to 24 bits for 24 bit recording. +
+ -
-
DEVICE PATH
-
-
+
+
- +
-
SAMPLES TO WRITE AT A TIME
-
Audio is first read in small fragments from the device. Many small +
Audio is first read in small fragments from the device. Many small fragments are combined into a large fragment before writing to disk. The disk writing process is done in a different thread. The value here determines how large the combination of fragments is for each disk write. - -
- + +
-
SAMPLE RATE FOR RECORDING
-
Regardless of what the project settings are. This is the sample rate +
Regardless of what the project settings are. This is the sample rate used for recording. This should be the highest the audio device supports. +
+
-
RECORD DRIVER
-
+
-
-Previous: AUDIO IN, -Up: RECORDING - + - +4.5.3 VIDEO IN
These determine what happens when you record video. - -
-
-
-
+
+
-
+
-
RECORD DRIVER
-
This is used for recording video in the Record window. It may be +
This is used for recording video in the Record window. It may be shared with the Record Driver for audio if the audio and video are wrapped in the same stream. It takes variable parameters depending on the driver. The parameters have the same meaning as they do for playback. - -
- + +
-
FRAMES TO RECORD TO DISK AT A TIME
-
Frames are recorded in a pipeline. First frames are buffered in the -device. Then they're read into a larger buffer for writing to disk. +
Frames are recorded in a pipeline. First frames are buffered in the +device. Then they’re read into a larger buffer for writing to disk. The disk writing is done in a different thread as the device reading. For certain codecs the disk writing uses multiple processors. This value determines how many frames are written to disk at a time. - -
- + +
-
FRAMES TO BUFFER IN DEVICE
-
The number of frames to store in the device before reading. This +
The number of frames to store in the device before reading. This determines how much latency there can be in the system before frames are dropped. +
+ - USE SOFTWARE FOR POSITIONING INFORMATION -
- USE SOFTWARE FOR POSITIONING INFORMATION
-
-
Video uses audio for +
Video uses audio for +
-synchronization but most soundcards don't give accurate position +
synchronization but most soundcards don’t give accurate position information. This calculates an estimation of audio position in software instead of the hardware for synchronization. - -
- + +
-
SYNC DRIVES AUTOMATICALLY
-
For high bitrate recording the drives may be fast enough to store the +
For high bitrate recording the drives may be fast enough to store the data but Linux may wait several minutes and stall as it writes several minutes of data at a time. This forces Linux to flush its buffers every second instead of every few minutes and produce slightly better realtime behavior. - -
- + +
-
SIZE OF CAPTURED FRAME
-
This is the size of the frames recorded. It is independant of the +
This is the size of the frames recorded. It is independant of the project frame size because most video devices only record a fixed frame -size. If the frame size given here isn't supported by the device it +size. If the frame size given here isn’t supported by the device it might crash Cinelerra. +
+ - FRAME RATE FOR RECORDING
+
+
The frame rate recorded is different from the project settings. This +sets the recorded frame rate. +
+
-
RECORD DRIVER
-
- FRAME RATE FOR RECORDING
-
The frame rate recorded is different from the project settings. This -sets the recorded frame rate. -
+
-
-Next: INTERFACE, -Previous: RECORDING, -Up: CONFIGURATION - ++- ++Next: INTERFACE, Previous: RECORDING, Up: CONFIGURATION [Contents]
4.6 PERFORMANCE
-You'll spend most of your time configuring this section. The main + +
You’ll spend most of your time configuring this section. The main focus of performance is rendering parameters not available in the -rendering dialog. +rendering dialog. +
+ + + + +-
+
- CACHE ITEMS
+
-
-
-
- CACHE ITEMS
-
To speed up rendering, several assets are kept open simultaneously. +
To speed up rendering, several assets are kept open simultaneously. This determines how many are kept open. A number too large may exhaust your memory pretty fast and result in a crash. A number too small may result in slow playback as assets need to be reopened more frequently. +
- - +
-
SECONDS TO PREROLL RENDERS
-
Some effects need a certain amount of time to settle in. This sets a +
Some effects need a certain amount of time to settle in. This sets a number of seconds to render without writing to disk before the selected -region is rendered. When using the renderfarm you'll sometimes need to +region is rendered. When using the renderfarm you’ll sometimes need to preroll to get seemless transitions between the jobs. Every job in a renderfarm is prerolled by this value. This does not affect background rendering, however. Background rendering uses a different preroll value. - -
- + +
-
FORCE SINGLE PROCESSOR USE
-
Cinelerra tries to use all processors on the system by default but -sometimes you'll only want to use one processor, like in a renderfarm +
Cinelerra tries to use all processors on the system by default but +sometimes you’ll only want to use one processor, like in a renderfarm client. This forces only one processer to be used. The operating system, however, usually uses the second processor anyway for disk access so this option is really a 1.25 processor mode. The value of this parameter is used in renderfarm clients. +
+
- CACHE ITEMS
-
+
-• BACKGROUND RENDERING: + • RENDERFARM: + - -
-Next: RENDERFARM, -Up: PERFORMANCE +
+ ++- ++Next: RENDERFARM, Up: PERFORMANCE [Contents]
4.6.1 BACKGROUND RENDERING
Background rendering was originally concieved to allow HDTV effects to be displayed in realtime. Background rendering causes temporary output to constantly be rendered while the timeline is being modified. The -temporary output is played during playack whenever possible. It's very +temporary output is played during playack whenever possible. It’s very useful for transitions and previewing effects which are too slow to display in a reasonable amount of time. If renderfarm is enabled, the renderfarm is used for background rendering, giving you the potential for realtime effects if enough network bandwidth and CPU nodes exist. +
+-
+
- FRAMES PER BACKGROUND RENDERING JOB
-
-
-
- FRAMES PER BACKGROUND RENDERING JOB
-
-
This only works if renderfarm is being used, otherwise background +
This only works if renderfarm is being used, otherwise background rendering creates a single job for the entire timeline. The number of frames specified here is scaled to the relative CPU speed of rendering nodes and used in a single renderfarm job. The optimum number is 10 - 30 since network bandwidth is used to initialize each job. +
- - FRAMES TO PREROLL BACKGROUND
-
This is the number of frames to render ahead of each background +
- FRAMES TO PREROLL BACKGROUND
+
+
This is the number of frames to render ahead of each background rendering job. Background rendering is degraded when preroll is used since the jobs are small. When using background rendering, this number is ideally 0. Some effects may require 3 frames of preroll. +
+ - - OUTPUT FOR BACKGROUND RENDERING
-
Background rendering generates a sequence of image files in a certain + +
- OUTPUT FOR BACKGROUND RENDERING
+
+
Background rendering generates a sequence of image files in a certain directory. This parameter determines the filename prefix of the image files. It should be on a fast disk, accessible to every node in the renderfarm by the same path. Since hundreds of thousands of image -files are usually created, ls commands won't work in the -background rendering directory. The
+
browse button for
-this option normally won't work either, but the 
+files are usually created, ls commands won’t work in the
+background rendering directory. The browse button for
+this option normally won’t work either, but the
configuration button for this option works.
+ - FILE FORMAT -
- FILE FORMAT
-
-
The file format for background rendering has to be a sequence of +
The file format for background rendering has to be a sequence of images. The format of the image sequence determines the quality and speed of playback. JPEG is good most of the time. +
-
- FRAMES PER BACKGROUND RENDERING JOB
-
-
+
-
-Previous: BACKGROUND RENDERING, -Up: PERFORMANCE - ++- ++Previous: BACKGROUND RENDERING, Up: PERFORMANCE [Contents]
4.6.2 RENDERFARM
To use the renderfarm set these options. Ignore them for a standalone system - -
-
-
-
+
+
-
+
-
USE RENDER FARM FOR RENDERING
-
When selected, all the +
When selected, all the file->render operations use the renderfarm. - -
- + +
-
NODES
-
Displays all the nodes on the renderfarm and which ones are active. - -
Nodes are added by entering the host name of the node, verifying the +
Displays all the nodes on the renderfarm and which ones are active. +
+Nodes are added by entering the host name of the node, verifying the value of port and hitting add node. - -
Computer freaks may be better off editing the +
+Computer freaks may be better off editing the ~/.bcast/.Cinelerra_rc file than this if they have hundreds of nodes. Remember that .Cinelerra_rc is overwritten whenever a copy of Cinelerra exits. - -
Select the ON column to activate and deactivate nodes once they +
+Select the ON column to activate and deactivate nodes once they are created. - -
Nodes may be edited by highlighting a row and hitting apply changes. - -
-
+
+
Nodes may be edited by highlighting a row and hitting apply changes. +
+ -
HOSTNAME
-
Edit the hostname of an existing node or enter the hostname of a new +
Edit the hostname of an existing node or enter the hostname of a new node here. - -
- + +
-
PORT
-
Edit the port of an existing node or enter the port of a new node here. - -
-
+
Edit the port of an existing node or enter the port of a new node here. +
+ -
REPLACE NODE
-
When editing an existing node, hit this to commit the changes to -HOSTNAME and PORT. The changes won't be committed if you -don't hit this button. - -
-
+
When editing an existing node, hit this to commit the changes to +HOSTNAME and PORT. The changes won’t be committed if you +don’t hit this button. +
+ -
ADD NODE
-
Create a new node with the HOSTNAME and PORT settings. - -
-
+
Create a new node with the HOSTNAME and PORT settings. +
+ -
DELETE NODE
-
Deletes whatever node is highlighted in the NODES list. - -
-
+
Deletes whatever node is highlighted in the NODES list. +
+ -
SORT NODES
-
Sorts the NODES list based on the hostname. - -
-
+
Sorts the NODES list based on the hostname. +
+ -
RESET RATES
-
This sets the framerate for all the nodes to 0. Frame rates are used +
This sets the framerate for all the nodes to 0. Frame rates are used to scale job sizes based on CPU speed of the node. Frame rates are only calculated when renderfarm is enabled. +
- - + + + + +
-
TOTAL JOBS TO CREATE
-
Determines the number of jobs to dispatch to the renderfarm. The more +
Determines the number of jobs to dispatch to the renderfarm. The more jobs you create, the more finely balanced the renderfarm becomes. - -
Determine the total jobs to create by multiplying the number of nodes +
+Determine the total jobs to create by multiplying the number of nodes including the master node by some number. Multiply them by 1 to have one job dispatched for every node. Multiply them by 3 to have 3 jobs dispatched for every node. If you have 10 slave nodes and one master node, specify 33 to have a well balanced renderfarm. +
+
-
USE RENDER FARM FOR RENDERING
-
+ ++++Next: ABOUT, Previous: PERFORMANCE, Up: CONFIGURATION [Contents]
+4.7 INTERFACE
These parameters affect purely how the user interface works. - -
-
-
-
+
+
-
+
-
INDEX FILES GO HERE
-
Back in the days when 4 MB/sec was unearthly speed for a hard drive, +
Back in the days when 4 MB/sec was unearthly speed for a hard drive, index files were introduced to speed up drawing the audio tracks. This option determines where index files are placed on the hard drive. +
- - +
-
SIZE OF INDEX FILE
-
Determines the size of an index file. Larger index sizes allow smaller -files to be drawn faster while slowing down the drawing of large files. +
Determines the size of an index file. Larger index sizes allow smaller +files to be drawn faster while slowing down the drawing of large files. Smaller index sizes allow large files to be drawn faster while slowing down small files. - -
- + +
-
NUMBER OF INDEX FILES TO KEEP
-
To keep the index directory from becoming unruly, old index files are +
To keep the index directory from becoming unruly, old index files are deleted. This determines the maximum number of index files to keep in the directory. - -
- + +
-
DELETE ALL INDEXES
-
When you change the index size or you want to clean out excessive index +
When you change the index size or you want to clean out excessive index files, this deletes all the index files. +
+ - USE HOURS:MINUTES:SECONDS.XXX -
- USE HOURS:MINUTES:SECONDS.XXX
-
-
Various representations of time are given. Select the most convenient +
Various representations of time are given. Select the most convenient one. The time representation can also be changed by CTRL clicking on the time ruler. +
+ - USE THUMBNAILS -
- USE THUMBNAILS
-
-
The Resource Window displays thumbnails of assets by default. This can +
The Resource Window displays thumbnails of assets by default. This can take a long time to set up. This option disables the thumbnails. +
+ - CLICKING IN/OUT POINTS DOES WHAT -
- CLICKING IN/OUT POINTS DOES WHAT
-
-
Cinelerra not only allows you to perform editing by dragging in/out +
Cinelerra not only allows you to perform editing by dragging in/out points but also defines three seperate operations which occur when you drag an in/out point. For each mouse button you select the behavior in this window. The usage of each editing mode is described in editing. +
+ - MIN DB FOR METER -
- MIN DB FOR METER
-
-
Some sound sources have a lower noise threshold than others. +
Some sound sources have a lower noise threshold than others. Everything below the noise threshold is meaningless. This option sets the meters to clip below a certain level. Consumer soundcards usually -bottom out at -65. Professional soundcards bottom out at -90. +bottom out at -65. Professional soundcards bottom out at -90. See SOUND LEVEL METERS. +
+ - MAX DB FOR METER -
- MAX DB FOR METER
-
-
This sets the maximum sound level represented by the sound meters. No +
This sets the maximum sound level represented by the sound meters. No matter what this value is, no soundcard can play sound over 0 db. This value is presented merely to show how far over the limit a sound wave -is. +is. See SOUND LEVEL METERS. +
+ - THEME -
- THEME
-
-
Cinelerra supports variable themes. Select one here and restart +
Cinelerra supports variable themes. Select one here and restart Cinelerra to see it. +
+
-
INDEX FILES GO HERE
-
- -
-Previous: INTERFACE, -Up: CONFIGURATION +
+ ++- ++Previous: INTERFACE, Up: CONFIGURATION [Contents]
4.8 ABOUT
This section gives you information about the copyright, the time of the current build, the lack of a warranty, and the versions of some of the libraries. Be sure to agree to the terms of the lack of the warranty. +
+ - + + +
+ ++++Next: THE MAIN WINDOWS, Previous: CONFIGURATION, Up: TOP [Contents]
+5 CREATING A NEW PROJECT
There are 2 ways to create a new project: going to File->New or loading new files See LOADING FILES. Once a new project is created, all the parameters can be changed later without creating a new -project. +project. +
- ++
- +• USING THE NEW PROJECT DIALOG: + • CHANGING PARAMETERS AFTER LOADING: +
+ ++++Next: CHANGING PARAMETERS AFTER LOADING, Up: CREATING A NEW PROJECT [Contents]
+5.1 USING THE NEW PROJECT DIALOG
One way is to go to File->New. This dialog contains the parameters for the new project. The sections of the New dialog are described here: - -
-
-
-
+
+
-
+
- Presets - Select an option from this menu to have all the project settings set to one of the known standards. -
- Audio -> Tracks - Sets the number of audio tracks the new project +
- Audio -> Tracks - Sets the number of audio tracks the new project should have. Tracks can be added or deleted later, but options are provided here for convenience. -
- Audio -> Channels - Sets the number of audio channels the new -project should have. The number of audio channels doesn't have to be +
- Audio -> Channels - Sets the number of audio channels the new +project should have. The number of audio channels doesn’t have to be the same as the number of tracks. -
- Audio -> Samplerate - Sets the samplerate of the audio. The -project samplerate doesn't have to be the same as the media sample rate +
- Audio -> Samplerate - Sets the samplerate of the audio. The +project samplerate doesn’t have to be the same as the media sample rate that you load. Media is resampled to match the project sample rate. -
- Video -> Tracks - Sets the number of video tracks the new project +
- Video -> Tracks - Sets the number of video tracks the new project should have. Tracks can be added or deleted later, but options are provided here for convenience. -
- Video -> Framerate - Sets the framerate of the video. The project -framerate doesn't have to be the same as the media frame rate that you +
- Video -> Framerate - Sets the framerate of the video. The project +framerate doesn’t have to be the same as the media frame rate that you load. Media is reframed to match the project framerate. -
- Video -> Canvas size - Sets the size of the video output. Each +
- Video -> Canvas size - Sets the size of the video output. Each track also has its own frame size. Initially the New dialog creates video tracks whose sizes all match the video output, but the video track sizes can be changed later without changing the video output. -
- Video -> Aspect ratio - Sets the aspect ratio. The aspect ratio is +
- Video -> Aspect ratio - Sets the aspect ratio. The aspect ratio is applied to the video output. The aspect ratio can be different than the number of horizontal pixels / the number of vertical pixels. Setting a different aspect ratio than the number of pixels results in nonsquare pixels. -
- Video -> Auto aspect ratio - If this is checked, the New dialog +
- Video -> Auto aspect ratio - If this is checked, the New dialog always recalculates the Aspect ratio setting when the Canvas size is changed. This ensures pixels are always square. -
- Video -> Color model - This sets the color model video intermediates -in the project will be stored in. Color models are described in a +
- Video -> Color model - This sets the color model video intermediates +in the project will be stored in. Color models are described in a separate section See COLOR MODEL. -
+ ++++Previous: USING THE NEW PROJECT DIALOG, Up: CREATING A NEW PROJECT [Contents]
+5.2 CHANGING PARAMETERS AFTER LOADING
After a project is created, you have to use the set format dialog to change parameters without deleting the project. Go to Settings->Set -format. - -
Most of the options are identical to the File->New +format. +
+Most of the options are identical to the File->New options except the lack of a number of tracks to create and the addition of audio channel locations. +
+This section is discussed in See SETTING PROJECT ATTRIBUTES. +
+ -This section is discussed in See SETTING PROJECT ATTRIBUTES. -
+
+ ++++Next: LOADING AND SAVING FILES, Previous: CREATING A NEW PROJECT, Up: TOP [Contents]
+6 THE MAIN WINDOWS
-When Cinelerra first starts, you'll get four main windows. Hitting +
When Cinelerra first starts, you’ll get four main windows. Hitting CTRL-w in any window closes it. - -
- -+ + ++
+ +• VIEWER: + • COMPOSITOR: + • PROGRAM: + • RESOURCES: + • SOUND LEVEL METERS: + • OTHER WINDOWS: +
-
-Next: COMPOSITOR, -Up: THE MAIN WINDOWS - ++- ++Next: COMPOSITOR, Up: THE MAIN WINDOWS [Contents]
6.1 VIEWER
-In here you'll scrub around source media and clips, selecting regions + +
In here you’ll scrub around source media and clips, selecting regions to paste into the project. Operations done in the viewer affect a temporary EDL or a clip but not the timeline. - -
+ +
-
-Next: PROGRAM, -Previous: VIEWER, -Up: THE MAIN WINDOWS - ++- ++Next: PROGRAM, Previous: VIEWER, Up: THE MAIN WINDOWS [Contents]
6.2 COMPOSITOR
-This window displays the output of the timeline. It's the interface + +
This window displays the output of the timeline. It’s the interface for most compositing operations or operations that affect the appearance of the timeline output. Operations done in the Compositor -affect the timeline but don't affect clips. - -
The video output has several navigation functions. The video output +affect the timeline but don’t affect clips. +
+The video output has several navigation functions. The video output size is either locked to the window size or unlocked with scrollbars for navigation. The video output can be zoomed in and out and panned. -Navigating the video output this way doesn't affect the rendered +Navigating the video output this way doesn’t affect the rendered output, it just changes the point of view in the compositor window. - -
If it is unlocked from the window size, middle clicking and dragging +
+If it is unlocked from the window size, middle clicking and dragging anywhere in the video pans the point of view. - -
Hitting the + and - keys zooms in and out of the video output. - -
Underneath the video output are copies of many of the functions +
+Hitting the + and - keys zooms in and out of the video output. +
+Underneath the video output are copies of many of the functions available in the main window. In addition there is a -
zoom menu and a 
tally light.
-
- The zoom menu jumps to all the possible zoom settings and, through the +
+ zoom menu and a tally light.
+The zoom menu jumps to all the possible zoom settings and, through the Auto option, locks the video to the window size. The zoom menu does not affect the window size. - -
The tally light turns red when rendering is happening. This is useful +
+The tally light turns red when rendering is happening. This is useful for knowing if the output is current. - -
Right clicking anywhere in the video output brings up a menu with all +
+Right clicking anywhere in the video output brings up a menu with all the zoom levels and some other options. In this particular case the -zoom levels resize the entire window and not just the video. - -
The reset camera and reset projector options center the camera +zoom levels resize the entire window and not just the video. +
+The reset camera and reset projector options center the camera and projector See COMPOSITING. - -
The Hide controls option hides everything except the video. - -
On the left of the video output is a toolbar specific to the compositor +
+The Hide controls option hides everything except the video. +
+On the left of the video output is a toolbar specific to the compositor window. Here are the functions in the toolbar: - -
- -+ ++
+ +• PROTECT VIDEO: + • MAGNIFYING GLASS: + • MASKS TOOL: + • CAMERA: + • PROJECTOR: + • CROP TOOL: + • EYEDROPPER: + • TOOL INFO: + • SAFE REGIONS TOOL: +
-
-Next: MAGNIFYING GLASS, -Up: COMPOSITOR - ++- ++Next: MAGNIFYING GLASS, Up: COMPOSITOR [Contents]
6.2.1 PROTECT VIDEO
-+
- This disables changes to the compositor output from clicks in it. It +
This disables changes to the compositor output from clicks in it. It is an extra layer on top of the track arming toggle to prevent unwanted changes. - -
+ +
-
-Next: MASKS TOOL, -Previous: PROTECT VIDEO, -Up: COMPOSITOR - ++- ++Next: MASKS TOOL, Previous: PROTECT VIDEO, Up: COMPOSITOR [Contents]
6.2.2 MAGNIFYING GLASS
-+
- This zooms in and out of the compositor output without resizing the +
This zooms in and out of the compositor output without resizing the window. If the video output is currently locked to the size of the window, clicking in it with the magnifying glass unlocks it and creates scrollbars for navigation. - -
Left clicking in the video zooms in. - -
Ctrl clicking in the video zooms out. - -
Rotating the wheel on a wheel mouse zooms in and out. - -
+ +Left clicking in the video zooms in. +
+Ctrl clicking in the video zooms out. +
+Rotating the wheel on a wheel mouse zooms in and out. +
+ +
-
-Next: CAMERA, -Previous: MAGNIFYING GLASS, -Up: COMPOSITOR - ++- ++Next: CAMERA, Previous: MAGNIFYING GLASS, Up: COMPOSITOR [Contents]
6.2.3 MASKS TOOL
-+
- This brings up the mask editing tool See MASKS. Enable the -
tool window to see options for this tool.
-
-+This brings up the mask editing tool See MASKS. Enable the +
+ tool window to see options for this tool.
+
-
-Next: PROJECTOR, -Previous: MASKS TOOL, -Up: COMPOSITOR - ++- ++Next: PROJECTOR, Previous: MASKS TOOL, Up: COMPOSITOR [Contents]
6.2.4 CAMERA
--
This brings up the camera editing tool See THE CAMERA AND PROJECTOR. Enable the
tool window to see options
-for this tool.
+
-+This brings up the camera editing tool See THE CAMERA AND PROJECTOR. Enable the
+ tool window to see options
+for this tool.
+
-
-Next: CROP TOOL, -Previous: CAMERA, -Up: COMPOSITOR - ++- ++Next: CROP TOOL, Previous: CAMERA, Up: COMPOSITOR [Contents]
6.2.5 PROJECTOR
-+
- This brings up the projector editing tool See THE CAMERA AND PROJECTOR. Enable the
tool window to see options
+This brings up the projector editing tool See THE CAMERA AND PROJECTOR. Enable the
tool window to see options
for this tool.
-
-+ +
-
-Next: EYEDROPPER, -Previous: PROJECTOR, -Up: COMPOSITOR - ++- ++Next: EYEDROPPER, Previous: PROJECTOR, Up: COMPOSITOR [Contents]
6.2.6 CROP TOOL
-+
- This brings up the cropping tool See CROPPING. The -
tool window must be enabled to use this tool.
-
-+This brings up the cropping tool See CROPPING. The +
+ tool window must be enabled to use this tool.
+
-
-Next: TOOL INFO, -Previous: CROP TOOL, -Up: COMPOSITOR - ++- ++Next: TOOL INFO, Previous: CROP TOOL, Up: COMPOSITOR [Contents]
6.2.7 EYEDROPPER
-+
- This brings up the eyedropper. The eyedropper detects whatever color +
This brings up the eyedropper. The eyedropper detects whatever color is under it and stores it in a temporary area. Enabling the -
tool info shows the currently selected color. Click
+ tool info shows the currently selected color. Click
anywhere in the video output to select the color at that point.
-
- The eyedropper not only lets you see areas which are clipped, but its +
+The eyedropper not only lets you see areas which are clipped, but its value can be applied to many effects. Different effects handle the eyedropper differently. +
-+
-
-Next: SAFE REGIONS TOOL, -Previous: EYEDROPPER, -Up: COMPOSITOR - ++- ++Next: SAFE REGIONS TOOL, Previous: EYEDROPPER, Up: COMPOSITOR [Contents]
6.2.8 TOOL INFO
-+
- This brings up a window containing options for the currently selected +
This brings up a window containing options for the currently selected tool. +
-+
-
-Previous: TOOL INFO, -Up: COMPOSITOR - ++- ++Previous: TOOL INFO, Up: COMPOSITOR [Contents]
6.2.9 SAFE REGIONS TOOL
-+
- This draws the safe regions in the video output. This doesn't affect +
This draws the safe regions in the video output. This doesn’t affect the rendered output See SAFE REGIONS. +
+ + + + + + - + +
+ ++++Next: RESOURCES, Previous: COMPOSITOR, Up: THE MAIN WINDOWS [Contents]
+6.3 PROGRAM
+This contains the timeline and the entry point for all menu driven operations. The timeline consists of a vertical stack of tracks with horizontal representation of time. This defines the output of rendering operations and what is saved when you save files. Left of the timeline is the patchbay which contains options affecting each track. - -
Under the Window menu you'll find options affecting the main +
+Under the Window menu you’ll find options affecting the main windows. default positions repositions all the windows to a 4 screen editing configuration. On dual headed displays, the default positions operation fills only one monitor with windows. +
-+
-
-Next: SOUND LEVEL METERS, -Previous: PROGRAM, -Up: THE MAIN WINDOWS - ++- ++Next: SOUND LEVEL METERS, Previous: PROGRAM, Up: THE MAIN WINDOWS [Contents]
6.4 RESOURCES
+Effects, transitions, clips, and assets are accessed here. Most of the resources are inserted into the project by dragging them out of the resource window. Management of resource allocation is also performed here. - -
+ +
-
-Next: OTHER WINDOWS, -Previous: RESOURCES, -Up: THE MAIN WINDOWS - ++- ++Next: OTHER WINDOWS, Previous: RESOURCES, Up: THE MAIN WINDOWS [Contents]
6.5 SOUND LEVEL METERS
An additional window, the levels window can be brought up from the Window menu. The levels window displays the output audio levels after all mixing is done. - -
Sound level meters appear in many locations. They can be toggled in -the viewer and compositor windows with the
+
level
+Sound level meters appear in many locations. They can be toggled in +the viewer and compositor windows with the
level
toggle. They appear in the patchbay when a track is expanded (See THE PATCHBAY.) They appear in the recording monitor when audio is being
-recorded.
-
- The sound levels in the levels window, compositor, and viewer +recorded. +
+The sound levels in the levels window, compositor, and viewer correspond to the final output levels before they are clipped to the soundcard range. In the record monitor they are the input values from the sound card. In the patchbay they are the sound levels for each track after all effects are processed and before downmixing for the output. - -
Most of the time, audio levels have numerical markings in DB but in the -patchbay there isn't enough room. - -
The sound level is color coded as an extra means of determining the +
+Most of the time, audio levels have numerical markings in DB but in the +patchbay there isn’t enough room. +
+The sound level is color coded as an extra means of determining the sound level. Even without numerical markings, the sound level color can distinguish between several ranges and overload. Look at the color codings in a meter with numerical markings to see what colors correspond to what sound level. Then for meters in the patchbay in -expanded audio tracks, use the color codings to see if it's overloading. - -
Be aware that sound levels in Cinelerra can go above 0DB. This allows +expanded audio tracks, use the color codings to see if it’s overloading. +
+Be aware that sound levels in Cinelerra can go above 0DB. This allows not only seeing if a track is overloading but how much information is being lost by the overloading. Overloading by less than 3DB is usually acceptable. While overloading is treated as positive numbers in Cinelerra, it is clipped to 0 when sent to a sound card or file. - -
The visible range of the sound level meters is configurable in +
+The visible range of the sound level meters is configurable in settings->preferences->interface (See INTERFACE.) - -
+ +
-
-Previous: SOUND LEVEL METERS, -Up: THE MAIN WINDOWS - ++- ++Previous: SOUND LEVEL METERS, Up: THE MAIN WINDOWS [Contents]
6.6 OTHER WINDOWS
The Overlays window can be brought up from the Window menu. This is a quick way to toggle what is drawn in the timeline. Every option in the View menu is available here. +
- -7 LOADING AND SAVING FILES
- -- -
-Next: LOADING FILES, -Up: LOADING AND SAVING FILES +
+ +++ ++Next: NAVIGATING THE PROJECT, Previous: THE MAIN WINDOWS, Up: TOP [Contents]
7 LOADING AND SAVING FILES
+ + ++
+ + + + + + + + + +• SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS: What formats Cinelerra can import and export + • LOADING FILES: Loading all types of files + • LOADING THE BACKUP: Recovering the session from before a crash + • SAVING FILES: Saving edit decision lists + • RENDERING FILES: Saving media files +
+ ++++Next: LOADING FILES, Up: LOADING AND SAVING FILES [Contents]
+7.1 SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS
Here are most of the supported file formats and notes regarding their compression. You may be able to load other formats not described here. - -
The format of the file affects what Cinelerra does with it. Edit +
+The format of the file affects what Cinelerra does with it. Edit decision lists replace the project settings. Formats which contain media but no edit decisions just add data to the tracks. If your project sample rate is 48khz and you load a sound file with 96khz, -you'll still be playing it at 48khz. If you load an EDL file at 96khz -and the current project sample rate is 48khz, you'll change it to +you’ll still be playing it at 48khz. If you load an EDL file at 96khz +and the current project sample rate is 48khz, you’ll change it to 96khz. - -
Some file formats are very slow to display on the timeline. These +
+Some file formats are very slow to display on the timeline. These usually have video which is highly compressed. Drawing highly compressed video picons can be very slow. Disable picon drawing for these files with the draw media toggle to speed up operations. +
+ +
+
+Track attributes +
+Supported file formats are currently: +
+-
+
- WAV +
- FLAC +
- PCM +
- AIFF +
- AC3 audio +
- -
-
-Track attributes
-
- Supported file formats are currently: - -
-
-
- WAV -
- FLAC -
- PCM -
- AIFF -
- AC3 audio -
++
+ + +• QUICKTIME: + • MPEG-4 AUDIO: + • IMAGE SEQUENCES: + • STILL IMAGES: + • AVI: + • MPEG FILES CONTAINING VIDEO: + • DVD MOVIES: + • MPEG 1 AUDIO: + • OGG THEORA/VORBIS: + • EDIT DECISION LIST: +
-
-Next: MPEG-4 AUDIO, -Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS - ++- ++Next: MPEG-4 AUDIO, Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS [Contents]
7.1.1 QUICKTIME
- -Quicktime is not the standard for UNIX but we use it because it's well +
Quicktime is not the standard for UNIX but we use it because it’s well documented. All of the Quicktime movies on the internet are -compressed. Cinelerra doesn't support most compressed Quicktime movies +compressed. Cinelerra doesn’t support most compressed Quicktime movies but does support some. If it crashes when loading a Quicktime movie, -that means the format probably wasn't supported. - -
NOTES ON QUICKTIME ENCODING - -
Here are some notes regarding making Quicktime movies in Cinelerra: - -
Quicktime is a wrapper for 2 codecs, a video codec and an audio codec. +that means the format probably wasn’t supported. +
+NOTES ON QUICKTIME ENCODING +
+Here are some notes regarding making Quicktime movies in Cinelerra: +
+Quicktime is a wrapper for 2 codecs, a video codec and an audio codec. The video and audio codecs are picked separately. The preferred encoding for Quicktime output is MPEG-4 Video and MPEG-4 Audio. This format plays in the commercial players for Windows and has good compression quality. For better compression, use H-264 Video. -Unfortunately H-264 decoding is so slow it can't play very large frame +Unfortunately H-264 decoding is so slow it can’t play very large frame sizes. - -
Cinelerra supports 2 nonstandard codecs: Dual MPEG-4 video and dual -H.264 video. These won't play in anything but Cinelerra and XMovie. +
+Cinelerra supports 2 nonstandard codecs: Dual MPEG-4 video and dual +H.264 video. These won’t play in anything but Cinelerra and XMovie. They are designed for movies where the frames have been divided into 2 fields, each field displayed sequentially. The dual codecs interleave 2 video streams to improve efficiency without requiring major changes to the player. - -
- + +
-
-Next: IMAGE SEQUENCES, -Previous: QUICKTIME, -Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS - ++- ++Next: IMAGE SEQUENCES, Previous: QUICKTIME, Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS [Contents]
7.1.2 MPEG-4 AUDIO
This is the same as Quicktime with MPEG-4 Audio as the audio codec. - -
+ +
-
-Next: STILL IMAGES, -Previous: MPEG-4 AUDIO, -Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS - ++- ++Next: STILL IMAGES, Previous: MPEG-4 AUDIO, Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS [Contents]
7.1.3 IMAGE SEQUENCES
+Rendering an image sequence is not the same as rendering a single image. When rendering an image sequence Cinelerra generates a table of contents file for the image sequence and makes a different image file @@ -2434,74 +2688,74 @@ for every timeline position. The table of contents can be loaded instead of the individual images to get better performance. To learn more about the different image formats supported in an image sequence, read about still images. +
-+
-
-Next: AVI, -Previous: IMAGE SEQUENCES, -Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS - ++- ++Next: AVI, Previous: IMAGE SEQUENCES, Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS [Contents]
7.1.4 STILL IMAGES
+Rendering a single image causes the image file to be overwritten for every timeline position. No table of contents is created. When -loaded, the image takes up one frame in length and doesn't change the +loaded, the image takes up one frame in length and doesn’t change the project attributes. - -
Several still image formats not normally found in other programs are +
+Several still image formats not normally found in other programs are described here. - -
- -+ ++
+ +• OPEN EXR IMAGES: + • RAW DIGITAL CAMERA IMAGES: +
-
-Next: RAW DIGITAL CAMERA IMAGES, -Up: STILL IMAGES - ++- -+Next: RAW DIGITAL CAMERA IMAGES, Up: STILL IMAGES [Contents]
7.1.4.1 OPEN EXR IMAGES
+ +7.1.4.1 OPEN EXR IMAGES
You may not know about Open EXR. This format stores floating point RGB images. It also supports a small amount of compression. Projects which render to EXR should be in a floating point color model to take advantage of it See SETTING PROJECT ATTRIBUTES. Several compression options are available for EXR. - -
-
-
-
+
+
-
+
- PIZ Lossless wavelet compression. This is the best compression. -
- ZIP Lossless gzip algorithm. +
- ZIP Lossless gzip algorithm. -
- RLE Lossless run length encoding. This is the fastest and worst +
- RLE Lossless run length encoding. This is the fastest and worst compression. -
- PXR24 Lossy compression where the floating point numbers are +
- PXR24 Lossy compression where the floating point numbers are converted to 24 bits and compressed with gzip. -
Select Use Alpha if the project colormodel has an alpha channel and +
Select Use Alpha if the project colormodel has an alpha channel and you want to retain it in the file. Otherwise the primary colors are multiplied by the alpha channel. - -
+ +
-
-Previous: OPEN EXR IMAGES, -Up: STILL IMAGES - ++- -+Previous: OPEN EXR IMAGES, Up: STILL IMAGES [Contents]
7.1.4.2 RAW DIGITAL CAMERA IMAGES
+ +7.1.4.2 RAW DIGITAL CAMERA IMAGES
RAW digital camera images are a special kind of image file which Cinelerra only imports. These must be processed in a floating point @@ -2510,266 +2764,297 @@ cameras are the only ones tested. They need to have the Linearize effect applied to correct gamma. Because raw images take a long time to interpolate, they are usually viewed first in a proxy file and then touched up. - -
First apply the Linearize effect to a track of raw images and set it to +
+First apply the Linearize effect to a track of raw images and set it to automatic with 0.6 gamma. Then render the timeline to a Quicktime JPEG file. Append the Quicktime JPEG file in a new track and disable playback of the old track. Now the gamma corrected copy of each raw image can be previewed relatively fast in the same timeline position as the original image. +
-- -
-Next: MPEG FILES CONTAINING VIDEO, -Previous: STILL IMAGES, -Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS +
+ ++- ++Next: MPEG FILES CONTAINING VIDEO, Previous: STILL IMAGES, Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS [Contents]
7.1.5 AVI
AVI with assorted audio and video codecs. Because AVI is so fragmented, your luck will vary. +
-+
-
-Next: DVD MOVIES, -Previous: AVI, -Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS - ++- ++Next: DVD MOVIES, Previous: AVI, Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS [Contents]
7.1.6 MPEG FILES CONTAINING VIDEO
+MPEG files containing video can be loaded directly into Cinelerra. If the file is supported, a table of contents is built. If the file is unsupported, it usually crashes or shows very short tracks. -Unfortunately, this method of loading MPEG files isn't good enough if -you intend to use the files in a renderfarm. - -
To use MPEG files in a renderfarm you need to run mpeg3toc to +Unfortunately, this method of loading MPEG files isn’t good enough if +you intend to use the files in a renderfarm. +
+To use MPEG files in a renderfarm you need to run mpeg3toc to generate a table of contents for the file, then load the table of contents. Mpeg3toc needs the absolute path of the MPEG file. If you -don't use an absolute path, it assumes the MPEG file is in the same +don’t use an absolute path, it assumes the MPEG file is in the same directory that Cinelerra is run from. - -
MPEG streams are structured into multiple tracks. Each track can be +
+MPEG streams are structured into multiple tracks. Each track can be video or audio. Each audio track can have 1-6 channels. Cinelerra converts each channel of audio into a track. - -
NOTES ON MPEG VIDEO ENCODING - -
MPEG video encoding is done separately from MPEG audio encoding. In +
+NOTES ON MPEG VIDEO ENCODING +
+MPEG video encoding is done separately from MPEG audio encoding. In MPEG video there are 2 colormodels. The YUV 4:2:0 colormodel is encoded by a highly optimized version of mpeg2enc with presets for standard consumer electronics. In the process of optimizing mpeg2enc, they got rid of YUV 4:2:2 encoding. The YUV 4:2:2 colormodel is encoded by a less optimized version of mpeg2enc. - -
YUV 4:2:2 encoding was kept around because the NTSC version of DV video +
+YUV 4:2:2 encoding was kept around because the NTSC version of DV video loses too much quality when transferred to YUV 4:2:0. This DV video must be transferred to YUV 4:2:2. - -
When encoding YUV 4:2:0, the bitrate parameter changes meaning +
+When encoding YUV 4:2:0, the bitrate parameter changes meaning depending on whether the bitrate or quantization is fixed. If the -bitrate is fixed, it's the target bitrate. If the quantization is -fixed, it's the maximum bitrate allowed. This is a quirk of the +bitrate is fixed, it’s the target bitrate. If the quantization is +fixed, it’s the maximum bitrate allowed. This is a quirk of the mpeg2enc version. - -
+ +
-
-Next: MPEG 1 AUDIO, -Previous: MPEG FILES CONTAINING VIDEO, -Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS - ++- ++Next: MPEG 1 AUDIO, Previous: MPEG FILES CONTAINING VIDEO, Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS [Contents]
7.1.7 DVD MOVIES
-DVD's are spit into a number of programs, each identified by a unique + +
DVD’s are spit into a number of programs, each identified by a unique IFO file. If you want to load a DVD, find the corresponding IFO file for the program of interest. Load the IFO file directly and a table of contents will be built. Alternatively for renderfarm usage, a table of contents can be created separately. +
+Run +
++-mpeg3toc -v /cdrom/video_ts/vts_01_0.ifo dvd.toc +
Run +
or something similar. Then load dvd.toc. +
-mpeg3toc -v /cdrom/video_ts/vts_01_0.ifo dvd.toc -
-or something similar. Then load dvd.toc. -
+
-
-Next: OGG THEORA/VORBIS, -Previous: DVD MOVIES, -Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS - ++- ++Next: OGG THEORA/VORBIS, Previous: DVD MOVIES, Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS [Contents]
7.1.8 MPEG 1 AUDIO
These are .mp2 and .mp3 files. If fixed bitrate, they can be loaded directly with no table of contents. Variable bitrate streams need to have a table of contents created with mpeg3toc. - -
- + +
-
-Next: EDIT DECISION LIST, -Previous: MPEG 1 AUDIO, -Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS - ++- ++Next: EDIT DECISION LIST, Previous: MPEG 1 AUDIO, Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS [Contents]
7.1.9 OGG THEORA/VORBIS
+The OGG format is an antiquated but supposedly unpatented way of -compressing audio and video. The quality isn't as good as H.264 or +compressing audio and video. The quality isn’t as good as H.264 or MPEG-4 Audio. In reality, anyone with enough money and desire can find a patent violation so the justification for OGG is questionable. - -
+ +
-
-Previous: OGG THEORA/VORBIS, -Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS - ++- ++Previous: OGG THEORA/VORBIS, Up: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS [Contents]
7.1.10 EDIT DECISION LIST
+Edit decision lists are generated by Cinelerra for storing projects. They end in .xml. They change project attributes when loaded. - -
Because edit decision lists consist of text, they can be edited in a +
+Because edit decision lists consist of text, they can be edited in a text editor. +
+ + - + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ ++++Next: LOADING THE BACKUP, Previous: SUPPORTED FILE FORMATS, Up: LOADING AND SAVING FILES [Contents]
+7.2 LOADING FILES
All data that you work with in Cinelerra is acquired either by recording from a device or by loading from disk. This section describes loading. - -
The loading and playing of files is just as you would expect. Just go +
+The loading and playing of files is just as you would expect. Just go to file->Load, select a file for loading, and hit ok. Hit the forward play button and it should start playing, regardless of whether a progress bar has popped up. - -
Another way to load files is to pass the filenames as arguments on the +
+Another way to load files is to pass the filenames as arguments on the command line. This creates new tracks for every file and starts the program with all the arguments loaded. - -
If the file is a still image, the project's attributes are not changed +
+If the file is a still image, the project’s attributes are not changed and the first frame of the track becomes the image. If the file has audio, Cinelerra may build an index file for it to speed up drawing. You can edit and play the file while the index file is being built. +
++
+ + + + - - + + + +• INSERTION STRATEGY: + • LOADING MULTIPLE FILES: +
+ ++++Next: LOADING MULTIPLE FILES, Up: LOADING FILES [Contents]
+7.2.1 INSERTION STRATEGY
Usually three things happen when you load a file. First the existing -project is cleared from the screen, second the project's attributes are -changed to match the file's, and finally the new file's tracks are +project is cleared from the screen, second the project’s attributes are +changed to match the file’s, and finally the new file’s tracks are created in the timeline. - -
But Cinelerra lets you change what happens when you load a file. - -
In the file selection box there is a range of options for Insertion +
+But Cinelerra lets you change what happens when you load a file. +
+In the file selection box there is a range of options for Insertion strategy. Each of these options loads the file a different way. +
+
- - --
-
- Replace current project
-
+-
+
- Replace current project
+
-
All tracks in the current project are deleted and new tracks are +
All tracks in the current project are deleted and new tracks are created to match the source. Project attributes are only changed when loading XML. If multiple files are selected it adds new tracks for every file. +
+ - Replace current project and concatenate tracks
+
- - Replace current project and concatenate tracks
-
-
-
Same as replace current project except if multiple files are selected +
Same as replace current project except if multiple files are selected it concatenates the tracks of every file after the first. +
+ - Append in new tracks
+
- - Append in new tracks
-
-
-
The current project is not deleted and new tracks are created for the +
The current project is not deleted and new tracks are created for the source. +
+ - Concatenate to existing tracks
+
- - Concatenate to existing tracks
-
-
-
The current project is not deleted and new files are concatenated to +
The current project is not deleted and new files are concatenated to the existing tracks. +
+ - Paste at insertion point
+
- - Paste at insertion point
-
+
The file is pasted in like a normal paste operation. +
+ - Create new resources only
+
- The file is pasted in like a normal paste operation. - -
- Create new resources only
-
-
-
The timeline is unchanged and new resources are created in the Resource +
The timeline is unchanged and new resources are created in the Resource Window. +
+ - Nested EDL
+
- - Nested EDL
-
-
-
If the file is an EDL, the output of the EDL is pasted in like a media +
If the file is an EDL, the output of the EDL is pasted in like a media file. Nested EDLs have 1 video track & a number of audio tracks corresponding to the number of output channels. They allow larger sequences composed of many smaller sequences, transitions to be applied to the output of another EDL, & global processing on the output of an EDL without having to manipulate each track. +
+ + +
- Replace current project
+
The insertion strategy is a recurring option in many of Cinelerra's +
The insertion strategy is a recurring option in many of Cinelerra’s functions. In each place the options do the same thing. With these options you can almost do all your editing by loading files. - -
If you load files by passing command line arguments to Cinelerra, the +
+If you load files by passing command line arguments to Cinelerra, the files are loaded with Replace current project rules. +
+ - +
+ ++++Previous: INSERTION STRATEGY, Up: LOADING FILES [Contents]
+7.2.2 LOADING MULTIPLE FILES
In the file selection box go to the list of files. Select a file. Go @@ -2777,20 +3062,21 @@ to another file and select it while holding down CTRL. This selects one additional file. Go to another file and select it while holding down SHIFT. This selects every intervening file. This behavior is available in most every list box. - -
Select a bunch of mp3 files and Replace current project and +
+Select a bunch of mp3 files and Replace current project and concatenate tracks in the insertion strategy to create a song playlist. +
- +
+ ++++Next: SAVING FILES, Previous: LOADING FILES, Up: LOADING AND SAVING FILES [Contents]
+7.3 LOADING THE BACKUP
There is one special XML file on disk at all times. After every @@ -2798,72 +3084,75 @@ editing operation Cinelerra saves the current project to a backup in $HOME/.bcast/backup.xml. In the event of a crash go to file->load backup to load the backup. It is important after a crash to reboot Cinelerra without performing any editing operations. -Loading the backup should be the first operation or you'll overwrite +Loading the backup should be the first operation or you’ll overwrite the backup. +
-+
-
-Next: RENDERING FILES, -Previous: LOADING THE BACKUP, -Up: LOADING AND SAVING FILES - ++- ++Next: RENDERING FILES, Previous: LOADING THE BACKUP, Up: LOADING AND SAVING FILES [Contents]
7.4 SAVING FILES
When Cinelerra saves a file it saves an edit decision list of the -current project but doesn't save any media. Go to File->save +current project but doesn’t save any media. Go to File->save as.... Select a file to overwrite or enter a new file. Cinelerra automatically concatenates .xml to the filename if no .xml extension is given. - -
The saved file contains all the project settings and locations of every +
+The saved file contains all the project settings and locations of every edit but instead of media it contains pointers to the original media files on disk. - -
For each media file the XML file stores either an absolute path or just +
+For each media file the XML file stores either an absolute path or just the relative path. If the media is in the same directory as the XML -file a relative path is saved. If it's in a different directory an +file a relative path is saved. If it’s in a different directory an absolute path is saved. - -
In order to move XML files around without breaking the media linkages +
+In order to move XML files around without breaking the media linkages you either need to keep the media in the same directory as XML file forever or save the XML file in a different directory than the media and not move the media ever again. - -
If you want to create an audio playlist and burn it on CD-ROM, save the +
+If you want to create an audio playlist and burn it on CD-ROM, save the XML file in the same directory as the audio files and burn the entire directory. This keeps the media paths relative. - -
XML files are useful for saving the current state before going to sleep -and saving audio playlists but they're limited in that they're specific -to Cinelerra. You can't play XML files in a dedicated movie player. +
+XML files are useful for saving the current state before going to sleep +and saving audio playlists but they’re limited in that they’re specific +to Cinelerra. You can’t play XML files in a dedicated movie player. Realtime effects in an XML file have to be resynthesized every time you play it back. The XML file also requires you to maintain copies of all the source assets on hard drives, which can take up space and cost a lot of electricity to spin. For a more persistent storage of the -output there's rendering. +output there’s rendering. +
+ + - +
+ ++++Previous: SAVING FILES, Up: LOADING AND SAVING FILES [Contents]
+7.5 RENDERING FILES
Rendering takes a section of the timeline, performs all the editing, effects and compositing, and stores it in a pure movie file. You can then delete all the source assets, play the rendered file in a movie -player, or bring it back into Cinelerra for more editing. It's very +player, or bring it back into Cinelerra for more editing. It’s very difficult to retouch any editing decisions in the pure movie file, however, so keep the original assets and XML file around several days after you render it. - -
All rendering operations are based on a region of the timeline to be +
+All rendering operations are based on a region of the timeline to be rendered. You need to define this region on the timeline. The navigation section describes methods of defining regions. See NAVIGATING THE PROJECT. The rendering functions define the @@ -2872,64 +3161,72 @@ points are set, the affected region is rendered. When no region is highlighted, everything after the insertion point is rendered. Merely by positioning the insertion point at the beginning of a track and unsetting all in/out points, the entire track is rendered. +
- -- -+ +
-Next: BATCH RENDERING, -Up: RENDERING FILES ++
-• SINGLE FILE RENDERING: Rendering a single file + • BATCH RENDERING: Rendering several files unattended + • THE RENDER FARM: Rendering using many computers + • COMMAND LINE RENDERING: Rendering from the command line without a GUI +
+ ++++Next: BATCH RENDERING, Up: RENDERING FILES [Contents]
+7.5.1 SINGLE FILE RENDERING
The fastest way to get media to disk is to use the single file rendering function. - -
Go to File->render to bring up the render dialog. Select the -magnifying glass
+ to bring up a file selection dialog. This determines
+Go to File->render to bring up the render dialog. Select the +magnifying glass
to bring up a file selection dialog. This determines
the filename to write the rendered file to and the encoding parameters.
-
- In the render dialog select a format from the File Format menu. +
+In the render dialog select a format from the File Format menu. The format of the file determines whether you can render audio or video or both. Select the Render audio tracks toggle to generate audio tracks and Render video tracks to generate video tracks. +
-Select the wrench
next to each toggle to set compression
-parameters. If the file format can't store audio or video the
+Select the wrench
next to each toggle to set compression
+parameters. If the file format can’t store audio or video the
compression parameters will be blank. If Render audio tracks or
-Render video tracks is selected and the file format doesn't
+Render video tracks is selected and the file format doesn’t
support it, trying to render will pop up an error.
-
- The Create new file at each label option causes a new file to be +
+The Create new file at each label option causes a new file to be created when every label in the timeline is encountered. This is useful for dividing long audio recordings into individual tracks. When using the renderfarm, Create new file at each label causes one renderfarm job to be created at every label instead of using the internal load balancing algorithm to space jobs. - -
When Create new file at each label is selected, a new filename +
+When Create new file at each label is selected, a new filename is created for every output file. If the filename given in the render dialog has a 2 digit number in it, the 2 digit number is overwritten with a different incremental number for every output file. If no 2 digit number is given, Cinelerra automatically concatenates a number to the end of the given filename for every output file. - -
In the filename /hmov/track01.wav the 01 would be +
+In the filename /hmov/track01.wav the 01 would be overwritten for every output file. The filename /hmov/track.wav; however, would become /hmov/track.wav001 and so on and so forth. Filename regeneration is only used when either renderfarm mode is active or creating new files for every label is active. - -
Finally the render dialog lets you select an insertion mode. The +
+Finally the render dialog lets you select an insertion mode. The insertion modes are the same as with loading files. In this case if you select insert nothing the file will be written out to disk without changing the current project. For other insertion strategies @@ -2937,25 +3234,27 @@ be sure to prepare the timeline to have the output inserted at the right position before the rendering operation is finished. See EDITING. Editing describes how to cause output to be inserted at the right position. - -
It should be noted that even if you only have audio or only have video +
+It should be noted that even if you only have audio or only have video rendered, a paste insertion strategy will behave like a normal paste operation, erasing any selected region of the timeline and pasting just the data that was rendered. If you render only audio and have some video tracks armed, the video tracks will get truncated while the audio output is pasted into the audio tracks. +
-- -
-Next: THE RENDER FARM, -Previous: SINGLE FILE RENDERING, -Up: RENDERING FILES +
+ ++- ++Next: THE RENDER FARM, Previous: SINGLE FILE RENDERING, Up: RENDERING FILES [Contents]
7.5.2 BATCH RENDERING
+ +If you want to render many projects to media files without having to repeatedly attend to the Render dialog, batch rendering is the function to use. In this function, you specify many EDL files to @@ -2964,83 +3263,89 @@ EDL file and renders it automatically, without any user intervention. Each EDL file and its output to be rendered is called a batch. This allows a huge amount of media to be processed and greatly increases the value of an expensive computer. - -
The first thing to do when preparing to do batch rendering is define +
+The first thing to do when preparing to do batch rendering is define projects to be rendered. The batch renderer requires a separate EDL file for every batch to be rendered. Set up a project and define the region to be rendered either by highlighting it, setting in/out points around it, or positioning the insertion point before it. Then save the project as an EDL. Define as many projects as needed this way. The batch renderer takes the active region from the EDL file for rendering. - -
With all the EDL files prepared with active regions, go to +
+With all the EDL files prepared with active regions, go to File->batch render. This brings up the batch rendering dialog. The interface for batch rendering is a bit more complex than for single file rendering. +
-A list of batches must be defined before starting a batch rendering +
A list of batches must be defined before starting a batch rendering operation. The table of batches appears on the bottom of the batch render dialog and is called batches to render. Above this are the configuration parameters for a single batch. - -
Set the output path, file format, Audio, Video, and +
+Set the output path, file format, Audio, Video, and Create new file at each label parameters as if it was a single file. These parameters apply to only one batch. In addition to the standard rendering parameters, you must select the source EDL to use in the batch. Do this by setting the EDL path. - -
If the batches to render list is empty or nothing is highlighted, +
+If the batches to render list is empty or nothing is highlighted, click New to create a new batch. The new batch will contain all the parameters you just set. - -
Repeatedly press the New button to create more batches with the +
+Repeatedly press the New button to create more batches with the same parameters. Highlight any batch and edit the configuration on the top of the batch render window. The highlighted batch is always synchronized to the information displayed. - -
Click and drag batches to change the order in which they're rendered. +
+Click and drag batches to change the order in which they’re rendered. Hit delete to permanently remove the highlighted batch. - -
In the list box is a column which enables or disables the batch. This +
+In the list box is a column which enables or disables the batch. This way batches can be skipped without being deleted. Click on the Enabled column in the list box to enable or disable a batch. If it is checked, the batch is rendered. If it is blank, the batch is skipped. +
+The other columns in the batch list are informative. +
+-
+
- Output The output path of the batch. +
- EDL The source EDL of the batch. +
- Elapsed The amount of time taken to render the batch if it is finished.
-
The other columns in the batch list are informative. - -
-
-
- Output The output path of the batch. -
- EDL The source EDL of the batch. -
- Elapsed The amount of time taken to render the batch if it is finished. - -
To start rendering from the first enabled batch, hit Start. +
Once rendering, the main window shows the progress of the batch. Once +
To start rendering from the first enabled batch, hit Start. +
+Once rendering, the main window shows the progress of the batch. Once the batch finishes, the elapsed column in the batch list is updated and -the next batch is rendered until all the enabled batches are finished. +the next batch is rendered until all the enabled batches are finished. The currently rendering batch is always highlighted red. +
-To stop rendering before the batches are finished without closing the +
To stop rendering before the batches are finished without closing the batch render dialog, hit Stop. - -
To stop rendering before the batches are finished and close the batch +
+To stop rendering before the batches are finished and close the batch render dialog, hit Cancel. - -
To exit the batch render dialog whether or not anything is being +
+To exit the batch render dialog whether or not anything is being rendered, hit Cancel. +
+ + + - +
+ ++++Next: COMMAND LINE RENDERING, Previous: BATCH RENDERING, Up: RENDERING FILES [Contents]
+7.5.3 THE RENDER FARM
When bicubic interpolation and HDTV was first done on Cinelerra, the @@ -3048,135 +3353,149 @@ time needed to produce the simplest output became unbearable even on the fastest dual 1.7Ghz Xeon of the time. Renderfarm support even in the simplest form brings HDTV times back in line with SD while making SD faster than realtime. - -
While the renderfarm interface isn't spectacular, it's simple enough to +
+While the renderfarm interface isn’t spectacular, it’s simple enough to use inside an editing suite with less than a dozen nodes without going through the same amount of hassle you would with a several hundred node farm. Renderfarm is invoked transparently for all file->render operations when it is enabled in the preferences. - -
Cinelerra divides the selected region of the timeline into a certain +
+Cinelerra divides the selected region of the timeline into a certain number of jobs which are then dispatched to the different nodes depending on the load balance. The nodes process the jobs and write their output to individual files on the filesystem. The output files -are not concatenated. It's important for all the nodes to have access +are not concatenated. It’s important for all the nodes to have access to the same filesystem on the same mount point for assets. - -
If a node can't access an input asset it'll display error messages to -its console but probably not die. If it can't access an output asset -it'll cause the rendering to abort. - -
It should be noted that in the render dialog, the Create new file at +
+If a node can’t access an input asset it’ll display error messages to +its console but probably not die. If it can’t access an output asset +it’ll cause the rendering to abort. +
+It should be noted that in the render dialog, the Create new file at each label option causes a new renderfarm job to be created at each label instead of by the load balancer. If this option is selected when no labels exist, only one job will be created. - -
A Cinelerra renderfarm is organized into a master node and any number +
+A Cinelerra renderfarm is organized into a master node and any number of slave nodes. The master node is the computer which is running the GUI. The slave nodes are anywhere else on the network and are run from -the command line. Run a slave node from the command line with - -
cinelerra -d - -
That is the simplest configuration. Type cinelerra -h to see more +the command line. Run a slave node from the command line with +
+cinelerra -d +
+That is the simplest configuration. Type cinelerra -h to see more options. The default port number may be overridden by passing a port number after the -d. +
-Most of the time you'll want to bring in the rendered output and fine +
Most of the time you’ll want to bring in the rendered output and fine tune the timing on the timeline. Also some file formats like MPEG -can't be direct copied. Because of this, the jobs are left in +can’t be direct copied. Because of this, the jobs are left in individual files. - -
You can load these by creating a new track and specifying +
+You can load these by creating a new track and specifying concatenate to existing tracks in the load dialog. Files which support direct copy can be concatenated into a single file by rendering to the same file format with renderfarm disabled. Also to get direct copy, the track dimensions, output dimensions, and asset dimensions must be equal. - -
MPEG files or files which don't support direct copy have to be +
+MPEG files or files which don’t support direct copy have to be concatenated with a command line utility. MPEG files can be concatenated with cat. - -
Configuration of the renderfarm is described in the configuration +
+Configuration of the renderfarm is described in the configuration chapter See RENDERFARM. The slave nodes traditionally read and -write data to a common filesystem over a network, thus they don't need +write data to a common filesystem over a network, thus they don’t need hard drives. - -
Ideally all the nodes on the renderfarm have similar CPU performance. +
+Ideally all the nodes on the renderfarm have similar CPU performance. Cinelerra load balances on a first come first serve basis. If the last segment is dispatched to the slowest node, all the fastest nodes may end up waiting for the slowest node to finish while they themselves could have rendered it faster. +
+ - +
+ ++++Previous: THE RENDER FARM, Up: RENDERING FILES [Contents]
+7.5.4 COMMAND LINE RENDERING
The command line rendering facility consists of a way to load the current set of batch rendering jobs and process them without a GUI. -This is useful if you're planning on crashing X repeatedly or want to +This is useful if you’re planning on crashing X repeatedly or want to do rendering on the other side of a low bandwidth network. You might have access to a supercomputer in India but still be stuck in America, exhiled you might say. A command line interface is ideal for this. - -
To perform rendering from the command line, first run Cinelerra in +
+To perform rendering from the command line, first run Cinelerra in graphical mode. Go to file->batch render. Create the batches you intend to render in the batch window and close the window. This saves the batches in a file. Set up the desired renderfarm attributes in settings->preferences and exit Cinelerra. These settings are used the next time command line rendering is used. +
+On the command line run +
+cinelerra -r +
+to processes the current batch jobs without a GUI. Setting up all the +parameters for this operation is hard. That’s why the command line +aborts if any output files already exist. +
+Other parameters exist for specifying alternative files for the +preferences and the batches. Attempting to use anything but the +defaults is very involved so it hasn’t been tested. +
-On the command line run - -
cinelerra -r -
to processes the current batch jobs without a GUI. Setting up all the -parameters for this operation is hard. That's why the command line -aborts if any output files already exist. -
Other parameters exist for specifying alternative files for the -preferences and the batches. Attempting to use anything but the -defaults is very involved so it hasn't been tested. -
+
-
-Next: EDITING, -Previous: LOADING AND SAVING FILES, -Up: Top - ++- ++Next: EDITING, Previous: LOADING AND SAVING FILES, Up: TOP [Contents]
8 NAVIGATING THE PROJECT
The thing you want to do most of the time is get to a certain time and place in the media. Internally the media is organized into tracks. Each track extends across time. Navigation involves both getting to a track and getting to a certain time in the track. +
- -- -+
-Next: NAVIGATING THE VIEWER AND COMPOSITOR, -Up: NAVIGATING THE PROJECT ++
+ -• NAVIGATING THE PROGRAM WINDOW: + • NAVIGATING THE VIEWER AND COMPOSITOR: + • NAVIGATING THE RESOURCES: + • USING THE TRANSPORT CONTROLS: + • USING BACKGROUND RENDERING: +
+ ++++Next: NAVIGATING THE VIEWER AND COMPOSITOR, Up: NAVIGATING THE PROJECT [Contents]
+8.1 NAVIGATING THE PROGRAM WINDOW
The program window contains many features for navigation and displays @@ -3184,148 +3503,168 @@ the timeline as it is structured in memory: tracks stacked vertically and extending across time horizontall. The horizontal scroll bar allows you to scan across time. The vertical scroll bar allows you to scan across tracks. - -
Below the timeline you'll find the zoom panel. The zoom panel contains +
+Below the timeline you’ll find the zoom panel. The zoom panel contains values for sample zoom, amplitude, track zoom, and curve zoom. These values in addition to the scrollbars are the main tools for positioning the timeline. +
+ + + --
-
- Changing the sample zoom causes the amount of time visible to +
+ +
+
+
+Changing the sample zoom causes the amount of time visible to change. If your mouse has a wheel and it works in X11 go over the tumblers and use the wheel to zoom in and out. - -
The amplitude only affects audio. It determines how big the +
+The amplitude only affects audio. It determines how big the waveform is if the waveform is drawn. - -
The track zoom affects all tracks. It determines the height of +
+The track zoom affects all tracks. It determines the height of each track. If you change the track zoom the amplitude zoom compensates so audio waveforms look proportional. - -
The curve zoom affects the curves in all the tracks. It +
+The curve zoom affects the curves in all the tracks. It determines the amplitude and offset of the curves. The tumbler affects curve amplitude but the only way to change curve offset is to use the -fit curves button.
-
+fit curves button.
+In addition to the graphical tools, you'll probably more often use the +
In addition to the graphical tools, you’ll probably more often use the keyboard to navigate. Use PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN to scroll up and down the tracks. - -
Use the LEFT and RIGHT arrows to move across time in -small increments. You'll often need to scroll beyond the end of the -timeline but scrollbars won't let you do it. Instead use the +
+Use the LEFT and RIGHT arrows to move across time in +small increments. You’ll often need to scroll beyond the end of the +timeline but scrollbars won’t let you do it. Instead use the RIGHT arrow to scroll past the end of timeline. - -
Use the HOME and END keys to instantly go to the +
+Use the HOME and END keys to instantly go to the beginning or end of the timeline. In I-beam mode, hold down shift while pressing HOME or END to select the region of the timeline between the insertion point and the key pressed. - -
Use the UP and DOWN arrows to change the sample zoom by a +
+Use the UP and DOWN arrows to change the sample zoom by a power of 2. +
+CTRL-UP and CTRL-DOWN cause the amplitude zoom to change. +
+CTRL-PGUP and CTRL-PGDOWN cause the track zoom to change. +
+ALT-UP and ALT-DOWN cause the curve amplitude to change. +
-CTRL-UP and CTRL-DOWN cause the amplitude zoom to change. -
CTRL-PGUP and CTRL-PGDOWN cause the track zoom to change. +
+
-• THE INSERTION POINT: + • THE IN/OUT POINTS: + • USING LABELS IN THE PROGRAM WINDOW: + ALT-UP and ALT-DOWN cause the curve amplitude to change. -
- -8.1.1 THE INSERTION POINT
-By default you'll see a flashing insertion point in the program window -the first time you boot it up. This is where new media is pasted onto -the timeline. It's also the starting point of all playback -operations. When rendering, it defines the region of the timeline to -be rendered. -
The insertion point is normally moved by clicking inside the timebar. -Any region of the timebar not obscured by labels and in/out points is a -hotspot for repositioning the insertion point. -
-
-
-The main timebar
- The insertion point also can be moved by clicking in the timeline -itself, but not always. The insertion point has two modes of -operation: -
-
-
- drag and drop mode -
- cut and paste mode -
+ +++ ++Next: THE IN/OUT POINTS, Up: NAVIGATING THE PROGRAM WINDOW [Contents]
+8.1.1 THE INSERTION POINT
-The mode of operation is determined by selecting the arrow or the -i-beam in the buttonbar. +
By default you’ll see a flashing insertion point in the program window +the first time you boot it up. This is where new media is pasted onto +the timeline. It’s also the starting point of all playback +operations. When rendering, it defines the region of the timeline to +be rendered. +
+The insertion point is normally moved by clicking inside the timebar. +Any region of the timebar not obscured by labels and in/out points is a +hotspot for repositioning the insertion point. +
+
+
+The main timebar +
+The insertion point also can be moved by clicking in the timeline +itself, but not always. The insertion point has two modes of +operation: +
+-
+
- drag and drop mode
-
+
- cut and paste mode
-
-
-The editing mode buttons
+
If the arrow is highlighted it enables drag and drop mode. In -drag and drop mode, clicking in the timeline doesn't reposition the +
The mode of operation is determined by selecting the arrow or the +i-beam in the buttonbar. +
+
+
+The editing mode buttons +
+If the arrow is highlighted it enables drag and drop mode. In +drag and drop mode, clicking in the timeline doesn’t reposition the insertion point. Instead it selects an entire edit. Dragging in the timeline repositions the edit, snapping it to other edit boundaries. This is normally useful for reordering audio playlists and moving effects around. - -
If the i-beam is highlighted it enables cut and paste mode. In +
+If the i-beam is highlighted it enables cut and paste mode. In cut and paste mode clicking in the timeline repositions the insertion point. Dragging in the timeline highlights a region. The highlighted region becomes the playback range during the next playback operation, the rendered range during the next render operation, and the region affected by cut and paste operations. - -
Shift-clicking in the timeline extends the highlighted region. - -
Double-clicking in the timeline selects the entire edit the +
+Shift-clicking in the timeline extends the highlighted region. +
+Double-clicking in the timeline selects the entire edit the cursor is over. - -
It should be noted that when moving the insertion point and selecting +
+It should be noted that when moving the insertion point and selecting regions, the positions are either aligned to frames or aligned to -samples. When editing video you'll want to align to frames. When -editing audio you'll want to align to samples. This is set in +samples. When editing video you’ll want to align to frames. When +editing audio you’ll want to align to samples. This is set in settings->align cursor on frames. - -
If the highlighted region is the region affected by cut and paste +
+If the highlighted region is the region affected by cut and paste operations, how do I cut and paste in drag and drop mode? In this case you need to set in/out points to define an affected region. +
+ -- - -+
-Next: USING LABELS IN THE PROGRAM WINDOW, -Previous: THE INSERTION POINT, -Up: NAVIGATING THE PROGRAM WINDOW -
+ ++++Next: USING LABELS IN THE PROGRAM WINDOW, Previous: THE INSERTION POINT, Up: NAVIGATING THE PROGRAM WINDOW [Contents]
+8.1.2 THE IN/OUT POINTS
In both editing modes you can set in/out points. The in/out points @@ -3335,183 +3674,184 @@ and drop mode the highlighted area overrides the in/out points. If a highlighted area and in/out points are set, the highlighted area is affected by editing operations and the in/out points are ignored. If no region is highlighted, the in/out points are used. - -
Normally, in/out points do not affect the playback region. Only if you +
+Normally, in/out points do not affect the playback region. Only if you hold down CTRL while issuing a playback command do the in/out points determine the playback region. - -
To set in/out points go to the timebar and position the insertion point -somewhere. Hit the
+
in point button. Go
-to a position after the in point and hit the 
+To set in/out points go to the timebar and position the insertion point +somewhere. Hit the
in point button. Go
+to a position after the in point and hit the
out point button.
-
- - -
-
Timebar with in/out points set.
-
- Select either the in point or the out point and the insertion point +
+
+ Timebar with in/out points set. +
+Select either the in point or the out point and the insertion point jumps to that location. After selecting an in point, if you hit the in point button the in point will be deleted. After selecting an out point, if you hit the out point button the out point will be deleted. - -
If you select a region somewhere else while in/out points already +
+If you select a region somewhere else while in/out points already exist, the existing points will be repositioned when you hit the in/out buttons. - -
Shift-clicking on an in/out point extends the highlighted region +
+Shift-clicking on an in/out point extends the highlighted region to that point. - -
Instead of using the button bar you can use the [ and ] +
+Instead of using the button bar you can use the [ and ] keys to toggle in/out points. - -
The insertion point and the in/out points allow you to define an -affected region but they don't let you jump to exact points on the +
+The insertion point and the in/out points allow you to define an +affected region but they don’t let you jump to exact points on the timeline very easily. For this purpose there are labels. +
+ - +
+ ++++Previous: THE IN/OUT POINTS, Up: NAVIGATING THE PROGRAM WINDOW [Contents]
+8.1.3 USING LABELS IN THE PROGRAM WINDOW
Labels are an easy way to set exact locations on the timeline you want to jump to. When you position the insertion point somewhere and hit -the
label button a new label appears on the
-timeline.
-
- - -
-
Timebar with a label on it
-
- No matter what the zoom settings are, clicking on the label positions +the
+ label button a new label appears on the
+timeline.
+
+ Timebar with a label on it +
+No matter what the zoom settings are, clicking on the label positions the insertion point exactly where you set it. Hitting the label button again when a label is selected deletes it. - -
Shift-clicking on a label extends the highlighted region. - -
Double-clicking between two labels highlights the region between +
+Shift-clicking on a label extends the highlighted region. +
+Double-clicking between two labels highlights the region between the labels. - -
Hitting the l key has the same effect as the label button. - -
If you hit the label button when a region is highlighted, two labels +
+Hitting the l key has the same effect as the label button. +
+If you hit the label button when a region is highlighted, two labels are toggled at each end of the highlighted region. If one end already has a label, then the existing label is deleted and a label is created at the opposite end. - -
Labels can reposition the insertion point when they are selected but -they can also be traversed with the
+
label
+Labels can reposition the insertion point when they are selected but +they can also be traversed with the
label
traversal buttons. When a label is out of view, the label traversal
buttons reposition the timeline so the label is visible. There are
keyboard shortcuts for label traversal, too.
-
- CTRL-LEFT repositions the insertion point on the previous label. - -
CTRL-RIGHT repositions the insertion point on the next label. - -
With label traversal you can quickly seek back and forth on the +
+CTRL-LEFT repositions the insertion point on the previous label. +
+CTRL-RIGHT repositions the insertion point on the next label. +
+With label traversal you can quickly seek back and forth on the timeline but you can also select regions. - -
SHIFT-CTRL-LEFT extends the highlighted region to the previous +
+SHIFT-CTRL-LEFT extends the highlighted region to the previous label. - -
SHIFT-CTRL-RIGHT extends the highlighted region to the next label. - -
Manually hitting the label button or l key over and over again +
+SHIFT-CTRL-RIGHT extends the highlighted region to the next label. +
+Manually hitting the label button or l key over and over again to delete a series of labels can get tedious. For deleting a set of labels, first highlight a region and second use the Edit->Clear labels function. If in/out points exist, the labels between the in/out points are cleared and the highlighted region ignored. +
+ + + + -- -+
-Next: NAVIGATING THE RESOURCES, -Previous: NAVIGATING THE PROGRAM WINDOW, -Up: NAVIGATING THE PROJECT -
+ ++++Next: NAVIGATING THE RESOURCES, Previous: NAVIGATING THE PROGRAM WINDOW, Up: NAVIGATING THE PROJECT [Contents]
+8.2 NAVIGATING THE VIEWER AND COMPOSITOR
The navigation features of the Viewer and Compositor behave very similarly. Each has a timebar and slider below the video output. The timebar and slider are critical for navigation. +
+
-- -
- -
+
- The timebar represents the entire time covered by the program. When +
The timebar represents the entire time covered by the program. When you define labels and in/out points it defines those, too. Finally the timebar defines a region known as the preview region. - -
The preview region is the region of the timeline which the +
+The preview region is the region of the timeline which the slider effects. The slider only covers the time covered by the preview region. By using a preview region inside the entire program and using the slider inside the preview region you can quickly and precisely seek in the compositor and viewer. - -
When you replace the current project with a file the preview region +
+When you replace the current project with a file the preview region automatically resizes to cover the entire file. When you append data or change the size of the current project, the preview region stays the same size and shrinks. Therefore, you need to resize the preview region. - -
Load a file and then slide around it using the compositor slider. The +
+Load a file and then slide around it using the compositor slider. The insertion point in the main window follows the compositor. Move the -pointer over the compositor's timebar until it turns into a left resize +pointer over the compositor’s timebar until it turns into a left resize pointer. The click and drag right. The preview region should have changed and the slider resized proportionally. - -
Go to the right of the timebar until a right resize pointer appears. +
+Go to the right of the timebar until a right resize pointer appears. Drag left so the preview region shrinks. - -
Go to the center of the preview region in the timebar and drag it +
+Go to the center of the preview region in the timebar and drag it around to convince yourself if can be moved. +
-- -
+
-
+
- Preview region in compositor - -
If you go to the slider and slide it around with the preview region -shrunk, you'll see the slider only affects the preview region. The +
Preview region in compositor +
+If you go to the slider and slide it around with the preview region +shrunk, you’ll see the slider only affects the preview region. The timebar and slider in the viewer window work exactly the same. - -
Labels and in/out points are fully supported in the viewer and +
+Labels and in/out points are fully supported in the viewer and compositor. The only difference between the viewer and compositor is the compositor reflects the state of the program while the viewer reflects the state of a clip but not the program. - -
When you hit the label button in the compositor, the label +
+When you hit the label button in the compositor, the label appears both in the compositor timebar and the program timebar. - -
When you select a label or in/out point in the compositor, the program +
+When you select a label or in/out point in the compositor, the program window jumps to that position. - -
- -
-
Labels and in/out points in the viewer.
-
- In the viewer and compositor, labels and in/out points are displayed in +
+
+ Labels and in/out points in the viewer. +
+In the viewer and compositor, labels and in/out points are displayed in the timebar. Instead of displaying just a region of the program, the timebar displays the entire program here. +
+ -Like the Program window, the Compositor has a zoom capability. First, +
Like the Program window, the Compositor has a zoom capability. First, the pulldown menu on the bottom of the compositor window has a number of zoom options. When set to Auto the video is zoomed to match the compositor window size as closely as possible. When set to any @@ -3520,442 +3860,466 @@ be used to scroll around the output. When the video is zoomed bigger than the window size, not only do scrollbars scan around it but middle mouse button dragging in the video output scans around it. This is exactly when The Gimp does. +
+Furthermore, the zoom
+ toggle causes the Compositor
+window to enter zoom mode. In zoom mode, clicking in the video output
+zooms in while ctrl-clicking in the video output zooms out. If
+you have a wheel mouse, rotating the wheel zooms in or out too.
+Zooming in or out with the zoom tool does not change the rendered +output, mind you. It’s merely for scrutinizing video or fitting it in +the desktop. +
+ + -Furthermore, the zoom
toggle causes the Compositor
-window to enter zoom mode. In zoom mode, clicking in the video output
-zooms in while ctrl-clicking in the video output zooms out. If
-you have a wheel mouse, rotating the wheel zooms in or out too.
- Zooming in or out with the zoom tool does not change the rendered -output, mind you. It's merely for scrutinizing video or fitting it in -the desktop. -
+
-
-Next: USING THE TRANSPORT CONTROLS, -Previous: NAVIGATING THE VIEWER AND COMPOSITOR, -Up: NAVIGATING THE PROJECT - ++- ++Next: USING THE TRANSPORT CONTROLS, Previous: NAVIGATING THE VIEWER AND COMPOSITOR, Up: NAVIGATING THE PROJECT [Contents]
8.3 NAVIGATING THE RESOURCES
The resource window is divided into two areas. One area lists folders and another area lists folder contents. Going into the folder list and clicking on a folder updates the contents area with the contents of that folder. - -
The folder and contents can be displayed as icons or text. - -
Right clicking in the folder or contents area brings up a menu +
+The folder and contents can be displayed as icons or text. +
+Right clicking in the folder or contents area brings up a menu containing formatting options. Select Display text to display a text listing. Select Sort items to sort the contents of the folder alphabetically. +
+ + -- -+ + +
-Next: USING BACKGROUND RENDERING, -Previous: NAVIGATING THE RESOURCES, -Up: NAVIGATING THE PROJECT -
+ ++++Next: USING BACKGROUND RENDERING, Previous: NAVIGATING THE RESOURCES, Up: NAVIGATING THE PROJECT [Contents]
+8.4 USING THE TRANSPORT CONTROLS
Transport controls are just as useful in navigation as they are in playing back footage, hence they are described here in the navigation section. Each of the Viewer, Compositor, and Program windows has a transport panel. - -
- -
-
The transport panel.
-
- The transport panel is controlled by the keyboard as well as the +
+
+ The transport panel. +
+The transport panel is controlled by the keyboard as well as the graphical interface. For each of the operations it performs, the starting position is the position of the insertion point in the Program window and the slider in the Compositor window. The ending position is either the end or start of the timeline or the end or start of the selected region if there is one. - -
The orientation of the end or start depends on the direction of -playback. If it's forward the end position is the end of the selected -region. If it's backward the end position is the start of the selected +
+The orientation of the end or start depends on the direction of +playback. If it’s forward the end position is the end of the selected +region. If it’s backward the end position is the start of the selected region. - -
The insertion point moves to track playback. When playback stops, the +
+The insertion point moves to track playback. When playback stops, the insertion point stays where playback stopped. Thus, by playing back you change the position of the insertion point. - -
The keyboard interface is usually the fastest and has more speeds. The +
+The keyboard interface is usually the fastest and has more speeds. The transport keys are arranged in a sideways T on the number pad. +
+-
+
- + Fast reverse +
- 6 Normal reverse +
- 5 Slow reverse +
- 4 Frame reverse +
- 1 Frame forward +
- 2 Slow forward +
- 3 Normal forward +
- Enter Fast forward +
- 0 Stop +
- Spacebar Normal forward +
-
-
- + Fast reverse -
- 6 Normal reverse -
- 5 Slow reverse -
- 4 Frame reverse -
- 1 Frame forward -
- 2 Slow forward -
- 3 Normal forward -
- Enter Fast forward -
- 0 Stop -
- Spacebar Normal forward -
Hitting any key on the keyboard twice pauses it. - -
When using frame advance functions the behavior may seem odd. If you +
Hitting any key on the keyboard twice pauses it. +
+When using frame advance functions the behavior may seem odd. If you frame advance forward and then frame advance backward, the displayed -frame doesn't change. This is because the playback position isn't the +frame doesn’t change. This is because the playback position isn’t the frame but the time between two frames. The rendered frame is the area that the playback position crosses. When you increment the time between two frames by one and decrement it by one, you cross the same frame both times and so the same frame is displayed. - -
The transport behavior changes if you hold down CTRL when issuing any +
+The transport behavior changes if you hold down CTRL when issuing any of the transport commands. This causes the starting point to be the in point if playing forward and the out point if playing backward. If playing forward, the out point becomes the ending point and if playing backward, the in point becomes the ending point. If no in/out points are specified, the behavior falls back to using the insertion point and track boundaries as the starting and ending points. +
-- -
-Previous: USING THE TRANSPORT CONTROLS, -Up: NAVIGATING THE PROJECT +
+ ++- ++Previous: USING THE TRANSPORT CONTROLS, Up: NAVIGATING THE PROJECT [Contents]
8.5 USING BACKGROUND RENDERING
+ +Background rendering allows impossibly slow effects to play back in realtime shortly after the effect is pasted in the timeline. It continuously renders temporary output. When renderfarm is enabled, background rendering uses the renderfarm continuously. This way, any size video can be seen in realtime merely by creating a fast enough network with enough nodes. - -
Background rendering is enabled in settings->preferences->performance. +
+Background rendering is enabled in settings->preferences->performance. It has one interactive function: settings->set background render. This sets the point where background rendering begins to where the in point is. If any video exists, a red bar appears in the time bar showing what has been background rendered. - -
It's often useful to insert an effect or a transition and then select +
+It’s often useful to insert an effect or a transition and then select settings->set background render right before the effect to preview it in full framerates. +
-- -
-Next: USING EFFECTS, -Previous: NAVIGATING THE PROJECT, -Up: Top +
+ ++- ++Next: USING EFFECTS, Previous: NAVIGATING THE PROJECT, Up: TOP [Contents]
9 EDITING
+Editing comprises both the time domain and the track domain. Since the timeline consists of a stack of tracks, you need to worry about how to sort and create tracks in addition to what time certain media appears on a track. - -
In the time domain, Cinelerra offers many ways to approach the editing +
+In the time domain, Cinelerra offers many ways to approach the editing process. The three main methods are two screen editing, drag and drop editing, and cut and paste editing. - -
There are several concepts Cinelerra uses when editing which apply to +
+There are several concepts Cinelerra uses when editing which apply to all the methods. The timeline is where all editing decisions are represented. This is a stack of tracks in the center of the main window. It can be scrolled up, down, left and right with the scrollbars on the right and bottom of it. It can also be scrolled up and down with a mouse wheel. - -
The active region is the range of time which is affected by editing +
+The active region is the range of time which is affected by editing commands on the timeline. The active region is determined first by the -presence of in/out points in the timeline. If those don't exist the +presence of in/out points in the timeline. If those don’t exist the highlighted region is used. If no highlighted region exists the insertion point is used as the start of the active region. Some commands treat all the space to the right of the insertion point as active, like Render, while others treat the active length as 0 if no end point for the active region is defined. - -
Finally, editing decisions never affect source material. This is +
+Finally, editing decisions never affect source material. This is non destructive editing and it became popular with audio because it was much faster than if you had to copy all the media affected by an edit. Editing only affects pointers to source material, so if you want to have a media file at the end of your editing session which -represents the editing decisions, you need to render it. +represents the editing decisions, you need to render it. See RENDERING FILES. - -
Every track on the timeline has a set of attributes on +
+Every track on the timeline has a set of attributes on the left, the most important of which is the arm track attribute. - -
- -+ + + ++
+ + +• THE PATCHBAY: Enabling different features on different tracks + • NUDGING TRACKS: Move entire tracks horizontally + • PANNING TRACKS: Changing the audio output channels + • AUTOMATIC TRACK PANNING: Panning tracks to common speaker arrangements + • STANDARD AUDIO MAPPINGS: Making audio panning that works on other players. + • MANIPULATING TRACKS: Moving whole tracks around + • TWO SCREEN EDITING: Using two video windows to edit + • DRAG AND DROP EDITING: Dragging objects to edit + • CUT AND PASTE EDITING: Editing media like text + • TRIMMING: Changing in and out points +
-
-Next: NUDGING TRACKS, -Up: EDITING - ++- ++Next: NUDGING TRACKS, Up: EDITING [Contents]
9.1 THE PATCHBAY
+On the left of the timeline is a region affectionately known as the patchbay. The patchbay enables features specific to each track. All tracks have a text area for naming the track. - -
All tracks have an expander
+
for viewing
+All tracks have an expander
for viewing
more options and for viewing the effects on the track. Click on the
-expander to expand or collapse the track. If it's pointing sideways,
-the track is collapsed. If it's pointing down, the track is expanded.
+expander to expand or collapse the track. If it’s pointing sideways,
+the track is collapsed. If it’s pointing down, the track is expanded.
The effects appear below the media for the track if they exist.
-
- All tracks have the following row of toggles for several features. - -
- -
-
-Track attributes
-
- If the toggle is colored, it is enabled. If the toggle is the +
+All tracks have the following row of toggles for several features. +
+
+
+Track attributes +
+ +If the toggle is colored, it is enabled. If the toggle is the background color of most of the windows, it is disabled. Click on the toggle to enable or disable the feature. Several mouse operations speed up the configuration of several tracks at a time. - -
Click on an attribute and drag across adjacent tracks to copy the same +
+Click on an attribute and drag across adjacent tracks to copy the same attribute to those tracks. - -
Hold down shift while clicking a track's attribute to enable the +
+Hold down shift while clicking a track’s attribute to enable the attribute in the current track and toggle the attribute in all the other tracks. - -
Hold down shift while clicking an attribute. Click until all the +
+Hold down shift while clicking an attribute. Click until all the tracks except the selected one are disabled. Then drag the cursor over the adjacent track to enable the attribute in the adjacent track. +
-The other attributes affect the output of the track. - -
-
-
-
+
The other attributes affect the output of the track. +
+-
+
-
Play track determines whether the track is rendered or not. If
-it's off, the track is not rendered. However, if the track is chained
+it’s off, the track is not rendered. However, if the track is chained
to any other tracks, the other tracks perform all the effects in the
chained track, regardless of play status.
-
- -
- - -
+
+ + -
Arm track determines whether the track is armed or not. Only the
armed tracks are affected by editing operations. Make sure you
have enough armed destination tracks when you paste or splice material
or some tracks in the material will get left out.
-
In addition to restricting editing operations, the armed tracks in +
In addition to restricting editing operations, the armed tracks in combination with the active region determine where material is inserted when loading files. If the files are loaded with one of the insertion -strategies which doesn't delete the existing project, the armed tracks +strategies which doesn’t delete the existing project, the armed tracks will be used as destination tracks. - -
Press Tab while the cursor is anywhere over a track to toggle the +
+Press Tab while the cursor is anywhere over a track to toggle the track arming status. - -
Press Shift-Tab while the cursor is over a track to toggle the +
+Press Shift-Tab while the cursor is over a track to toggle the arming status of every other track. - -
- + +
-
Gang fader causes the fader to track the movement of whatever other
-fader you're adjusting. A fader is only ganged if the arm track is
+fader you’re adjusting. A fader is only ganged if the arm track is
also on. This is normally used to adjust audio levels on all the
tracks simultaneously. Gang also causes Nudge parameters to
synchronise across all the ganged tracks.
-
- -
- - -
+
+
+ + -
Draw media determines if picons or waveforms are drawn on the
track. By default, some file formats load with this off while other
file formats load with it on. This depends on whether the file format
takes a long time to draw on the timeline. Merely set it to on if you
want to see picons for any file format.
-
- -
- - -
+
+ + -
Mute track causes the output to be thrown away once the track is
completely rendered. This happens whether or not play track is
on. If the track is part of an effect chain, the output of the effect
-chain track is overlayed on the final output even though it's routed
+chain track is overlayed on the final output even though it’s routed
back to another track. Mute track is used to keep the effect chain
track from overlapping the output of the source track.
-
- -
- - -
+
+ + -
Fader All tracks have a fader, but the units of each fader depend
-on whether it's audio or video. Click and drag the fader to fade the
+on whether it’s audio or video. Click and drag the fader to fade the
track in and out. If it is ganged to other tracks of the same media
type, with the arm option enabled, the other faders should follow.
-
Hold down shift and drag a fader to center it on 0. +
Hold down shift and drag a fader to center it on 0. +
+
-
Play track determines whether the track is rendered or not. If
-it's off, the track is not rendered. However, if the track is chained
+it’s off, the track is not rendered. However, if the track is chained
to any other tracks, the other tracks perform all the effects in the
chained track, regardless of play status.
-
- -
-Next: PANNING TRACKS, -Previous: THE PATCHBAY, -Up: EDITING +
+ ++- ++Next: PANNING TRACKS, Previous: THE PATCHBAY, Up: EDITING [Contents]
9.2 NUDGING TRACKS
Each track has a nudge textbox in its patchbay. You may have to expand the track to see it. These are views of the patchbays when expanded. +
+
- +Pan and nudge for an audio track. +
+
- Pan and nudge for an audio track. +
Overlay mode and nudge for a video track. +
-- -Overlay mode and nudge for a video track. - -
The nudge is the amount the track is shifted left or right during +
The nudge is the amount the track is shifted left or right during playback. The track is not displayed shifted on the timeline, but it -is shifted when it's played back. This is useful for synchronizing +is shifted when it’s played back. This is useful for synchronizing audio with video, creating fake stereo, or compensating for an effect which shifts time, all without tampering with any edits. - -
Merely enter in the amount of time to shift by to instantly shift the +
+Merely enter in the amount of time to shift by to instantly shift the track. Negative numbers make the track play later. Positive numbers make the track play sooner. The nudge units are either seconds or the native units for the track. Select the units by right clicking on the nudge textbox and using the context sensitive menu. - -
Nudge settings are ganged with the Gang faders toggle and the +
+Nudge settings are ganged with the Gang faders toggle and the Arm track toggle. - -
Use the mouse wheel over the nudge textbox to increment and decriment +
+Use the mouse wheel over the nudge textbox to increment and decriment it. +
+ - +
+ ++++Next: AUTOMATIC TRACK PANNING, Previous: NUDGING TRACKS, Up: EDITING [Contents]
+9.3 PANNING TRACKS
Audio tracks have a panning box in their patchbay. It may have to be expanded to see it. The panning box is shown here. +
+
- - -Pan and nudge for an audio track. - -
Position the pointer in the panning box and click/drag to reposition +
Pan and nudge for an audio track. +
+Position the pointer in the panning box and click/drag to reposition the audio output among the speaker arrangement. The loudness of each speaker is printed during the dragging operation. The panning box uses a special algorithm to try to allow audio to be focused through one speaker or branched between the nearest speakers when more than 2 speakers are used. +
-- -
-Next: STANDARD AUDIO MAPPINGS, -Previous: PANNING TRACKS, -Up: EDITING +
+ ++- ++Next: STANDARD AUDIO MAPPINGS, Previous: PANNING TRACKS, Up: EDITING [Contents]
9.4 AUTOMATIC TRACK PANNING
+Several convenience functions are provided for automatically setting the panning to several common standards. They are listed in the Audio menu. These functions only affect audio tracks with recording enabled. - -
Audio->Map 1:1 - This maps every track to its own channel and wraps -around when all the channels are allocated. It's most useful for +
+Audio->Map 1:1 - This maps every track to its own channel and wraps +around when all the channels are allocated. It’s most useful for making 2 tracks with 2 channels map to stereo and for making 6 tracks with 6 channels map to a 6 channel soundcard. - -
Audio->Map 5.1:2 - This maps 6 tracks to 2 channels. The project +
+Audio->Map 5.1:2 - This maps 6 tracks to 2 channels. The project should have 2 channels when using this function. Go to Settings->format to set the output channels to 2. This is most useful for downmixing 5.1 audio to stereo. +
- + +
+ ++++Next: MANIPULATING TRACKS, Previous: AUTOMATIC TRACK PANNING, Up: EDITING [Contents]
+9.5 STANDARD AUDIO MAPPINGS
Although Cinelerra lets you map any audio track to any speaker, there are standard mappings you should use to ensure the media can be played back elsewhere. Also, most audio encoders require the audio tracks to -be mapped to standard speaker numbers or they won't work. - -
In the channel position widget See SETTING PROJECT ATTRIBUTES, +be mapped to standard speaker numbers or they won’t work. +
+In the channel position widget See SETTING PROJECT ATTRIBUTES, the channels are numbered to correspond to the output tracks they are rendered to. For stereo, the source of channel 1 needs to be the left track and the source of channel 2 needs to be the right track. - -
For 5.1 surround sound, the sources of the 6 channels need to be in the +
+For 5.1 surround sound, the sources of the 6 channels need to be in the order of center, front left, front right, back left, back right, low -frequency effects. If the right tracks aren't mapped to the right -speakers, most audio encoders won't encode the right information if +frequency effects. If the right tracks aren’t mapped to the right +speakers, most audio encoders won’t encode the right information if they encode anything at all. The low frequency effects track -specifically can't store high frequencies in most cases. +specifically can’t store high frequencies in most cases. +
+ - +
+ ++++Next: TWO SCREEN EDITING, Previous: STANDARD AUDIO MAPPINGS, Up: EDITING [Contents]
+9.6 MANIPULATING TRACKS
Tracks in Cinelerra either contain audio or video. There is no special @@ -3965,25 +4329,25 @@ tracks. You can still add or delete tracks from a number of menus. The Tracks menu contains a number of options for dealing with multiple tracks simultaneously. Each track itself has a popup menu which affects one track. - -
Bring up the popup menu by moving over a track and right clicking. The -popup menu affects the track whether it's armed or not. - -
Move up and move down moves the one track up or down in +
+Bring up the popup menu by moving over a track and right clicking. The +popup menu affects the track whether it’s armed or not. +
+Move up and move down moves the one track up or down in the stack. Delete track deletes the track. - -
Operations in the Tracks menu affect only tracks which are +
+Operations in the Tracks menu affect only tracks which are armed. - -
Move tracks up and Move tracks down shift all the armed +
+Move tracks up and Move tracks down shift all the armed tracks up or down the stack. - -
Delete tracks deletes the armed tracks. - -
Delete last track deletes the last track, whether it's armed or +
+Delete tracks deletes the armed tracks. +
+Delete last track deletes the last track, whether it’s armed or not. Holding down the d key quickly deletes all the tracks. - -
Concatenate tracks is more complicated. It takes every +
+Concatenate tracks is more complicated. It takes every playable track and concatenates it to the end of the first armed tracks. If there are two armed tracks followed by two playable tracks, the concatenate operation puts the two playable tracks @@ -3991,24 +4355,30 @@ after the two armed tracks. If there are three playable tracks instead, two tracks are put after the armed tracks and a third track is put on the end of the first armed track. The destination track wraps around until all the playable tracks are concatenated. - -
Finally, you'll want to create new tracks. The Audio and +
+Finally, you’ll want to create new tracks. The Audio and Video menus each contain an option to add a track of their specific type. In the case of audio, the new track is put on the bottom of the timeline and the output channel of the audio track is incremented by one. In the case of video, the new track is put on the top of the timeline. This way, video has a natural compositing order. New video tracks are overlayed on top of old tracks. +
- + + + + + +
+ ++++Next: DRAG AND DROP EDITING, Previous: MANIPULATING TRACKS, Up: EDITING [Contents]
+9.7 TWO SCREEN EDITING
This is the fastest way to construct a program out of movie files. The @@ -4016,178 +4386,198 @@ idea consists of viewing a movie file in one window and viewing the program in another window. Sections of the movie file are defined in one window and transferred to the end of the program in the other window. - -
The way to begin a two screen editing session is to load some +
+The way to begin a two screen editing session is to load some resources. In file->load load some movies with the insertion mode create new resources. You want the timeline to stay unchanged while new resources are brought in. Go to the Resource Window and select the media folder. The newly loaded resources should appear. Drag a resource from the media side of the window over the Viewer window. - -
There should be enough armed tracks on the timeline to put the sections -of source material that you want. If there aren't, create new tracks +
+There should be enough armed tracks on the timeline to put the sections +of source material that you want. If there aren’t, create new tracks or arm more tracks. - -
In the viewer window seek to the starting point of a clip you want to +
+In the viewer window seek to the starting point of a clip you want to use. Use either the slider or the transport controls. Use the preview region to narrow down the search. Set the -starting point with the
in point button.
-
- Seek to the ending point of the clip you want to use. Set the ending -point with the
+ out point button. The
+starting point with the in point button.
+Seek to the ending point of the clip you want to use. Set the ending +point with the
out point button. The
two points should now appear on the timebar and define a clip.
-
- There are several things you can do with the clip now. - -
-
-
-
-Splice
inserts the clip in the timeline, pushing
+
+There are several things you can do with the clip now. +
+-
+
-
+Splice inserts the clip in the timeline, pushing
everything back. If an in point or out point exists on
-the timeline it's inserted there, otherwise it's inserted after the
+the timeline it’s inserted there, otherwise it’s inserted after the
insertion point. After that, the insertion point moves to the end of
the clip. If there is no in/out point, the insertion point will be
used as the next splice location. This way you can continuously build
up the program by splicing.
-
-
-Overwrite
overwrites the region of the
+ -
+Overwrite overwrites the region of the
timeline with the clip. If an in point or out point
-exists on the timeline it's overwritten there, otherwise it's
+exists on the timeline it’s overwritten there, otherwise it’s
overwritten after the insertion point. If a region is highlighted or
both in and out points exist the difference between the active region
and the clip length is deleted.
-
-
-Create a clip
generates a new clip for the
-resource window containing the affected region but doesn't change the
+
+
+ -
+Create a clip generates a new clip for the
+resource window containing the affected region but doesn’t change the
timeline. Every clip has a title and a description. These are
optional.
-
- +
- Copy behaves the same as in cut and paste editing. -
-
+Splice
Two screen editing can be done purely by keybard shortcuts. When you +
Two screen editing can be done purely by keybard shortcuts. When you move the pointer over any button a tooltip should appear, showing what key is bound to that button. In the Viewer window, the number pad keys control the transport and the [ ] v keys perform in/out points and splicing. +
+ + + + + - + + +
+ ++++Next: CUT AND PASTE EDITING, Previous: TWO SCREEN EDITING, Up: EDITING [Contents]
+9.8 DRAG AND DROP EDITING
The answer is yes, you can you create a bunch of clips and drag them on the timeline. You can also drag edits around the timeline. - -
Load some files using file->load. Set the insertion mode to +
+Load some files using file->load. Set the insertion mode to Create new resources. This loads the files into the Resource Window. Create some audio and video tracks on the timeline using the video and audio menus. - -
Open the Media folder in the resource window. Drag a media file +
+Open the Media folder in the resource window. Drag a media file from the resource window to the timeline. If the media has video, drag it onto a video track. If the media is pure audio, drag it onto an audio track. - -
Cinelerra fills out the audio and video tracks below the dragging +
+Cinelerra fills out the audio and video tracks below the dragging cursor with data from the file. This affects what tracks you should create initially and which track to drag the media onto. If the media -has one video track and two audio tracks, you'll need one video track +has one video track and two audio tracks, you’ll need one video track and two audio tracks on the timeline and the media should be dragged -over the first video track. If the media has audio only you'll need +over the first video track. If the media has audio only you’ll need one audio track on the timeline for every audio track in the media and the media should be dragged over the first audio track. - -
When dragging, the media snaps to the start of track if the track is +
+When dragging, the media snaps to the start of track if the track is empty. If there are edits on the track, the media snaps to the nearest edit boundary. - -
You can also drag multiple files from the resource window. Either draw +
+You can also drag multiple files from the resource window. Either draw a box around the files, use SHIFT, or use CTRL when selecting files. When you drop the files in the timeline, they are concatenated. The behavior of SHIFT and CTRL changes depending on if the resources are in text or icons. - -
To display the resources as text or icons, right click inside the media +
+To display the resources as text or icons, right click inside the media list. Select either display icons or display text to change the list format. - -
When displaying text in the resource window SHIFT-clicking on +
+When displaying text in the resource window SHIFT-clicking on media files extends the number of highlighted selections. CTRL-clicking on media files in text mode selects additional files one at a time. - -
When displaying icons in the resource window SHIFT-clicking or +
+When displaying icons in the resource window SHIFT-clicking or CTRL-clicking selects media files one at a time. - -
In addition to dragging media files, if you create clips and open the +
+In addition to dragging media files, if you create clips and open the clip folder you can drag clips on the timeline. - -
In the timeline there is further dragging functionality. To enable the +
+In the timeline there is further dragging functionality. To enable the dragging functionality of the timeline, select the arrow toggle -
. Move over an edit and drag it. If more than one
+. Move over an edit and drag it. If more than one
track is armed, Cinelerra will drag any edits which start on the same
position as the edit the cursur is currently over. During a dragging
operation the edit snaps to the nearest boundary.
-
- Dragging edits around the timeline allows you to sort music playlists, +
+Dragging edits around the timeline allows you to sort music playlists, sort movie scenes, and give better NAB demos but not much else. +
+ + + + + + + - +
+ ++++Next: TRIMMING, Previous: DRAG AND DROP EDITING, Up: EDITING [Contents]
+9.9 CUT AND PASTE EDITING
This is the traditional method of editing in audio editors. In the case of Cinelerra, you either need to start a second copy of Cinelerra and copy from one copy to the other, copy from different tracks in the same copy, or load a media file into the Viewer and copy from there. - -
Load some files onto the timeline. To perform cut and paste editing -select the
+
i-beam toggle. Select a region of the
-timeline and select the 
cut button to cut it. Move the
+Load some files onto the timeline. To perform cut and paste editing +select the
i-beam toggle. Select a region of the
+timeline and select the cut button to cut it. Move the
insertion point to another point in the timeline and select the
-
paste button. Assuming no in/out points are defined on
+ paste button. Assuming no in/out points are defined on
the timeline this performs a cut and paste operation.
-
- If in/out points are defined, the insertion point and highlighted +
+If in/out points are defined, the insertion point and highlighted region are overridden by the in/out points for clipboard operations. Thus, with in/out points you can perform cut and paste in drag and drop mode as well as cut and paste mode. - -
When editing audio, it is customary to cut from one part of a waveform +
+When editing audio, it is customary to cut from one part of a waveform into the same part of another waveform. The start and stop points of the cut are identical in each waveform and might be offset slightly, while the wave data is different. It would be very hard to highlight one waveform to cut it and highlight the second waveform to paste it without changing the relative start and stop positions. - -
One option for simplifying this is to open a second copy of Cinelerra, +
+One option for simplifying this is to open a second copy of Cinelerra, cutting and pasting to transport media between the two copies. This way two highlighed regions can exist simultanously. - -
Another option is to set in/out points for the source region of the +
+Another option is to set in/out points for the source region of the source waveform and set labels for the destination region of the destination waveform. Perform a cut, clear the in/out points, select the region between the labels, and perform a paste. +
+ -A final operation in cut and paste editing is the edit->clear +
A final operation in cut and paste editing is the edit->clear operation. If a region is highlighted or in/out points exist, the affected region is cleared by edit->clear. But if the insertion point is over an edit boundary and the edits on each side of the edit @@ -4195,444 +4585,486 @@ boundary are the same resource, the edits are combined into one edit comprised by the resource. The start of this one edit is the start of the first edit and the end of this one edit is the end of the second edit. This either results in the edit expanding or shrinking. +
- + +
+ ++++Previous: CUT AND PASTE EDITING, Up: EDITING [Contents]
+9.10 TRIMMING
-With some edits on the timeline it's possible to do trimming. By +
With some edits on the timeline it’s possible to do trimming. By trimming you shrink or grow the edit boundaries by dragging them. In either drag and drop mode or cut and paste mode, move the cursor over an edit boundary until it changes shape. The cursor will either be an expand left or an expand right. If the cursor is an expand left, the dragging operation affects the beginning of the edit. If the cursor is an expand right, the dragging operation affects the end of the edit. - -
When you click on an edit boundary to start dragging, the mouse button +
+When you click on an edit boundary to start dragging, the mouse button number determines which dragging behavior is going to be followed. 3 possible behaviors are bound to mouse buttons in the interface preferences. See INTERFACE. - -
The effect of each drag operation not only depends on the behavior -button but whether the beginning or end of the edit is being dragged. +
+The effect of each drag operation not only depends on the behavior +button but whether the beginning or end of the edit is being dragged. When you release the mouse button, the trimming operation is performed. - -
In a Drag all following edits operation, the beginning of the +
+In a Drag all following edits operation, the beginning of the edit either cuts data from the edit if you move it forward or pastes new data from before the edit if you move it backward. The end of the edit pastes data into the edit if you move it forward or cuts data from the end of the edit if you move it backward. All the edits thereafter shift. Finally, if you drag the end of the edit past the start of the edit, the edit is deleted. - -
In a Drag only one edit operation, the behavior is the same when +
+In a Drag only one edit operation, the behavior is the same when you drag the beginning or end of an edit. The only difference is none of the other edits in the track shift. Instead, anything adjacent to the current edit expands or shrinks to fill gaps left by the drag operation. - -
In a Drag source only operation, nothing is cut or pasted. If +
+In a Drag source only operation, nothing is cut or pasted. If you move the beginning or end of the edit forward, the source reference in the edit shifts forward. If you move the beginning or end of the edit backward, the source reference shifts backward. Where the edit appears in the timeline remains the same but the source shifts. - -
For all file formats besides still images, the extent of the trimming +
+For all file formats besides still images, the extent of the trimming operation is clamped to the source file length. Attempting to drag the start of the edit beyond the start of the source clamps it to the source start. - -
In all trimming operations, all edits which start on the same position +
+In all trimming operations, all edits which start on the same position as the cursor when the drag operation begins are affected. Unarm tracks to prevent edits from getting affected. +
+ + - + + +
+ ++++Next: SETTING PROJECT ATTRIBUTES, Previous: EDITING, Up: TOP [Contents]
+10 USING EFFECTS
It would be sufficient to perform all changes to the timeline using -editing operations, but this isn't very extensible. Certain timeline +editing operations, but this isn’t very extensible. Certain timeline changes should produce a different effect in the output without involving a unique procedure to apply each change. This is why we have effects. - -
Effects fall into three categories, and each effect in a category is +
+Effects fall into three categories, and each effect in a category is applied using the same procedure. +
- ++
- +• REALTIME EFFECTS: + • RENDERED EFFECTS: + • TRANSITIONS: + • LADSPA EFFECTS: + • EFFECT PRESETS: +
+ ++++Next: RENDERED EFFECTS, Up: USING EFFECTS [Contents]
+10.1 REALTIME EFFECTS
These are layered under the track they apply to. They process the track when the track is played back, with no permanent storage of the output except when the project is rendered. - -
APPLYING REALTIME EFFECTS - -
All the realtime effects are listed in the resource window, divided +
+APPLYING REALTIME EFFECTS +
+All the realtime effects are listed in the resource window, divided into two groups: audio effects and video effects. Audio effects should be dragged from the resource window onto audio tracks. Video effects should be dragged onto video tracks. - -
If there is data on the destination track, the effect is applied to the +
+If there is data on the destination track, the effect is applied to the entire track. If there is no data on the track the effect is deleted. Finally, if a region of the track is selected the effect is pasted into the region, regardless of whether there is data. - -
Some of the effects don't process data but synthesize data. In the -case of a synthesis effect, you'll want to select a region of the +
+Some of the effects don’t process data but synthesize data. In the +case of a synthesis effect, you’ll want to select a region of the track so the dragging operation pastes it without deleting it. - -
When dragging more than one effect onto a track, you'll see the effects +
+When dragging more than one effect onto a track, you’ll see the effects layering from top to bottom, on the bottom of the track. When the track is played back, effects are processed from top to bottom. The output of the top effect becomes the input of the bottom effect and so on and so forth. - -
In addition to dragging from the resource window, there are 2 other +
+In addition to dragging from the resource window, there are 2 other methods of applying them: +
+-
+
- APPLYING FROM THE TRACK POPUP MENU:
-
-
-
- APPLYING FROM THE TRACK POPUP MENU:
-
-
Right click on a track and select Attach effect from the popup. The attach effect +
Right click on a track and select Attach effect from the popup. The attach effect dialog gives you more control than pure dragging and dropping. For one thing, the attach effect dialog lets you attach two more types of effects: shared effects and shared tracks. Select a plugin from the Plugins column and hit Attach under the plugins column to attach it. The effect is the same as if the effect was dragged from the resource window. +
+ - APPLYING FROM THE AUDIO AND VIDEO MENUS: -
- APPLYING FROM THE AUDIO AND VIDEO MENUS:
-
-
Select Audio->Attach effect... or Video->Attach effect to attach +
Select Audio->Attach effect... or Video->Attach effect to attach a realtime effect to all the recordable tracks simultaneously. The advantage with this is most of the time you want to attach the same effect to all the audio tracks and the other two methods require repeating the same work for every track. - -
The menu interface has an option called Attach single standalone and +
+The menu interface has an option called Attach single standalone and share others. Enable this to make the first track get a standalone effect and to have the other tracks share the standalone effect. Most of the time, you want this to be on. +
+
- APPLYING FROM THE TRACK POPUP MENU:
-
-
When an effect exists under a track, it most often needs to be +
When an effect exists under a track, it most often needs to be configured. Go to the effect and right click on it to bring up the effect popup. In the effect popup is a show option. The show option causes the GUI for the effect to appear under the cursor. Most -effects have GUI's but some don't. If the effect doesn't have a GUI, +effects have GUI’s but some don’t. If the effect doesn’t have a GUI, nothing pops up when the show option is selected. When you tweek parameters in the effect GUI, the parameters normally effect the entire duration of the effect. +
- ++
- +• REALTIME EFFECT TYPES: + • EDITING REALTIME EFFECTS: +
+ ++++Next: EDITING REALTIME EFFECTS, Up: REALTIME EFFECTS [Contents]
+10.1.1 REALTIME EFFECT TYPES
The two other effect types supported by the Attach Effect dialog are recycled effects. In order to use a recycled effect, three requiremenets must be met: +
+-
+
- There must be other effects in the timeline.
-
-
-
- There must be other effects in the timeline. - -
- -The other effects must be of the same type as the track you're +
- +The other effects must be of the same type as the track you’re attaching an effect to. If the track is an audio track, the effects must be audio effects. If the track is a video track, the effects must be video effects. -
- +
- The insertion point or selected region must start inside the other effects. -
In the case of a shared effect, these conditions must be true. In the +
In the case of a shared effect, these conditions must be true. In the case of a shared track, there merely must be another track on the -timeline of the same type as the track you're applying an effect to. -If you right clicked on a video track to attach an effect, there won't +timeline of the same type as the track you’re applying an effect to. +If you right clicked on a video track to attach an effect, there won’t be anything in the shared tracks column if no other video track -exists. If you right clicked on an audio track there won't be anything +exists. If you right clicked on an audio track there won’t be anything in the shared track column if no other audio track exists. - -
If shared effects or shared tracks are available, they appear in the +
+If shared effects or shared tracks are available, they appear in the shared effects and shared tracks columns. The attach button under each column causes anything highlighted in the column to be attached under the current track. - -
Shared effects and shared tracks allow very unique things to be done. +
+Shared effects and shared tracks allow very unique things to be done. In the case of a shared effect, the shared effect is treated like a -copy of the original effect except in the shared effect the GUI can't +copy of the original effect except in the shared effect the GUI can’t be brought up. All configuration of the shared effect is determined by the GUI of the original effect and only the GUI of the original effect can be brought up. - -
When a shared effect is played back, it's processed just like a normal +
+When a shared effect is played back, it’s processed just like a normal effect except the configuration is copied from the original effect. Some effects detect when they are being shared, like the reverb effects and the compressor. These effects determine what tracks are sharing them and either mix the two tracks together or use one track to stage some value. The reverb mixes tracks together to simulate ambience. The compressor uses one of the sharing tracks as the trigger. - -
When an original track has a shared track as one of its effects, +
+When an original track has a shared track as one of its effects, the shared track itself is used as a realtime effect. This is more commonly known as bouncing tracks but Cinelerra achieves the same operation by attaching shared tracks. The fade and any effects in the shared track are applied to the original track. Once the shared track has processed the data, the original track performs any effects which come below the shared track and then composites it on the output. - -
In addition, once the shared track has processed the output of the +
+In addition, once the shared track has processed the output of the original track like a realtime effect, the shared track mixes itself -into the output with it's settings for pan, mode, and projector. Thus, +into the output with it’s settings for pan, mode, and projector. Thus, two tracks are mixing the same data on the output. Most of the time -you don't want the shared track to mix the same data as the original +you don’t want the shared track to mix the same data as the original track on the output. You want it to stop right before the mixing stage and give the data back to the original track. Do this by enabling the -
mute toggle next to each track for whom you don't
+ mute toggle next to each track for whom you don’t
want to mix on the output.
-
- Suppose you were making video and you did want the shared track to -composite the original track's data on the output a second time. In +
+Suppose you were making video and you did want the shared track to +composite the original track’s data on the output a second time. In the case of video, the video from the shared track would always appear under the video from the original track, regardless of whether it was on top of the original track. This is because shared tracks are -composited in order of their attachment. Since it's part of the original +composited in order of their attachment. Since it’s part of the original track it has to be composited before the original track is composited. +
+ + + - +
+ ++++Previous: REALTIME EFFECT TYPES, Up: REALTIME EFFECTS [Contents]
+10.1.2 EDITING REALTIME EFFECTS
Many operations exist for manipulating effects once they are in the timeline. Because mixing effects and media is such complex business, -the methods used in editing effects aren't as concise as cutting and +the methods used in editing effects aren’t as concise as cutting and pasting. Some of the editing happens by dragging in/out points, some of the editing happens through popup menus, and some of it happens by dragging effects. - -
Normally when you edit tracks, the effects follow the editing +
+Normally when you edit tracks, the effects follow the editing decisions. If you cut from a track, the effect shrinks. If you drag edit in/out points, the effect changes length. This behavior can be disabled by selecting Settings->edit effects in the project window. This decouples effects from editing operations, but what if you just want to edit the effects? - -
Move the timeline cursor over the effect borders until it changes to a +
+Move the timeline cursor over the effect borders until it changes to a resize left or resize right icon. In this state, if you drag the end of the effect, it performs an edit just like dragging the end of a -track does. - -
The three editing behaviors of track trimming apply to effect trimming +track does. +
+The three editing behaviors of track trimming apply to effect trimming and they are bound to the mouse buttons that you set in interface preferences. See INTERFACE. When you perform a trim edit on an effect, the effect boundary is moved by dragging on it. Unlike track editing, the effect has no source length. You can extend the end of an effect as much as desired without being limited. - -
Also unlike track editing, the starting position of the drag operation -doesn't bind the edit decision to media. The media the effect is bound -to doesn't follow effect edits. Other effects; however, do follow +
+Also unlike track editing, the starting position of the drag operation +doesn’t bind the edit decision to media. The media the effect is bound +to doesn’t follow effect edits. Other effects; however, do follow editing decisions made on an effect. If you drag the end of an effect which is lined up to effects on other tracks, the effects on the other tracks will be edited while the media stays the same. - -
What happens if you trim the end of an effect in, leaving a lot of +
+What happens if you trim the end of an effect in, leaving a lot of unaffected time near the end of the track? When you drag an effect in from the Resource Window you can insert the effect in the portion of the row unoccupied by the trimming operation. Realtime effects are organized into rows under the track. Each row can have multiple effects. - -
In some cases you'll want a trimming operation to change only one row +
+In some cases you’ll want a trimming operation to change only one row of effects. This can be achieved by first positioning the insertion point on the start or end of the effect. Then press shift while beginning the trimming operation. This causes the operation to change only one row of effects. - -
In addition to trimming, you can move effects up or down. Every track +
+In addition to trimming, you can move effects up or down. Every track can have a stack of effects under it. By moving an effect up or down you change the order in which effects are processed in the stack. Go to an effect and right click to bring up the effect menu. The Move up and Move down options move the effect up or down. - -
When you're moving effects up or down, be aware that if they're shared +
+When you’re moving effects up or down, be aware that if they’re shared as shared effects, any references will be pointing to a different effect after the move operation. - -
Finally, there's dragging of effects. Dragging effects works just like -dragging edits. You must select the
+ arrow to enter drag and
+Finally, there’s dragging of effects. Dragging effects works just like +dragging edits. You must select the
arrow to enter drag and
drop mode before dragging effects. The effects snap to media
boundaries, effect boundaries, and tracks. Be aware if you drag a
reference to a shared effect, the reference will usually point to the
wrong effect afterwards.
-
- Right click on an effect to bring up a menu for the effect. Select +
+Right click on an effect to bring up a menu for the effect. Select attach... to change the effect or change the reference if it is a shared effect. +
+ + - + + +
+ ++++Next: TRANSITIONS, Previous: REALTIME EFFECTS, Up: USING EFFECTS [Contents]
+10.2 RENDERED EFFECTS
+Another type of effect is performed on a section of the track and the result stored somewhere before it is played back. The result is usually pasted into the track to replace the original data. - -
In 15 years, the only effect we actually ever rendered with this feature -was normalize. We've never rendered an effect which could be +
+In 15 years, the only effect we actually ever rendered with this feature +was normalize. We’ve never rendered an effect which could be applied on the timeline, even though this feature supports rendering realtime effects. - -
This feature was implemented back when computers were too slow to play +
+This feature was implemented back when computers were too slow to play back anything in realtime. Decent sounding reverb took a long time & was considered major number crunching. - -
The rendered effects are not listed in the resource window but instead +
+The rendered effects are not listed in the resource window but instead are accessed through the Audio->Render effect and Video->Render effect menu options. Each of these menu options brings up a dialog for the rendered effect. Rendered effects apply to only one type of track, either audio or video. If no tracks of the type exist, an error pops up. - -
A region of the timeline to apply the effect to must be defined before +
+A region of the timeline to apply the effect to must be defined before selecting Render effect.... If no in/out points and no highlighted region exists, the entire region after the insertion point is treated as the affected region. Otherwise, the region between the in/out points or the highlighted region is the affected region. - -
Secondly, the tracks to apply the rendered affect to need to be +
+Secondly, the tracks to apply the rendered affect to need to be armed. All other tracks are ignored. - -
Finally, the rendered affect processes certain track attributes when it +
+Finally, the rendered affect processes certain track attributes when it reads its input data but not others. Transitions in the affected track are applied. Nudge is not and effects are not. This allows the new data to be pasted into the existing position without changing the nudge value. - -
In the render effect dialog is a list of all the realtime and all the +
+In the render effect dialog is a list of all the realtime and all the rendered effects. The difference here is that the realtime effects are rendered to disk and not applied under the track. Highlight an effect in the list to designate it as the one being performed. - -
Define a file to render the effect to in the Select a file to -render to box. The
magnifying glass allows file
-selection from a list.
-
- Select a file format which can handle the track type. The -
wrench allows configuration specific to the file format.
-
- There is also an option for creating a new file at each label. If you +
+Define a file to render the effect to in the Select a file to +render to box. The
+ magnifying glass allows file
+selection from a list.
+Select a file format which can handle the track type. The +
+ wrench allows configuration specific to the file format.
+There is also an option for creating a new file at each label. If you have a CD rip on the timeline which you want to divide into different files, the labels would become dividing points between the files if this option were selected. When the timeline is divided by labels, the effect is re-initialized at every label. Normalize operations take the peak in the current file and not in the entire timeline. - -
Finally there is an insertion strategy just like in the render dialog. +
+Finally there is an insertion strategy just like in the render dialog. It should be noted that even though the effect applies only to audio or video, the insertion strategy applies to all tracks just like a clipboard operation. - -
When you click OK in the effect dialog, it calls the GUI of the +
+When you click OK in the effect dialog, it calls the GUI of the effect. If the effect is also a realtime effect, a second GUI appears to prompt for acceptance or rejection of the current settings. After accepting the settings, the effect is processed. +
+ + + - + + + + + + + +
+ ++++Next: LADSPA EFFECTS, Previous: RENDERED EFFECTS, Up: USING EFFECTS [Contents]
+10.3 TRANSITIONS
When one edit ends and another edit begins, the default behaviour is to -have the first edit's output immediately become the output of the +have the first edit’s output immediately become the output of the second edit when played back. Transitions are a way for the first -edit's output to become the second edit's output with different +edit’s output to become the second edit’s output with different variations. - -
Cinelerra supports audio and video transitions, all of which are listed +
+Cinelerra supports audio and video transitions, all of which are listed in the resource window. Transitions may only apply to the matching track type. Transitions under audio transitions can only apply to audio tracks. Transitions under video transitions can only apply to video tracks. - -
Load a video file and cut a section from the center so the edit point +
+Load a video file and cut a section from the center so the edit point is visible on the timeline. Go the resource window and click on the Video transitions folder. Drag a transition from the transition list onto the second video edit on the timeline. A box highlights over where the transition will appear. Releasing it over the second edit applies the transition between the first and second edit. - -
You can now scrub over the transition with the transport controls and +
+You can now scrub over the transition with the transport controls and watch the output in the Compositor window. Scrubbing with the -insertion point doesn't normally show transitions because the +insertion point doesn’t normally show transitions because the transition durations are usually too short. The exact point in time -when the transition takes effect isn't straightforward. It starts when +when the transition takes effect isn’t straightforward. It starts when the second edit begins and lasts a certain amount of time into the second edit. Therefore, the first asset needs to have enough data after the edit point to fill the transition into the second edit. - -
Once the transition is in place, it can be edited similarly to an +
+Once the transition is in place, it can be edited similarly to an effect. Move the pointer over the transition and right click to bring up the transition menu. The show option brings up specific parameters for the transition in question if there are any. The @@ -4640,55 +5072,61 @@ parameters for the transition in question if there are any. The Once these two parameters are set, they are applied to future transitions until they are changed again. Finally, the detach option removes the transition from the timeline. - -
Dragging and dropping transitions from the Resource window to the +
+Dragging and dropping transitions from the Resource window to the Program window can be really slow and tiring. Fortunately, once you drag a transition from the Resource window, the U and u keys will paste the same transition. The U key pastes the last video transition and the u key pastes the last audio transition on all the recordable tracks. If the insertion point or in point is -over an edit, the beginning of the edit is covered by the transition. - -
It should be noted that when playing transitions from the timeline to a +over an edit, the beginning of the edit is covered by the transition. +
+It should be noted that when playing transitions from the timeline to a hardware accelerated video device, the hardware acceleration will usually be turned off momentarily during the transition and on after the transition in order to render the transition. Using an unaccelerated video device for the entire timeline normally removes the disturbance. +
+ - +
+ ++++Next: EFFECT PRESETS, Previous: TRANSITIONS, Up: USING EFFECTS [Contents]
+10.4 LADSPA EFFECTS
+LADSPA effects are supported in realtime and rendered mode for audio. The LADSPA plugins you get from the internet vary in quality. Most -can't be tweeked in realtime very easily and work better when +can’t be tweeked in realtime very easily and work better when rendered. Some crash and some can only be applied to one track due to a lack of reentrancy. Although Cinelerra implements the LADSPA interface as accurately as possible, multiple tracks of realtime, simultaneous processing go beyond the majority of LADSPA users. LADSPA effects appear in the audio folder as the hammer and screwdriver, to signify that they are Plugins for Linux Audio Developers. - -
LADSPA Effects are enabled merely by setting the LADSPA_PATH +
+LADSPA Effects are enabled merely by setting the LADSPA_PATH environment variable to the location of your LADSPA plugins or putting them in the /usr/lib/cinelerra directory. +
- + +
+ ++++Previous: LADSPA EFFECTS, Up: USING EFFECTS [Contents]
+10.5 EFFECT PRESETS
Save and recall all the settings for an effect by using the presets @@ -4698,638 +5136,691 @@ Save all the settings to a preset by entering a title in Preset title and clicking save. Recall the settings in a preset by highlighting it and clicking Apply. Delete a preset by highlighting it and clicking Delete. +
+ + + - +
+ ++++Next: COMPOSITING, Previous: USING EFFECTS, Up: TOP [Contents]
+11 SETTING PROJECT ATTRIBUTES
When you play media files in Cinelerra, the media files have a certain number of tracks, a certain frame size, a certain sample size, and so on and so forth. No matter what the media file has; however, it is still played back according to the project attributes. If an audio -file's samplerate is different than the project attributes, it is -resampled. If a video file's frame size is different than the project +file’s samplerate is different than the project attributes, it is +resampled. If a video file’s frame size is different than the project attributes, it is composited on a black frame, either cropped or bordered with black. - -
The project attributes are adjusted in Settings->Set Format and in +
+The project attributes are adjusted in Settings->Set Format and in to a more limited extent in File->New. When you adjust project settings in file->new a new timeline is created with no data. Every timeline created from this point uses the same settings. When you adjust settings in settings->format, the timeline is not recreated with no data but every timeline created from this point uses the same settings. - -
In addition to the traditional settings for sample rate, frame rate, +
+In addition to the traditional settings for sample rate, frame rate, frame size, Cinelerra uses some unusual settings like channel positions, color model, and aspect ratio. +
- - - ++
-• AUDIO CHANNEL POSITIONS: + • COLOR MODEL: + • ASPECT RATIO: + 11.1 AUDIO CHANNEL POSITIONS
-The currently enabled audio channels and their positions in the user -interface boxes are displayed in the channel position widget. -
-
-
- +
-
+ +++ ++Next: COLOR MODEL, Up: SETTING PROJECT ATTRIBUTES [Contents]
+11.1 AUDIO CHANNEL POSITIONS
+The currently enabled audio channels and their positions in the user +interface boxes are displayed in the channel position widget. +
+
+
+
+
+
-The channels are numbered. When rendered, the output from channel 1 is +
The channels are numbered. When rendered, the output from channel 1 is rendered to the first output track in the file or the first soundcard channel of the soundcard. Later channels are rendered to their successively numbered output tracks. - -
The audio channel locations correspond to where in the panning widgets +
+The audio channel locations correspond to where in the panning widgets each of the audio outputs is. The closer the panning position is to one of the audio outputs, the more signal that speaker gets. Click on a speaker icon and drag to change the audio channel location. - -
The speakers can be in any orientation. A different speaker +
+The speakers can be in any orientation. A different speaker arrangement is stored for every number of audio channels since normally -you don't want the same speaker arrangement for different numbers of +you don’t want the same speaker arrangement for different numbers of channels. - -
Channel positions is the only setting which doesn't affect the output +
+Channel positions is the only setting which doesn’t affect the output necessarily. Click on a speaker icon and drag to change the position of a channel. It is merely a convenience so when more than 2 channels are used, the pan controls on the timeline can distinguish between them. It has nothing to do with the actual arrangement of speakers. +
-But different channels can be positioned very close together to make +
But different channels can be positioned very close together to make them have the same output. +
- +
+ ++++Next: ASPECT RATIO, Previous: AUDIO CHANNEL POSITIONS, Up: SETTING PROJECT ATTRIBUTES [Contents]
+11.2 COLOR MODEL
Color model is very important for video playback because video has the -disadvantage of being very slow. Although it isn't noticable, audio +disadvantage of being very slow. Although it isn’t noticable, audio intermediates contain much more information than the audio on disk and the audio which is played. Audio always uses the highest bandwidth -intermediate because it's fast. - -
Video intermediates must use the least amount of data for the required -quality because it's slow, but video intermediates still use a higher +intermediate because it’s fast. +
+Video intermediates must use the least amount of data for the required +quality because it’s slow, but video intermediates still use a higher bandwidth color model than video which is stored and video which is played. This allows more processing to be done with less destruction -of the original data. - -
The video is stored on disk in one colormodel, normally compressed +of the original data. +
+The video is stored on disk in one colormodel, normally compressed using a YUV derivative. When played back, Cinelerra decompresses it from the file format directly into the format of the output device. If effects are processed, the decompression is into an intermediate colormodel first and the intermediate colormodel is then converted to the format of the output device. The selection of intermediate colormodel determines how accurate and fast the effects are. - -
Cinelerra colormodels are described using a certain packing order of +
+Cinelerra colormodels are described using a certain packing order of components and a certain number of bits for each component. The packing order is printed on the left and the bit allocation is printed on the right. +
+-
+
-
+RGB-888
-
-
-
-
-RGB-888
-
-
This allocates 8 bits for the R, G, and B channels and no alpha. This +
This allocates 8 bits for the R, G, and B channels and no alpha. This is normally used for uncompressed media with low dynamic range. +
+ - +RGBA-8888 -
-
-RGBA-8888
-
-
This allocates an alpha channel to the 8 bit RGB colormodel. It's used +
This allocates an alpha channel to the 8 bit RGB colormodel. It’s used for overlaying multiple tracks. +
+ - +YUV-888 -
-
-YUV-888
-
-
This allocates 8 bits for Y, U, and V. This is used for low dynamic +
This allocates 8 bits for Y, U, and V. This is used for low dynamic range operations in which the media is compressed in the YUV color space. Most compressed media is in YUV and this allows it to be -processed fast with the least color degradation. +processed fast with the least color degradation. +
+ - +YUVA-8888 -
-
-YUVA-8888
-
-
This allocates an alpha channel to the 8 bit YUV colormodel for +
This allocates an alpha channel to the 8 bit YUV colormodel for transparency. +
+ - +RGB-Float -
-
-RGB-Float
-
-
This allocates a 32 bit float for the R, G, and B channels and no +
This allocates a 32 bit float for the R, G, and B channels and no alpha. This is used for high dynamic range processing with no transparency. - -
- + +
- RGBA-Float This adds a 32 bit float for alpha to RGB-Float. This is used for high dynamic range processing with transparency. -
-
-RGB-888
-
-
In order to do effects which involve alpha channels, a colormodel with +
In order to do effects which involve alpha channels, a colormodel with an alpha channel must be selected. These are RGBA8888, YUVA8888, and RGBA Float. The 4 channel colormodels are notoriously slower than 3 channel colormodels, with the slowest being RGBA Float. Some effects, like fade, work around the need for alpha channels while other effects, -like chromakey, require an alpha channel to do anything, so it's a good +like chromakey, require an alpha channel to do anything, so it’s a good idea to try the effect without alpha channels to see if it works before settling on an alpha channel and slowing it down. - -
The YUV colormodels are usually faster than RGB colormodels when using +
+The YUV colormodels are usually faster than RGB colormodels when using compressed footage. They also destroy fewer colors than RGB colormodels. If footage stored as JPEG or MPEG is processed many times -in RGB, the colors will fade while they won't if processed in YUV. - -
Years of working with high dynamic range footage have shown floating +in RGB, the colors will fade while they won’t if processed in YUV. +
+Years of working with high dynamic range footage have shown floating point RGB to be the best format for high dynamic range. While 16 bit integers were used in the past, these were too lossy and slow for the amount of improvement. - -
RGB float doesn't destroy information when used with YUV source +
+RGB float doesn’t destroy information when used with YUV source footage. It also supports brightness above 100%. Be aware that some effects, like Histogram, still clip above 100% when in floating point. - -
+ +
-
-Previous: COLOR MODEL, -Up: SETTING PROJECT ATTRIBUTES - ++- ++Previous: COLOR MODEL, Up: SETTING PROJECT ATTRIBUTES [Contents]
11.3 ASPECT RATIO
Aspect ratio determines the shape of the video output when using the X11 video output. The numbers in each direction can be any floating point number. When drawn on the screen, video pixels are stretched to match the aspect ratio. - -
Some file formats, like MPEG video, write the project aspect ratio to +
+Some file formats, like MPEG video, write the project aspect ratio to the file. +
+ + + - + + + +
+ ++++Next: KEYFRAMES, Previous: SETTING PROJECT ATTRIBUTES, Up: TOP [Contents]
+12 COMPOSITING
-A large amount of Cinelerra's binary size is directed towards + +
A large amount of Cinelerra’s binary size is directed towards compositing. When you remove the letterboxing from a widescreen show, -you're compositing. Changing the resolution of a show, making a split +you’re compositing. Changing the resolution of a show, making a split screen, and fading in and out among other things are all compositing -operations in Cinelerra. Cinelerra detects when it's in a compositing +operations in Cinelerra. Cinelerra detects when it’s in a compositing operation and plays back through the compositing engine only then. Otherwise, it uses the fastest decoder available in the hardware. - -
Compositing operations are done on the timeline and in the Compositor +
+Compositing operations are done on the timeline and in the Compositor window. Shortcuts exist in the Resource window for changing some compositing attributes. Once some video files are on the timeline, the compositor window is a good place to try compositing. +
- -- -+ +
-Next: MASKS, -Up: COMPOSITING ++
-• THE CAMERA AND PROJECTOR: + • MASKS: + • CROPPING: + • SAFE REGIONS: + • OVERLAY MODES: + • TRACK AND OUTPUT SIZES: +
+ ++++Next: MASKS, Up: COMPOSITING [Contents]
+12.1 THE CAMERA AND PROJECTOR
In the compositor window, the most important functions are the -
camera button and the projector
+ camera button and the projector
button. These control operation of the camera and projector. Inside
-Cinelerra's compositing pipeline, the camera determines where in the
+Cinelerra’s compositing pipeline, the camera determines where in the
source video the temporary is copied from. The projector determines
where in the output the temporary is copied to. The temporary is a
-frame of video in Cinelerra's memory where all graphics processing is
+frame of video in Cinelerra’s memory where all graphics processing is
done. Each track has a different temporary which is defined by the
track size. By resizing the tracks you can create splitscreens, pans,
and zooms.
-
- - - -
-
- - - -
-Visual representation of the compositing pipeline. - -When editing the camera and projector in the compositing window, the +
+
+
+
+
+
+Visual representation of the compositing pipeline. +
+When editing the camera and projector in the compositing window, the first track with record enabled is the track affected. Even if -the track is completely transparent, it's still the affected track. If +the track is completely transparent, it’s still the affected track. If multiple video tracks exist, the easiest way to select one track for editing is to shift-click on the record icon of the track. This solos the track. - -
When the projector button is enabled in the compositor window, -you're in projector editing mode. A guide box appears in the video +
+When the projector button is enabled in the compositor window, +you’re in projector editing mode. A guide box appears in the video window. Dragging anywhere in the video window causes the guide box to move, hopefully along with the video. shift-dragging anywhere in the video window causes the guide box to shrink and grow along with -the video. Once you've positioned the video with the projector, you're +the video. Once you’ve positioned the video with the projector, you’re ready to master the camera. - -
Select the
+ camera button to enable camera editing mode.
+Select the
camera button to enable camera editing mode.
In this mode, the guide box shows where the camera position is in
relation to past and future camera positions but not where it is in
relation to the source video. Dragging the camera box in the
-compositor window doesn't move the box but instead moves the location
+compositor window doesn’t move the box but instead moves the location
of the video inside the box.
-
- For example, when you drag the camera left, the video moves right. +
+For example, when you drag the camera left, the video moves right. When you drag the camera up, the video moves down. When you shift-drag the camera, the effect is the same as if you zoomed in or out of the source. The intention of the camera is to produce still photo panning, while the intention of the projector is to composite several sources in the same scene. - -
In the compositing window, there is a popup menu of options for the +
+In the compositing window, there is a popup menu of options for the camera and projector. Right click over the video portion of the compositing window to bring up the menu. +
+-
+
- Reset Camera causes the camera to return to the center position.
-
-
-
- Reset Camera causes the camera to return to the center position. +
- Reset Projector causes the projector to return to the center. -
- Reset Projector causes the projector to return to the center. +
The camera and projector have shortcut operations neither in the popup +
The camera and projector have shortcut operations neither in the popup menu or represented in video overlays. These are accessed in the Tool window. Most operations in the Compositor window have a -tool window which is enabled by activating the
+tool window which is enabled by activating the
question mark.
-
- In the case of the camera and projector, the tool window shows x, y, +
+In the case of the camera and projector, the tool window shows x, y, and z coordinates. By either tumbling or entering text directly, the camera and projector can be precisely positioned. 9 justification types are also defined for easy access. A popular justification operation is upper left projection after image reduction. This is used when reducing the size of video with aspect ratio adjustment. - -
The translation effect allows simultaneous aspect ratio conversion and +
+The translation effect allows simultaneous aspect ratio conversion and reduction but is easier to use if the reduced video is put in the upper left of the temporary instead of in the center. The track size is set to the original size of the video and the camera is centered. The output size is set to the reduced size of the video. Without any effects, this produces just the cropped center portion of the video in the output. - -
The translation effect is dropped onto the video track. The input +
+The translation effect is dropped onto the video track. The input dimensions of the translation effect are set to the original size and the output dimensions are set to the reduced size. To put the reduced video in the center section that the projector shows would require offsetting out x and out y by a complicated calculation. -Instead, we leave out x and out y at 0 and use the projector's +Instead, we leave out x and out y at 0 and use the projector’s tool window. - -
Merely by selecting
+
left justify and
-
top justify, the projector displays the reduced
+Merely by selecting
+ - + + left justify and
+ top justify, the projector displays the reduced
image from the top left corner of the temporary in the center of the
output.
+
+ ++++Next: CROPPING, Previous: THE CAMERA AND PROJECTOR, Up: COMPOSITING [Contents]
+12.2 MASKS
Masks select a region of the video for either displaying or hiding. Masks are also used in conjunction with another effect to isolate the effect to a certain region of the frame. A copy of one video track may be delayed slightly and unmasked in locations where the one copy has -interference but the other copy doesn't. Color correction may be +interference but the other copy doesn’t. Color correction may be needed in one section of a frame but not another. A mask can be applied to just a section of the color corrected track while the vanilla track shows through. Removal of boom microphones, airplanes, and housewives are other mask uses. - -
The order of the compositing pipeline affects what can be done with +
+The order of the compositing pipeline affects what can be done with masks. Mainly, masks are performed on the temporary after effects and before the projector. This means multiple tracks can be bounced to a masked track and projected with the same mask. - -
Our compositing pipeline graph now has a masking stage. There are 8 +
+Our compositing pipeline graph now has a masking stage. There are 8 possible masks per track. Each mask is defined separately, although -they each perform the same operation, whether it's addition or +they each perform the same operation, whether it’s addition or subtraction. - -
- - -
-
- - - -
-Compositing pipeline with masks - -To define a mask, go into the Compositor window and enable the -
+ mask toggle. Now go over the video and
+
+
+
+
+
+Compositing pipeline with masks +
+To define a mask, go into the Compositor window and enable the +
mask toggle. Now go over the video and
click-drag. Click-drag again in another part of the image to create
-each new point of the mask. While it isn't the conventional bezier
+each new point of the mask. While it isn’t the conventional bezier
curve behavior, this masking interface performs in realtime what the
effect of the mask is going to be. Creating each point of the mask
-expands a rubber band curve.
-
- Once points are defined, they can be moved by ctrl-dragging in -the vicinity of the corner. This; however, doesn't smooth out the +expands a rubber band curve. +
+Once points are defined, they can be moved by ctrl-dragging in +the vicinity of the corner. This; however, doesn’t smooth out the curve. The in-out points of the bezier curve are accessed by shift-dragging in the vicinity of the corner. Then shift-dragging near the in or out point causes the point to move. - -
Finally, once you have a mask, the mask can be translated in one piece +
+Finally, once you have a mask, the mask can be translated in one piece by alt-dragging the mask. Mask editing in Cinelerra is identical to how The Gimp edits masks except in this case the effect of the mask is always on. - -
The masks have many more parameters which couldn't be represented with +
+The masks have many more parameters which couldn’t be represented with video overlays. These are represented in the tool window for masks. -Selecting the
question mark when the
+Selecting the question mark when the
mask toggle is highlighted brings up the mask options.
-
- The mode of the mask determines if the mask removes data or +
+The mode of the mask determines if the mask removes data or makes data visible. If the mode is subtractive, the mask causes video to disappear. If the mode is additive, the mask causes video to appear and everything outside the mask to disappear. - -
The value of the mask determines how extreme the addition or +
+The value of the mask determines how extreme the addition or subtraction is. In the subtractive mode, higher values subtract more alpha. In the additive mode, higher values make the region in the mask brighter while the region outside the mask is always hidden. - -
The mask number determines which one of the 8 possible masks we're +
+The mask number determines which one of the 8 possible masks we’re editing. Each track has 8 possible masks. When you click-drag in the -compositor window, you're only editing one of the masks. Change the +compositor window, you’re only editing one of the masks. Change the value of mask number to cause another mask to be edited. The previous mask is still active but only the curve overlay for the currently selected mask is visible. - -
When multiple masks are used, their effects are ORed together. Every +
+When multiple masks are used, their effects are ORed together. Every mask in a single track uses the same value and mode. - -
The edges of a mask are hard by default but this rarely is desired. +
+The edges of a mask are hard by default but this rarely is desired. The feather parameter determines how many pixels to feather the mask. This creates softer edges but takes longer to render. - -
Finally, there are parameters which affect one point on the current +
+Finally, there are parameters which affect one point on the current mask instead of the whole mask. These are Delete, x, y. The active point is defined as the last point dragged in the compositor window. Any point can be activated merely by ctrl-clicking near it without moving the pointer. Once a point is activated, Delete deletes it and x, y allow repositioning by numeric entry. +
- +
+ ++++Next: SAFE REGIONS, Previous: MASKS, Up: COMPOSITING [Contents]
+12.3 CROPPING
+ +Cropping changes the value of the output dimensions and the projector -to reduce the visible picture area. Enable the
crop
-toggle and the tool window in the compositing
+to reduce the visible picture area. Enable the crop
+toggle and the tool window in the compositing
window to perform cropping.
-
- This draws a rectangle over the video. Click-drag anywhere in the +
+This draws a rectangle over the video. Click-drag anywhere in the video to start a new rectangle. Click-drag over any corner of the rectangle to reposition the corner. - -
Alt-click in the cropping rectangle to translate the rectangle to any +
+Alt-click in the cropping rectangle to translate the rectangle to any position without resizing it. - -
The tool window allows text entry of the coordinates and executes the +
+The tool window allows text entry of the coordinates and executes the cropping operation. When the rectangle is positioned, hit the do it button in the tool window to execute the cropping operation. +
+ - + +
+ ++++Next: OVERLAY MODES, Previous: CROPPING, Up: COMPOSITING [Contents]
+12.4 SAFE REGIONS
On consumer displays the borders of the image are cut off and within -the cutoff point is a region which isn't always square like it is in +the cutoff point is a region which isn’t always square like it is in the compositor window. The borders are intended for scratch room and vertical blanking data. You can show where these borders are by -enabling the
+ + + - + + safe regions toggle. Keep titles inside
+enabling the safe regions toggle. Keep titles inside
the inner rectangle and keep action inside the outer rectangle.
+
+ ++++Next: TRACK AND OUTPUT SIZES, Previous: SAFE REGIONS, Up: COMPOSITING [Contents]
+12.5 OVERLAY MODES
Every video track has an overlay mode, accessible by expanding the track. The overlay mode is a pulldown menu on the left under the fader. When collapsed, it displays an icon representing the current overlay mode. - -
Select the
+ expand track toggle to view all
-the options for a video track if you can't see the overlay mode. The
+Select the
expand track toggle to view all
+the options for a video track if you can’t see the overlay mode. The
overlay mode of video tracks is normal by default. Select other
modes by clicking the overlay button and selecting an item from the
popup menu.
-
- Overlay modes are processed inside the projector stage of compositing. +
+Overlay modes are processed inside the projector stage of compositing. The different modes are summarized below. - -
-
-
-
+
+
-
+
- Normal uses a traditional Porter-Diff equation to blend tracks with alpha. When no alpha exists in the project color model, the new track always replaces the output. -
- +
- Addition In this mode, whatever is in the output is added to the -current track. The result is blended based on the current track's +current track. The result is blended based on the current track’s alpha onto the output. -
- +
- Subtraction In this mode, the current track is subtracted from the output and the result is alpha blended onto the output. -
- +
- Multiply is the most useful operation. The current track is multiplied by the output and the result blended onto the output. Usually a black and white image with no alpha channel or a white title on a black image is used as the current track. With the multiply operation, only the output portions under the white area show. -
- +
- Divide divides the current track by the output and the result is blended into the output. It usually results in overloaded levels. -
- +
- Replace does no blending and overwrites the output with the current track. -
+ ++++Previous: OVERLAY MODES, Up: COMPOSITING [Contents]
+12.6 TRACK AND OUTPUT SIZES
The size of the temporary and the size of the output in our compositing pipeline are independant and variable. This fits into everything -covered so far. The camera's viewport is the temporary size. Effects +covered so far. The camera’s viewport is the temporary size. Effects are processed in the temporary and are affected by the temporary size. Projectors are rendered to the output and are affected by the output size. If the temporary is smaller than the output, the temporary is bordered by blank regions in the output. If the temporary is bigger than the output, the temporary is cropped. - -
The temporary size is defined as the track size. Each track has a -different size. Right click on a track to bring up the track's menu. +
+The temporary size is defined as the track size. Each track has a +different size. Right click on a track to bring up the track’s menu. Select Resize Track to resize the track to any arbitrary size. Alternatively you can select Match output size to make the track the same size as the output. - -
The output size is set in either New when creating a new project +
+The output size is set in either New when creating a new project or Settings->Format. In the Resource window there is another way to change the output size. Right click on a video asset and select Match project size to conform the output to the asset. When new tracks are created, the track size always conforms to the output size specified by these methods. +
+ + - +
+ ++++Next: CAPTURING MEDIA, Previous: COMPOSITING, Up: TOP [Contents]
+13 KEYFRAMES
+When you change the fade, camera, projector, or other parameters for a track, they stay by default the same for the entire durection of the -timeline. Setting static parameters isn't very useful sometimes. +timeline. Setting static parameters isn’t very useful sometimes. Normally you need to move the camera around over time or change mask positions. Masks need to follow objects. We create dymanic changes by defining keyframes. A keyframe is a certain point in time when the settings for one operation change. In Cinelerra, there are keyframes for almost every compositing parameter and effect parameter. - -
Whenever you adjust any parameter, the value is stored in a keyframe. -If the value is stored in a keyframe, why doesn't it always change? +
+Whenever you adjust any parameter, the value is stored in a keyframe. +If the value is stored in a keyframe, why doesn’t it always change? The keyframe it is stored in by default is known as the default keyframe. The default keyframe applies to the entire duration if no other keyframes are present. The default keyframe is not drawn anywhere because it always exists. The only way change occurs over time is if non-default keyframes are created. - -
Display keyframes for any parameter by using the view menu. A +
+Display keyframes for any parameter by using the view menu. A faster way to toggle multiple keyframe types is to bring up window->overlays. This window allows toggling of every parameter in the view menu. When keyframes are selected, they are drawn on the timeline over the tracks they apply to. - -
Keyframes come in many forms: curves, toggles, modes, and so on. +
+Keyframes come in many forms: curves, toggles, modes, and so on. How to handle the different types of keyframes is described here. - -
- -+ ++
+ + + +• CURVE KEYFRAMES: Using rubber band curves + • CHANGING BEZIER & LINEAR MODE: Change curves from linear to curved + • SNAPPING TO NEIGHBOR KEYFRAMES: + • NAVIGATING CURVE KEYFRAMES: + • TOGGLE KEYFRAMES: + • AUTOMATIC KEYFRAMES: + • COMPOSITOR KEYFRAMES: + • EDITING KEYFRAMES: Moving keyframes around + • KEYFRAME SPANNING: How to change 1 parameter in many keyframes simultaneously +
-
-Next: CHANGING BEZIER & LINEAR MODE, -Up: KEYFRAMES - ++- ++Next: CHANGING BEZIER & LINEAR MODE, Up: KEYFRAMES [Contents]
13.1 CURVE KEYFRAMES
Many parameters are stored in rubber band curves. Go to view->fade or @@ -5338,107 +5829,103 @@ In either arrow editing mode or i-beam editing mode, move the cursor over the curves in the timeline until it changes shape. Then merely by clicking and dragging on the curve you can create a keyframe at the position. - -
After the keyframe is created, click drag on it again to reposition +
+After the keyframe is created, click drag on it again to reposition it. When you click-drag a second keyframe on the curve, it creates a smooth ramp. - -
- + +
-
-Next: SNAPPING TO NEIGHBOR KEYFRAMES, -Previous: CURVE KEYFRAMES, -Up: KEYFRAMES - ++- ++Next: SNAPPING TO NEIGHBOR KEYFRAMES, Previous: CURVE KEYFRAMES, Up: KEYFRAMES [Contents]
13.2 CHANGING BEZIER & LINEAR MODE
The curve keyframes have bezier and linear modes. In linear mode, the keyframe looks like a square and the lines emanating from it are straight. In bezier mode, the keyframe is rounded and has 2 control lines in addition to the rubber band curve lines. +
+These are keyframes in linear mode. +
+
- These are keyframes in linear mode. - -
+These are keyframes in bezier mode. +
+
- These are keyframes in bezier mode. - -
- -Change the mode of an existing keyframe by right clicking on it to bring +
Change the mode of an existing keyframe by right clicking on it to bring up the context menu and selecting make linear or make bezier. +
-Change the mode of several keyframes by highlighting the entire region of the +
Change the mode of several keyframes by highlighting the entire region of the timeline and selecting Keyframes->change to linear or Keyframes->change to bezier. - -
When keyframes are created, they can be linear or bezier by default. +
+When keyframes are created, they can be linear or bezier by default. Change the default mode by checking or unchecking Keyframes->create bezier. +
-For bezier keyframes, ctrl-dragging on the control lines of a +
For bezier keyframes, ctrl-dragging on the control lines of a keyframe changes the value of either the input control or the output control. Without ctrl the cursor only affects the central keyframe. This affects the sharpness of the curve. The input and output controls can only be moved vertically. - -
If the control lines aren't visible, ctrl-drag on the left or right +
+If the control lines aren’t visible, ctrl-drag on the left or right of the keyframe. - -
+ +
-
-Next: NAVIGATING CURVE KEYFRAMES, -Previous: CHANGING BEZIER & LINEAR MODE, -Up: KEYFRAMES - ++- ++Next: NAVIGATING CURVE KEYFRAMES, Previous: CHANGING BEZIER & LINEAR MODE, Up: KEYFRAMES [Contents]
13.3 SNAPPING TO NEIGHBOR KEYFRAMES
shift-drag on a curve keyframe to make the keyframe snap to the value of either the next or previous keyframe, depending on which exists. This lets you set a constant curve value without having to copy the next or previous keyframe. +
-- -
-Next: TOGGLE KEYFRAMES, -Previous: SNAPPING TO NEIGHBOR KEYFRAMES, -Up: KEYFRAMES +
+ ++- ++Next: TOGGLE KEYFRAMES, Previous: SNAPPING TO NEIGHBOR KEYFRAMES, Up: KEYFRAMES [Contents]
13.4 NAVIGATING CURVE KEYFRAMES
-There isn't much room on the timeline for a wide range of curve +
There isn’t much room on the timeline for a wide range of curve values. You need to zoom the curves in and out vertically to have any variability. This is done by 2 tools: the automation fit button -
and automation zoom menu 
.
-
- The automation fit button scales and offsets the vertical range so the +
+ and automation zoom menu .
+The automation fit button scales and offsets the vertical range so the selected curve area appears in the timeline. If a region of the timeline is highlighted by the cursor, only that region is scaled. -In/out points don't affect the zoomed region. Alt-f also performs +In/out points don’t affect the zoomed region. Alt-f also performs automation fitting. - -
The automation zoom menu manually changes the vertical scaling of the +
+The automation zoom menu manually changes the vertical scaling of the curves in multiples of 2. Click on its tumbler to change the zoom. Alt-Up and Alt-Dn change the automation zoom from the keyboard. +
-+
-
-Next: AUTOMATIC KEYFRAMES, -Previous: NAVIGATING CURVE KEYFRAMES, -Up: KEYFRAMES - ++- ++Next: AUTOMATIC KEYFRAMES, Previous: NAVIGATING CURVE KEYFRAMES, Up: KEYFRAMES [Contents]
13.5 TOGGLE KEYFRAMES
Mute is the only toggle keyframe. Mute keyframes determine where the @@ -5446,66 +5933,69 @@ track is processed but not rendered to the output. Click-drag on these curves to create a keyframe. Unlike curves, the toggle keyframe has only two values: on or off. Ctrl and shift do nothing on toggle keyframes. +
- + + +
+ ++++Next: COMPOSITOR KEYFRAMES, Previous: TOGGLE KEYFRAMES, Up: KEYFRAMES [Contents]
+13.6 AUTOMATIC KEYFRAMES
You may have noticed when a few fade curves are set up, moving the insertion point around the curves causes the faders to reflect the -curve value under the insertion point. This isn't just to look cool. +curve value under the insertion point. This isn’t just to look cool. The faders themselves can set keyframes in automatic keyframe mode. Automatic keyframe mode is usually more useful than dragging curves. - -
Enable automatic keyframe mode by enabling the automatic keyframe -toggle
+
. In automatic keyframe mode, every time
+Enable automatic keyframe mode by enabling the automatic keyframe +toggle
. In automatic keyframe mode, every time
you tweek a keyframeable parameter it creates a keyframe on the
-timeline. Since automatic keyframes affect many parameters, it's best
+timeline. Since automatic keyframes affect many parameters, it’s best
enabled just before you need a keyframe and disabled immediately
thereafter.
-
- It's useful to go into the View menu and make the desired +
+It’s useful to go into the View menu and make the desired parameter visible before performing a change. The location where the automatic keyframe is generated is under the insertion point. If the timeline is playing back during a tweek, several automatic keyframes will be generated as you change the parameter. - -
When automatic keyframe mode is disabled, a similarly strange thing +
+When automatic keyframe mode is disabled, a similarly strange thing happens. Adjusting a parameter adjusts the keyframe immediately preceeding the insertion point. If two fade keyframes exist and the insertion point is between them, changing the fader changes the first keyframe. - -
There are many parameters which can only be keyframed in automatic +
+There are many parameters which can only be keyframed in automatic keyframe mode. These are parameters for which curves would take up too -much space on the track or which can't be represented easily by a +much space on the track or which can’t be represented easily by a curve. - -
Effects are only keyframable in automatic mode because of the number of -parameters in each individual effect. - -
Camera and projector translation can only be keyframed in automatic +
+Effects are only keyframable in automatic mode because of the number of +parameters in each individual effect. +
+Camera and projector translation can only be keyframed in automatic keyframe mode while camera and projector zoom can be keyframed with curves. It is here that we conclude the discussion of compositing, since compositing is highly dependant on the ability to change over time. +
-- -
-Next: EDITING KEYFRAMES, -Previous: AUTOMATIC KEYFRAMES, -Up: KEYFRAMES +
+ ++- ++Next: EDITING KEYFRAMES, Previous: AUTOMATIC KEYFRAMES, Up: KEYFRAMES [Contents]
13.7 COMPOSITOR KEYFRAMES
Camera and projector translation is represented by two parameters: x @@ -5513,31 +6003,31 @@ and y. Therefore it is cumbersome to adjust with curves. Cinelerra solves this problem by relying on automatic keyframes. With a video track loaded, move the insertion point to the beginning of the track and enable automatic keyframe mode. - -
Move the projector slightly in the compositor window to create a +
+Move the projector slightly in the compositor window to create a keyframe. Then go forward several seconds. Move the projector a long distance to create another keyframe and emphasize motion. This creates a second projector box in the compositor, with a line joining the two boxes. The joining line is the motion path. If you create more keyframes, more boxes are created. Once all the desired keyframes are created, disable automatic keyframe mode. - -
Now when scrubbing around with the compositor window's slider, the +
+Now when scrubbing around with the compositor window’s slider, the video projection moves over time. At any point between two keyframes, the motion path is read for all time before the insertion point and -green for all time after the insertion point. It's debatable if this +green for all time after the insertion point. It’s debatable if this is a very useful feature but it makes you feel good to know what keyframe is going to be affected by the next projector tweek. - -
Click-drag when automatic keyframes are off to adjust the preceeding -keyframe. If you're halfway between two keyframes, the first projector +
+Click-drag when automatic keyframes are off to adjust the preceeding +keyframe. If you’re halfway between two keyframes, the first projector box is adjusted while the second one stays the same. Furthermore, the -video doesn't appear to move in step with the first keyframe. This is +video doesn’t appear to move in step with the first keyframe. This is because, halfway between two keyframes the projector translation is -interpolated. In order to set the second keyframe you'll need to scrub +interpolated. In order to set the second keyframe you’ll need to scrub after the second keyframe. - -
By default the motion path is a straight line, but it can be curved +
+By default the motion path is a straight line, but it can be curved with control points. Ctrl-drag to set either the in or out control point of the preceeding keyframe. Once again, we depart from The Gimp because shift is already used for zoom. After the in @@ -5545,101 +6035,115 @@ or out control points are extrapolated from the keyframe, Ctrl-dragging anywhere in the video adjusts the nearest control point. A control point can be out of view entirely yet still controllable. - -
When editing the camera translation, the behavior of the camera boxes +
+When editing the camera translation, the behavior of the camera boxes is slightly different. Camera automation is normally used for still -photo panning. The current camera box doesn't move during a drag, but +photo panning. The current camera box doesn’t move during a drag, but if multiple keyframes are set, every camera box except the current keyframe appears to move. This is because the camera display shows every other camera position relative to the current one. - -
The situation becomes more intuitive if you bend the motion path +
+The situation becomes more intuitive if you bend the motion path between two keyframes and scrub between the two keyframes. The division between red and green, the current position between the keyframes, is always centered while the camera boxes move. +
+ - + +
+ ++++Next: KEYFRAME SPANNING, Previous: COMPOSITOR KEYFRAMES, Up: KEYFRAMES [Contents]
+13.8 EDITING KEYFRAMES
Keyframes can be shifted around and moved between tracks on the timeline using similar cut and paste operations to editing media. Only the keyframes selected in the view menu are affected by keyframe editing operations, however. - -
The most popular keyframe editing operation is replication of some +
+The most popular keyframe editing operation is replication of some curve from one track to the other, to make a stereo pair. The first -step is to solo the source track's record
patch
+step is to solo the source track’s record patch
by shift-clicking on it. Then either set in/out points or
highlight the desired region of keyframes. Go to keyframes->copy
-keyframes to copy them to the clipboard. Solo the destination track's
-record patch by shift-clicking on it and
+keyframes to copy them to the clipboard. Solo the destination track’s
+record patch by shift-clicking on it and
go to keyframes->paste keyframes to paste the clipboard.
-
- The media editing commands are mapped to the keyframe editing commands -by using the shift key instead of just the keyboard shortcut. - -
This leads to the most complicated part of keyframe editing, the +
+The media editing commands are mapped to the keyframe editing commands +by using the shift key instead of just the keyboard shortcut. +
+This leads to the most complicated part of keyframe editing, the default keyframe. Remember that when no keyframes are set at all, there is still a default keyframe which stores a global parameter for -the entire duration. The default keyframe isn't drawn because it +the entire duration. The default keyframe isn’t drawn because it always exists. What if the default keyframe is a good value which you want to transpose between other non-default keyframes? The keyframes->copy default keyframe and keyframes->paste default keyframe allow conversion of the default keyframe to a non-default keyframe. - -
Keyframes->copy default keyframe copies the default keyframe to +
+Keyframes->copy default keyframe copies the default keyframe to the clipboard, no matter what region of the timeline is selected. The keyframes->paste keyframes function may then be used to paste the clipboard as a non-default keyframe. - -
If you've copied a non-default keyframe, it can be stored as the +
+If you’ve copied a non-default keyframe, it can be stored as the default keyframe by calling keyframes->paste default keyframe. After using paste default keyframe to convert a non-default keyframe -into a default keyframe, you won't see the value of the default +into a default keyframe, you won’t see the value of the default keyframe reflected until all the non-default keyframes are removed. - -
Finally, there is a convenient way to delete keyframes besides +
+Finally, there is a convenient way to delete keyframes besides selecting a region and calling keyframes->clear keyframes. Merely click-drag a keyframe before its preceeding keyframe or after its following keyframe on the track. +
-- -
-Previous: EDITING KEYFRAMES, -Up: KEYFRAMES +
+ ++- ++Previous: EDITING KEYFRAMES, Up: KEYFRAMES [Contents]
13.9 KEYFRAME SPANNING
+ +To change a single parameter in multiple keyframes without changing the other parameters, highlight a region on the timeline and adjust the parameter. Instead of a new keyframe being created, the existing keyframes are modified and only the changed parameter is modified. +
+It doesn’t matter if
+ + + + + + - auto keyframe is enabled. It
+only works when the keyframe stores multiple parameters. Only mask and
+effect keyframes do this. Other types of keyframes are generated as usual.
+It doesn't matter if
+ auto keyframe is enabled. It
-only works when the keyframe stores multiple parameters. Only mask and
-effect keyframes do this. Other types of keyframes are generated as usual.
-
+ ++++Next: IMPROVING PERFORMANCE, Previous: KEYFRAMES, Up: TOP [Contents]
+14 CAPTURING MEDIA
Ideally, all media would be stored on hard drives, CD-ROM, flash, or @@ -5648,77 +6152,84 @@ In reality, very few sources of media can be accessed like a filesystem but instead rely on tape transport mechanisms and dumb I/O mechanisms to transfer the data to computers. These media types are imported into Cinelerra through the Record dialog. - -
The first step in recording is to configure the input device. In +
+The first step in recording is to configure the input device. In Settings->preferences are a number of recording parameters described in configuration See RECORDING. These parameters apply to recording no matter what the project settings are, because the recording parameters are usually the maximum capability of the recording hardware while project settings come and go. - -
Go to File->record to record a dumb I/O source. This prompts -for an output format much like rendering does. Once that's done, the +
+Go to File->record to record a dumb I/O source. This prompts +for an output format much like rendering does. Once that’s done, the record window and the record monitor pop up. - -
The record window has discrete sections. While many parameters change +
+The record window has discrete sections. While many parameters change depending on if the file has audio or video, the discrete sections are always the same. - -
-
-
-
+
+
-
+
- The output format area describes the format of the output file and the current position within it. -
- + +
- The edit batch area lets you change parameters in the current batch. -
- +
- The transport controls start and stop recording different ways. -
- +
- The batch list displays all the defined batches. -
- +
- The confirmation area lets you determine how the output files are imported into the timeline and quit. -
-
- +
+
+
+Recording window areas +
-Recording in Cinelerra is organized around batches. A batch +
Recording in Cinelerra is organized around batches. A batch essentially defines a distinct output file for the recording. For now you can ignore the batch concept entirely and record merely by hitting -the record button
.
-
- The record button opens the current output file if it isn't opened and +the record button
+.
+The record button opens the current output file if it isn’t opened and writes captured data to it. Use the stop button to stop the recording. Recording can be resumed with the record button without erasing the file at this point. In the case of a video file, there is -a single frame record button
which records a single
+a single frame record button which records a single
frame.
-
- When enough media is recorded, choose an insertion method from the +
+When enough media is recorded, choose an insertion method from the Insertion Strategy menu and hit close. +
- - ++
+ + + +• BATCHES: + • EDITING TUNER INFORMATION: +
+ ++++Next: EDITING TUNER INFORMATION, Up: CAPTURING MEDIA [Contents]
+14.1 BATCHES
Now we come to the concept of batches. Batches try to make the dumb @@ -5728,644 +6239,761 @@ different files instead of recording straight through an entire tape. Because of the high cost of developing frame-accurate deck control mechanisms, the only use of batches now is recording different programs during different times of day. This is still useful for recording TV -shows or time lapse movies as anyone who can't afford proper appliances +shows or time lapse movies as anyone who can’t afford proper appliances knows. - -
The record window supports a list of batches and two recording modes: +
+The record window supports a list of batches and two recording modes: interactive and batch recording. Interactive recording happens when the record button is pressed. Interactive recording starts immediately and uses the current batch to determine everything except start time. By default, the current batch is configured to behave like tape. - -
Batch recording happens when the start button is pressed. In +
+Batch recording happens when the start button is pressed. In batch recording, the start time is the time the batch starts recording. +
+First, you’ll want to create some batches. Each batch has certain +parameters and methods of adjustment. +
+ -First, you'll want to create some batches. Each batch has certain -parameters and methods of adjustment. -
-
-
-
+
-
+
- On determines whether the batch is included in batch recording operations. Click the list row under On to enable or disable batches. -
- + +
- Path is the file the batch is going to be recorded to. The filename specified in the record dialog is the name of the first batch, to simplify interactive recording, but the filename may be changed in the record window for any batch in the edit batch area. -
- + +
-
News shows whether the file exists or not. This is a very
important attribute since there is no confirmation dialog if the file
exists. The first time you hit record, the file is opened. If the
-file exists at this point it's erased. News says File exists if
-it exists and OK if it doesn't. Every time you resume recording
+file exists at this point it’s erased. News says File exists if
+it exists and OK if it doesn’t. Every time you resume recording
in the same batch, the news should say Open, indicating the file
-is already opened and won't be erased in the next record button press.
+is already opened and won’t be erased in the next record button press.
-
If you change out of the current batch after recording, the file is +
If you change out of the current batch after recording, the file is closed. Next time you change into the batch, the file will be erased. - -
- + +
- Start time is the 24 hour time of day the batch will start recording if in batch mode. The start time may become a time of tape -and reel number if deck control is implemented but for now it's a time +and reel number if deck control is implemented but for now it’s a time of day. -
- +
- Duration is the length of the batch. It only has meaning if the Mode of the batch is Timed. Once the recording length reaches duration the recording stops, whether in interactive or batch mode. -
- +
- Source has meaning only when the capturing hardware has multiple sources. Usually the source is a tuner channel or input. When the current batch finishes and the next batch begins recording, the source is changed to what the next batch is set to. This way multiple TV stations can be recorded at different times. -
The record window has a notion of the current batch. The +
The record window has a notion of the current batch. The current batch is not the same as the batch which is highlighted in the batch list. The current batch text is colored red in the batch list. The highlighted batch is merely displayed in the edit batch section for editing. - -
By coloring the current batch red, any batch can be edited by +
+By coloring the current batch red, any batch can be edited by highlighting it, without changing the batch to be recorded. - -
All recording operations take place in the current batch. If there +
+All recording operations take place in the current batch. If there are multiple batches, highlight the desired batch and hit activate to make it the current batch. If the start -button is pressed, the current batch flashes to indicate it's waiting +button is pressed, the current batch flashes to indicate it’s waiting for the start time in batch mode. If the record button is pressed, the current batch is recorded immediately in interactive mode. - -
In batch and interactive recording modes, when the current batch +
+In batch and interactive recording modes, when the current batch finishes recording the next batch is activated and performed. All future recording is done in batch mode. When the first batch finishes, the next batch flashes until its start time is reached. - -
Interrupt either the batch or the interactive operation by hitting the +
+Interrupt either the batch or the interactive operation by hitting the stop button. - -
Finally there is the
+
rewind button. In either
+Finally there is the
+ - + + rewind button. In either
interactive or batch recording, the rewind button causes the current
batch to close its file. The next recording operation in the current
batch deletes the file.
+
+ ++++Previous: BATCHES, Up: CAPTURING MEDIA [Contents]
+14.2 EDITING TUNER INFORMATION
+Sometimes in the recording process and the configuration process, -you'll need to define and select tuner channels to either record or +you’ll need to define and select tuner channels to either record or play back to. In the case of the Video4Linux and Buz recording drivers, tuner channels define the source. When the Buz driver is also -used for playback, tuner channels define the destination. - -
Defining tuner channels is accomplished by pushing the
+
+used for playback, tuner channels define the destination.
+Defining tuner channels is accomplished by pushing the
channel button. This brings up the channel editing window. In this
window you add, edit, and sort channels. Also, for certain video
drivers, you can adjust the picture quality.
-
- The add operation brings up a channel editing box. The title of +
+The add operation brings up a channel editing box. The title of the channel appears in the channel list. The source of the channel is -the entry in the physical tuner's frequency table corresponding to the -title. - -
Fine tuning in the channel edit dialog adjusts the physical frequency +the entry in the physical tuner’s frequency table corresponding to the +title. +
+Fine tuning in the channel edit dialog adjusts the physical frequency slightly if the driver supports it. The norm and frequency table together define which frequency table is selected for defining sources. If the device supports multiple inputs, the input menu selects these. - -
To sort channels, highlight the channel in the list and push move +
+To sort channels, highlight the channel in the list and push move up or move down to move it. - -
Once channels are defined, the source item in the record window +
+Once channels are defined, the source item in the record window can be used to select channels for recording. The same channel selecting ability also exists in the record monitor window. Be aware channel selections in the record monitor window and the record window are stored in the current batch. - -
For some drivers an option to swap fields may be visible. These -drivers don't get the field order right every time without human +
+For some drivers an option to swap fields may be visible. These +drivers don’t get the field order right every time without human intervention. Toggle this to get the odd and even lines to record in the right order. +
- +
+ ++++Next: TROUBLESHOOTING, Previous: CAPTURING MEDIA, Up: TOP [Contents]
+15 IMPROVING PERFORMANCE
-Let's get one thing perfectly clear. Linux is not a very good -desktop. It's a server. Most of what you'll find on modern Linux + +
Let’s get one thing perfectly clear. Linux is not a very good +desktop. It’s a server. Most of what you’ll find on modern Linux distributions are faceless, network-only programs strategicly designed to counteract one Microsoft server feature or another and not to perform very well at user interaction. There are a number of parameters on Linux, which ordinary people can adjust to make it behave more like a thoroughbred in desktop usage. - -
- -+ + ++
+ +• DISABLING SWAP SPACE: + • ENLARGING SOUND BUFFERS: + • FREEING MORE SHARED MEMORY: + • SPEEDING UP THE HARD DRIVE: + • DISABLING CRON: + • REDUCING USB MOUSE SENSITIVITY: + • ASSORTED X TWEEKS: + • SPEEDING UP THE FILE SYSTEM: + • IMPROVING ZORAN VIDEO: +
-
-Next: ENLARGING SOUND BUFFERS, -Up: IMPROVING PERFORMANCE - ++- ++Next: ENLARGING SOUND BUFFERS, Up: IMPROVING PERFORMANCE [Contents]
15.1 DISABLING SWAP SPACE
On systems with lots of memory, Cinelerra sometimes runs better without -a swap space. If you have 4 GB of RAM, you're probably better off +a swap space. If you have 4 GB of RAM, you’re probably better off without a swap space. If you have 512MB of RAM, you should keep the swap. If you want to do recording, you should probably disable swap -space in any case. There's a reason for this. Linux only allows half +space in any case. There’s a reason for this. Linux only allows half the available memory to be used. Beyond that, it starts searching for free pages to swap, in order to cache more disk access. In a 4 GB -system, you start waiting for page swaps after using only 2 GB. - -
The question then is how to make Linux run without a swap space. +system, you start waiting for page swaps after using only 2 GB. +
+The question then is how to make Linux run without a swap space. Theoretically it should be a matter of running +
++-swapoff -a +
swapoff -a -
-Unfortunately, without a swap space the kswapd tasklet normally -spins at 100%. To eliminate this problem, edit linux/mm/vmscan.c. -In this file, put a line saying return 0; before it says +
Unfortunately, without a swap space the kswapd tasklet normally +spins at 100%. To eliminate this problem, edit linux/mm/vmscan.c. +In this file, put a line saying return 0; before it says +
++-/* + * Kswapd main loop. + */ +
/* - * Kswapd main loop. - */ -
-Then recompile the kernel. +
Then recompile the kernel. +
-- -+
-Next: FREEING MORE SHARED MEMORY, -Previous: DISABLING SWAP SPACE, -Up: IMPROVING PERFORMANCE -
+ ++++Next: FREEING MORE SHARED MEMORY, Previous: DISABLING SWAP SPACE, Up: IMPROVING PERFORMANCE [Contents]
+15.2 ENLARGING SOUND BUFFERS
In order to improve realtime performance, the audio buffers for all the Linux sound drivers were limited from 128k to 64k. For recording audio and video simultaneously and for most audio recording this causes dropouts. Application of low latency and preemtible kernel patches -make it possible to record more audio recordings but it doesn't improve +make it possible to record more audio recordings but it doesn’t improve recording video with audio. This is where you need to hack the kernel. - -
To see if your sound buffers are suitable, run the included +
+To see if your sound buffers are suitable, run the included soundtest program with nothing playing or recording. This allocates the largest possible buffers and displays them. If the TOTAL BYTES AVAILABLE is under 131072, you need to see about getting the buffers enlarged in the driver. While many drivers differ, we have a hack for at least one driver. - -
This only applies to the OSS version of the Soundblaster Live driver. +
+This only applies to the OSS version of the Soundblaster Live driver. Since every sound card and every sound driver derivative has a -different implementation you'll need to do some searching for other +different implementation you’ll need to do some searching for other sound cards. Edit linux/drivers/sound/emu10k1/audio.c - -
Where is says - -
if (bufsize >= 0x10000) -
-change it to say - -
if (bufsize > 0x40000) -
-Where is says - -
for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) - for (j = 0; j < 4; j++) -
-change it to say - -
for (i = 0; i < 16; i++) - for (j = 0; j < 4; j++) -
-In linux/drivers/sound/emu10k1/hwaccess.h - -
Change - -
#define MAXBUFSIZE 65536 - -
to - -
#define MAXBUFSIZE 262144 - -
Finally, in linux/drivers/sound/emu10k1/cardwi.h - -
#define WAVEIN_MAXBUFSIZE 65536 - -
to - -
#define WAVEIN_MAXBUFSIZE 262144 - -
Then recompile the kernel modules. - -
+ +Where is says +
+++ +if (bufsize >= 0x10000) +
change it to say +
+++ + + +if (bufsize > 0x40000) +
Where is says +
+++ +for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) + for (j = 0; j < 4; j++) +
change it to say +
+++ + + +for (i = 0; i < 16; i++) + for (j = 0; j < 4; j++) +
In linux/drivers/sound/emu10k1/hwaccess.h +
+Change +
+#define MAXBUFSIZE 65536 +
+to +
+#define MAXBUFSIZE 262144 +
+Finally, in linux/drivers/sound/emu10k1/cardwi.h +
+#define WAVEIN_MAXBUFSIZE 65536 +
+to +
+#define WAVEIN_MAXBUFSIZE 262144 +
+Then recompile the kernel modules. +
+ + + + + +
-
-Next: SPEEDING UP THE HARD DRIVE, -Previous: ENLARGING SOUND BUFFERS, -Up: IMPROVING PERFORMANCE - ++- ++Next: SPEEDING UP THE HARD DRIVE, Previous: ENLARGING SOUND BUFFERS, Up: IMPROVING PERFORMANCE [Contents]
15.3 FREEING MORE SHARED MEMORY
The Linux kernel only allows 32MB of shared memory to be allocated by default. This needs to be increased to do anything useful. Run the following command: +
+echo "0x7fffffff" > /proc/sys/kernel/shmmax +
-echo "0x7fffffff" > /proc/sys/kernel/shmmax -
+
+ ++++Next: DISABLING CRON, Previous: FREEING MORE SHARED MEMORY, Up: IMPROVING PERFORMANCE [Contents]
+15.4 SPEEDING UP THE HARD DRIVE
This is a very popular command sequence among Linux gurus, which is not done by default on Linux distributions. - -
hdparm -c3 -d1 -u1 -k1 /dev/hda - -
-c3 puts the hard drive into 32 bit I/O with sync. This normally -doesn't work due to inept kernel support for most IDE controllers. If +
+hdparm -c3 -d1 -u1 -k1 /dev/hda +
+-c3 puts the hard drive into 32 bit I/O with sync. This normally +doesn’t work due to inept kernel support for most IDE controllers. If you get lost interrupt or SeekComplete errors, quickly use -c0 instead of -c3 in your command. - -
-d1 enables DMA of course. This frees up the CPU partially during +
+-d1 enables DMA of course. This frees up the CPU partially during data transfers. - -
-u1 allows multiple interrupts to be handled during hard drive +
+-u1 allows multiple interrupts to be handled during hard drive transactions. This frees up even more CPU time. - -
-k1 prevents Linux from resetting your settings in case of a +
+-k1 prevents Linux from resetting your settings in case of a glitch. +
+ -- -+
-Next: REDUCING USB MOUSE SENSITIVITY, -Previous: SPEEDING UP THE HARD DRIVE, -Up: IMPROVING PERFORMANCE -
+ ++++Next: REDUCING USB MOUSE SENSITIVITY, Previous: SPEEDING UP THE HARD DRIVE, Up: IMPROVING PERFORMANCE [Contents]
+15.5 DISABLING CRON
Linux runs some daily operations like compressing man pages. These may be acceptable background tasks while compiling or word processing but not while playing video. Disable these operations by editing /etc/rc.d/init.d/anacron. +
+Put exit before the first line not beginning in #. +
+In /etc/rc.d/init.d/crond put exit before the first line not +beginning in #. Then make like Win 2000 and reboot. +
+You can’t use the at command anymore, but who uses that command +anyways? +
+ + -Put exit before the first line not beginning in #. -
In /etc/rc.d/init.d/crond put exit before the first line not -beginning in #. Then make like Win 2000 and reboot. -
You can't use the at command anymore, but who uses that command -anyways? -
+
+ ++++Next: ASSORTED X TWEEKS, Previous: DISABLING CRON, Up: IMPROVING PERFORMANCE [Contents]
+15.6 REDUCING USB MOUSE SENSITIVITY
Gamers like high resolution mice, but this can be painful for precisely positioning the mouse on a timeline or video screen. XFree86 once allowed you to reduce PS/2 mouse sensitivity using commands like -xset m 1 1 but you're out of luck with USB mice or KVM's. - -
We have a way to reduce USB mouse sensitivity but it requires editing +xset m 1 1 but you’re out of luck with USB mice or KVM’s. +
+We have a way to reduce USB mouse sensitivity but it requires editing the kernel source code. Even though USB mice have been supported for years, the kernel source code for USB mice is constantly being rewritten. These instructions were relevant for 2.6.12.3. Edit -/usr/src/linux/drivers/input/mousedev.c. - -
After the line saying - -
struct mousedev_hw_data { --put - -
#define DOWNSAMPLE_N 100 - #define DOWNSAMPLE_D 350 - int x_accum, y_accum; -
-Next, the section which says something like: - -
switch (code) { - case REL_X: mousedev->packet.dx += value; break; - case REL_Y: mousedev->packet.dy -= value; break; - case REL_WHEEL: mousedev->packet.dz -= value; break; - } --must be replaced by - -
- switch (code) { - case REL_X: - mousedev->packet.x_accum += value * DOWNSAMPLE_N; - mousedev->packet.dx += (int)mousedev->packet.x_accum / (int)DOWNSAMPLE_D; - mousedev->packet.x_accum -= ((int)mousedev->packet.x_accum / (int)DOWNSAMPLE_D) * (int)DOWNSAMPLE_D; - break; - case REL_Y: - mousedev->packet.y_accum += value * DOWNSAMPLE_N; - mousedev->packet.dy -= (int)mousedev->packet.y_accum / (int)DOWNSAMPLE_D; - mousedev->packet.y_accum -= ((int)mousedev->packet.y_accum / (int)DOWNSAMPLE_D) * (int)DOWNSAMPLE_D; - break; - case REL_WHEEL: mousedev->packet.dz -= value; break; - } - - - --Change the value of DOWNSAMPLE_N to change the mouse sensitivity. - -
- --
-Next: SPEEDING UP THE FILE SYSTEM, -Previous: REDUCING USB MOUSE SENSITIVITY, -Up: IMPROVING PERFORMANCE +/usr/src/linux/drivers/input/mousedev.c. + +After the line saying +
++-struct mousedev_hw_data { +15.7 ASSORTED X TWEEKS
+put +
++-#define DOWNSAMPLE_N 100 +#define DOWNSAMPLE_D 350 +int x_accum, y_accum; +
XFree86 by default can't display Cinelerra's advanced pixmap rendering -very fast. The X server stalls during list box drawing. Fix this by -adding a line to your XF86Config* files. +
Next, the section which says something like: +
++-switch (code) { + case REL_X: mousedev->packet.dx += value; break; + case REL_Y: mousedev->packet.dy -= value; break; + case REL_WHEEL: mousedev->packet.dz -= value; break; +} +In the Section "Device" area, add a line saying: +
must be replaced by +
+++ ++ switch (code) { + case REL_X: + mousedev->packet.x_accum += value * DOWNSAMPLE_N; + mousedev->packet.dx += (int)mousedev->packet.x_accum / (int)DOWNSAMPLE_D; + mousedev->packet.x_accum -= ((int)mousedev->packet.x_accum / (int)DOWNSAMPLE_D) * (int)DOWNSAMPLE_D; + break; + case REL_Y: + mousedev->packet.y_accum += value * DOWNSAMPLE_N; + mousedev->packet.dy -= (int)mousedev->packet.y_accum / (int)DOWNSAMPLE_D; + mousedev->packet.y_accum -= ((int)mousedev->packet.y_accum / (int)DOWNSAMPLE_D) * (int)DOWNSAMPLE_D; + break; + case REL_WHEEL: mousedev->packet.dz -= value; break; + } -Option "XaaNoOffscreenPixmaps" -
and restart the X server. -
Screen blanking is really annoying, unless you're fabulously rich and -can afford to leave your monitor on 24 hours a day without power saving -mode. In /etc/X11/xinit/xinitrc put +
Change the value of DOWNSAMPLE_N to change the mouse sensitivity. +
+ + + + + + + +
+ +++ ++Next: SPEEDING UP THE FILE SYSTEM, Previous: REDUCING USB MOUSE SENSITIVITY, Up: IMPROVING PERFORMANCE [Contents]
+15.7 ASSORTED X TWEEKS
-xset s off - xset s noblank -
-before the first if statement. -
How about those windows keys which no Linux distribution even thinks to +
XFree86 by default can’t display Cinelerra’s advanced pixmap rendering +very fast. The X server stalls during list box drawing. Fix this by +adding a line to your XF86Config* files. +
+In the Section "Device" area, add a line saying: +
+Option "XaaNoOffscreenPixmaps" +
+and restart the X server. +
+ + +Screen blanking is really annoying, unless you’re fabulously rich and +can afford to leave your monitor on 24 hours a day without power saving +mode. In /etc/X11/xinit/xinitrc put +
+++ +xset s off +xset s noblank +
before the first if statement. +
+How about those windows keys which no Linux distribution even thinks to use. You can make the window keys provide ALT functionality by editing /etc/X11/Xmodmap. Append the following to it. - -
keycode 115 = Hyper_L - keycode 116 = Hyper_R - add mod4 = Hyper_L - add mod5 = Hyper_R -
-The actual changes to a window manager to make it recognize window keys +
+++ +keycode 115 = Hyper_L +keycode 116 = Hyper_R +add mod4 = Hyper_L +add mod5 = Hyper_R +
The actual changes to a window manager to make it recognize window keys for ALT are complex. In FVWM at least, you can edit /etc/X11/fvwm/system.fvwm2rc and put - -
Mouse 0 T A move-and-raise-or-raiselower - #Mouse 0 W M move - Mouse 0 W 4 move - Mouse 0 W 5 move - Mouse 0 F A resize-or-raiselower - Mouse 0 S A resize-or-raiselower -
-in place of the default section for moving and resizing. Your best +
+++ +Mouse 0 T A move-and-raise-or-raiselower +#Mouse 0 W M move +Mouse 0 W 4 move +Mouse 0 W 5 move +Mouse 0 F A resize-or-raiselower +Mouse 0 S A resize-or-raiselower +
in place of the default section for moving and resizing. Your best performance is going to be on FVWM. Other window managers seem to slow -down video with extra event trapping and aren't as efficient in layout. +down video with extra event trapping and aren’t as efficient in layout. +
+ + + + + + + - +
+ ++++Next: IMPROVING ZORAN VIDEO, Previous: ASSORTED X TWEEKS, Up: IMPROVING PERFORMANCE [Contents]
+15.8 SPEEDING UP THE FILE SYSTEM
-You'll often store video on an expensive, gigantic disk array separate -from your boot disk. You'll thus have to manually install an EXT +
You’ll often store video on an expensive, gigantic disk array separate +from your boot disk. You’ll thus have to manually install an EXT filesystem on this disk array, using the mke2fs command. By far -the fastest file system is - -
- mke2fs -i 65536 -b 4096 my_device - tune2fs -r0 -c10000 my_device - -
-This has no journaling, reserves as few blocks as possible for -filenames, and accesses the largest amount of data per block possible. +the fastest file system is +
+++ ++mke2fs -i 65536 -b 4096 my_device +tune2fs -r0 -c10000 my_device + +
This has no journaling, reserves as few blocks as possible for +filenames, and accesses the largest amount of data per block possible. A slightly slower file system, which is easier to recover after power failures is +
+++ ++mke2fs -j -i 65536 -b 4096 my_device +tune2fs -r0 -c10000 my_device -
- mke2fs -j -i 65536 -b 4096 my_device - tune2fs -r0 -c10000 my_device - -
-This adds a journal which slows down the writes but makes us immune to +
This adds a journal which slows down the writes but makes us immune to power failures. +
+ - + + +
+ ++++Previous: SPEEDING UP THE FILE SYSTEM, Up: IMPROVING PERFORMANCE [Contents]
+15.9 IMPROVING ZORAN VIDEO
Video recorded from the ZORAN inputs is normally unaligned or not completely encoded on the right. This can be slightly compensated by adjusting parameters in the driver sourcecode. - -
In /usr/src/linux/drivers/media/video/zr36067.c the structures +
+In /usr/src/linux/drivers/media/video/zr36067.c the structures defined near line 623 affect alignment. At least for NTSC, the 2.4.20 -version of the driver could be improved by changing - -
static struct tvnorm f60ccir601 = { 858, 720, 57, 788, 525, 480, 16 }; --to +version of the driver could be improved by changing +
++-static struct tvnorm f60ccir601 = { 858, 720, 57, 788, 525, 480, 16 }; +static struct tvnorm f60ccir601 = { 858, 720, 57, 788, 525, 480, 17 }; --In /usr/src/linux/drivers/media/video/bt819.c more structures near -line 76 affect alignment and encoding. +
to +
++-static struct tvnorm f60ccir601 = { 858, 720, 57, 788, 525, 480, 17 }; +For NTSC -
{858 - 24, 2, 523, 1, 0x00f8, 0x0000}, --could be changed to -
{868 - 24, 2, 523, 1, 0x00f8, 0x0000}, --Adjusting these parameters may or may not move your picture closer to -the center. More of the time, they'll cause the driver to lock up +
In /usr/src/linux/drivers/media/video/bt819.c more structures near +line 76 affect alignment and encoding. +
+For NTSC +
+++ +{858 - 24, 2, 523, 1, 0x00f8, 0x0000}, +could be changed to +
++ +{868 - 24, 2, 523, 1, 0x00f8, 0x0000}, +Adjusting these parameters may or may not move your picture closer to +the center. More of the time, they’ll cause the driver to lock up before capturing the first frame. +
+15.9.1 NEW IN 2.6.5
In the 2.6 kernels, the video subsystem was rewritten again from scratch. To adjust the Zoran parameters go to drivers/media/video/zoran_card.c and look for a group of lines like - -
static struct tvnorm f50sqpixel = { 944, 768, 83, 880, 625, 576, 16 }; - static struct tvnorm f60sqpixel = { 780, 640, 51, 716, 525, 480, 12 }; - static struct tvnorm f50ccir601 = { 864, 720, 75, 804, 625, 576, 18 }; - static struct tvnorm f60ccir601 = { 858, 720, 57, 788, 525, 480, 16 }; - - static struct tvnorm f50ccir601_lml33 = { 864, 720, 75+34, 804, 625, 576, 18 }; - static struct tvnorm f60ccir601_lml33 = { 858, 720, 57+34, 788, 525, 480, 16 }; - - /* The DC10 (57/16/50) uses VActive as HSync, so HStart must be 0 */ - static struct tvnorm f50sqpixel_dc10 = { 944, 768, 0, 880, 625, 576, 0 }; - static struct tvnorm f60sqpixel_dc10 = { 780, 640, 0, 716, 525, 480, 12 }; - - /* FIXME: I cannot swap U and V in saa7114, so i do one - * pixel left shift in zoran (75 -> 74) - * (Maxim Yevtyushkin <max@linuxmedialabs.com>) */ - static struct tvnorm f50ccir601_lm33r10 = { 864, 720, 74+54, 804, 625, 576, 18 }; - static struct tvnorm f60ccir601_lm33r10 = { 858, 720, 56+54, 788, 525, 480, 16 }; --These seem to control the image position. At least for the LML33 the +
+++ +static struct tvnorm f50sqpixel = { 944, 768, 83, 880, 625, 576, 16 }; +static struct tvnorm f60sqpixel = { 780, 640, 51, 716, 525, 480, 12 }; +static struct tvnorm f50ccir601 = { 864, 720, 75, 804, 625, 576, 18 }; +static struct tvnorm f60ccir601 = { 858, 720, 57, 788, 525, 480, 16 }; + +static struct tvnorm f50ccir601_lml33 = { 864, 720, 75+34, 804, 625, 576, 18 }; +static struct tvnorm f60ccir601_lml33 = { 858, 720, 57+34, 788, 525, 480, 16 }; + +/* The DC10 (57/16/50) uses VActive as HSync, so HStart must be 0 */ +static struct tvnorm f50sqpixel_dc10 = { 944, 768, 0, 880, 625, 576, 0 }; +static struct tvnorm f60sqpixel_dc10 = { 780, 640, 0, 716, 525, 480, 12 }; + +/* FIXME: I cannot swap U and V in saa7114, so i do one + * pixel left shift in zoran (75 -> 74) + * (Maxim Yevtyushkin <max@linuxmedialabs.com>) */ +static struct tvnorm f50ccir601_lm33r10 = { 864, 720, 74+54, 804, 625, 576, 18 }; +static struct tvnorm f60ccir601_lm33r10 = { 858, 720, 56+54, 788, 525, 480, 16 }; +These seem to control the image position. At least for the LML33 the following definition for f60ccir601_lml33 does the trick. +
++-static struct tvnorm f60ccir601_lml33 = { 858, 720, 67+34, 788, 525, 480, 13 }; +static struct tvnorm f60ccir601_lml33 = { 858, 720, 67+34, 788, 525, 480, 13 }; -- -16 TROUBLESHOOTING
- -- -
-Next: DRAGGING IN AND OUT POINTS DOESN'T WORK, -Up: TROUBLESHOOTING +
+ +++ ++Next: SECRETS OF CINELERRA, Previous: IMPROVING PERFORMANCE, Up: TOP [Contents]
16 TROUBLESHOOTING
+ +
+ ++++Next: DRAGGING IN AND OUT POINTS DOESN'T WORK, Up: TROUBLESHOOTING [Contents]
+16.1 BUZ DRIVER CRASHES
First, Zoran capture boards must be accessed using the Buz video driver in Preferences->Recording and Preferences->Playback. Some performance tweeks are available in another section. See IMPROVING PERFORMANCE. - -
Once tweeked, the Buz driver seems to crash if the number of recording +
+Once tweeked, the Buz driver seems to crash if the number of recording buffers is too high. Make sure Preferences->Recording->Frames to buffer in device is below 10. +
-- +
-
-Next: LOCKING UP WHEN LOADING FILES, -Previous: BUZ DRIVER CRASHES, -Up: TROUBLESHOOTING - +++ ++Next: LOCKING UP WHEN LOADING FILES, Previous: BUZ DRIVER CRASHES, Up: TROUBLESHOOTING [Contents]
16.2 DRAGGING IN AND OUT POINTS DOESN’T WORK
-16.2 DRAGGING IN AND OUT POINTS DOESN'T WORK
Sometimes there will be two edits really close together. The point selected for dragging may be next to the indended edit on an edit too small to see at the current zoom level. Zoom in horizontally. +
-- -
-Next: SYNCHRONIZATION LOST WHILE RECORDING, -Previous: DRAGGING IN AND OUT POINTS DOESN'T WORK, -Up: TROUBLESHOOTING +
+ ++- ++Next: SYNCHRONIZATION LOST WHILE RECORDING, Previous: DRAGGING IN AND OUT POINTS DOESN'T WORK, Up: TROUBLESHOOTING [Contents]
16.3 LOCKING UP WHEN LOADING FILES
+The most common reason loading files locks up is because the codec -isn't supported. Another reason is because Cinelerra is building +isn’t supported. Another reason is because Cinelerra is building picons for the Resources window. If you load a large number of images, it needs to decompress every single image to build a picon. Go into settings->preferences->interface and disable Use thumbnails in resource window to skip this process. +
+ -- -+
-Next: APPLYING LINEARIZE FOLLOWED BY BLUR DOESN'T WORK, -Previous: LOCKING UP WHEN LOADING FILES, -Up: TROUBLESHOOTING -
+ ++++Next: APPLYING LINEARIZE FOLLOWED BY BLUR DOESN'T WORK, Previous: LOCKING UP WHEN LOADING FILES, Up: TROUBLESHOOTING [Contents]
+16.4 SYNCHRONIZATION LOST WHILE RECORDING
If the framerate of the recording is much lower than the framerate of @@ -6374,449 +7002,506 @@ time while the audio and video are well out of sync. Decrease the number of frames to buffer in the device in preferences->recording so the excess frames are dropped instead of buffered. - -
- + +
-
-Previous: SYNCHRONIZATION LOST WHILE RECORDING, -Up: TROUBLESHOOTING - ++- -+Previous: SYNCHRONIZATION LOST WHILE RECORDING, Up: TROUBLESHOOTING [Contents]
16.5 APPLYING LINEARIZE FOLLOWED BY BLUR DOESN'T WORK
+ +16.5 APPLYING LINEARIZE FOLLOWED BY BLUR DOESN’T WORK
The linearize effect uses the pow function while the blur effect uses a number of exp functions in the math library. For some reason, using the pow function breaks later calls to the exp functions in the math library. You need to apply linearize after blur to get it to work. +
+ + + + + - + +
+ ++++Next: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS, Previous: TROUBLESHOOTING, Up: TOP [Contents]
+17 SECRETS OF CINELERRA
-In this section, you'll find ways to apply Cinelerra to common +
In this section, you’ll find ways to apply Cinelerra to common problems. Other sections are arranged in order of the tools and what the tools are used for. This section is arranged in order of the problems and what tools are used to solve the problems. - -
- -+ ++
+ + +• DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENCODING: + • ANALOG TV CLEANING: + • DEFEATING INTERLACING: + • MAKING VIDEO LOOK LIKE FILM: + • CLEARING OUT HAZE: + • MAKING A DVD: + • MAKING A RINGTONE: + • TIME STRETCHING AUDIO: + • PITCH SHIFTING AUDIO: + • TEXT TO MOVIE: +
-
-Next: ANALOG TV CLEANING, -Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA - ++- ++Next: ANALOG TV CLEANING, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA [Contents]
17.1 DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENCODING
Dolby pro logic is an easy way to output 6 channel audio from a 2 channel soundcard with degraded but useful results. Rudimentary Dolby pro logic encoding can be achieved with clever usage of the effects. - -
Create 2 audio tracks with the same audio. Apply invert audio to +
+Create 2 audio tracks with the same audio. Apply invert audio to one track. The signal comes out of the back speakers. - -
Create a single audio track with monaural audio of a different source. +
+Create a single audio track with monaural audio of a different source. Center it in the pan control. The signal comes out of the center speaker. - -
Create other tracks with different signals and pan them left or right +
+Create other tracks with different signals and pan them left or right to put signals in the front left or right speaker. - -
Finally, if a copy of the signal in the back speakers is desired in any +
+Finally, if a copy of the signal in the back speakers is desired in any single front speaker, the signal in the back speakers must be delayed by at least 0.05 seconds and a single new track should be created. Pan the new track to orient the signal in the front speakers. - -
If the same signal is desired in all the speakers except the center +
+If the same signal is desired in all the speakers except the center speaker, delay the back speakers by 0.5 seconds and delay either the front left or front right by 0.2 seconds. - -
If you want to hear something from the subwoofer, create a new track, +
+If you want to hear something from the subwoofer, create a new track, select a range, drop a synthesizer effect, and set the frequency below 60 Hz. The subwoofer merely plays anything below around 60Hz. - -
Other tricks you can perform to separate the speakers are parametric +
+Other tricks you can perform to separate the speakers are parametric equalization to play only selected ranges of frequencies through different speakers and lowpass filtering to play signals through the subwoofer. +
- +
+ ++++Next: DEFEATING INTERLACING, Previous: DOLBY PRO LOGIC ENCODING, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA [Contents]
+17.2 ANALOG TV CLEANING
+Unless you live in a rich nation like China or are a terrorist, you probably record analog TV more than you record digital TV. The picture quality on analog TV is horrible but you can do things in Cinelerra to make it look more like it did in the studio. - -
First, when capturing the video, capture it in the highest resolution -possible. For Europeans it's 720x576 and for Americans it's 720x480. -Don't bother adjusting the brightness or contrast in the recording +
+First, when capturing the video, capture it in the highest resolution +possible. For Europeans it’s 720x576 and for Americans it’s 720x480. +Don’t bother adjusting the brightness or contrast in the recording monitor, although maxing out the color is useful. Capture it using MJPEG or uncompressed Component Video if possible. If those are too demanding, then capture it using JPEG. RGB should be a last resort. - -
Now on the timeline use Settings->Format to set a YUV colorspace. -Drop a Downsample effect on the footage. Set it for - -
Horizontal: 2 - Horizontal offset: 0 - Vertical: 2 - Vertical offset: 0 - - red - x green - x blue - alpha -
-Use the camera tool to shift the picture up or down a line to remove +
+Now on the timeline use Settings->Format to set a YUV colorspace. +Drop a Downsample effect on the footage. Set it for +
+++ +Horizontal: 2 +Horizontal offset: 0 +Vertical: 2 +Vertical offset: 0 + + red + x green + x blue + alpha +
Use the camera tool to shift the picture up or down a line to remove the most color interference from the image. This is the difference -we're looking for: - -
- -
+we’re looking for: + +
-
+
- If you have vertical blanking information or crawls which constantly +
If you have vertical blanking information or crawls which constantly change in each frame, block them out with the Mask tool. This improves compression ratios. - -
This is about all you can do without destroying more data than you +
+This is about all you can do without destroying more data than you would naturally lose in compression. The more invasive cleaning techniques involve deinterlacing. +
+ - +
+ ++++Next: MAKING VIDEO LOOK LIKE FILM, Previous: ANALOG TV CLEANING, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA [Contents]
+17.3 DEFEATING INTERLACING
+Interlacing is done on most video sources because it costs too much to -build progressive scanning cameras and progressive scanning CRT's. +build progressive scanning cameras and progressive scanning CRT’s. Many a consumer has been dissapointed to spend 5 paychecks on a camcorder and discover what horrible jagged images it produces on a computer monitor. - -
As for progressive scanning camcorders, forget it. Cost factors are +
+As for progressive scanning camcorders, forget it. Cost factors are probably going to keep progressive scanning cameras from ever equalling the spatial resolution of interlaced cameras. Interlacing is here to -stay. That's why they made deinterlacing effects in Cinelerra. - -
We don't believe there has ever been a perfect deinterlacing effect. -They're either irreversible or don't work. Cinelerra cuts down the +stay. That’s why they made deinterlacing effects in Cinelerra. +
+We don’t believe there has ever been a perfect deinterlacing effect. +They’re either irreversible or don’t work. Cinelerra cuts down the middle by providing deinterlacing tools that are irreversible sometimes -and don't work sometimes but are neither one or the other. - -
Line Doubling - -
This one is done by the Deinterlace effect when set to Odd +and don’t work sometimes but are neither one or the other. +
+Line Doubling +
+This one is done by the Deinterlace effect when set to Odd lines or Even lines. When applied to a track it reduces the vertical resolution by 1/2 and gives you progressive frames with stairstepping. This is only useful when followed by a scale effect which reduces the image to half its size. - -
Line averaging - -
The Deinterlace effect when set to Average even lines or +
+Line averaging +
+The Deinterlace effect when set to Average even lines or Average odd lines does exactly what line doubling does except instead of making straight copies of the lines it makes averages of the lines. This is actually useful for all scaling. - -
There's an option for adaptive line averaging which selects which lines +
+There’s an option for adaptive line averaging which selects which lines to line average and which lines to leave interlaced based on the -difference between the lines. It doesn't work. - -
Inverse Telecine - -
This is the most effective deinterlacing tool when the footage is an +difference between the lines. It doesn’t work. +
+Inverse Telecine +
+This is the most effective deinterlacing tool when the footage is an NTSC TV broadcast of a film. See INVERSE TELECINE. - -
Time base correction - -
The first three tools either destroy footage irreversibly or don't work -sometimes. Time base correction is last because it's the perfect -deinterlacing tool. It leaves the footage intact. It doesn't reduce -resolution, perceptually at least. It doesn't cause jittery timing. - -
The Frames to Fields effect converts each frame to two frames, so +
+ +Time base correction +
+The first three tools either destroy footage irreversibly or don’t work +sometimes. Time base correction is last because it’s the perfect +deinterlacing tool. It leaves the footage intact. It doesn’t reduce +resolution, perceptually at least. It doesn’t cause jittery timing. +
+The Frames to Fields effect converts each frame to two frames, so it must be used on a timeline whose project frame rate is twice the -footage's frame rate. In the first frame it puts a line averaged copy +footage’s frame rate. In the first frame it puts a line averaged copy of the even lines. In the second frame it puts a line averaged copy of the odd lines. When played back at full framerates it gives the illusion of progressive video with no loss of detail. - -
Best of all, this effect can be reversed with the Fields to frames +
+Best of all, this effect can be reversed with the Fields to frames effect. That one combines two frames of footage back into the one original interlaced frame of half the framerate. - -
Be aware that frames to fields inputs frames at half the framerate as +
+Be aware that frames to fields inputs frames at half the framerate as the project. Effects before frames to fields process at the reduced framerate. - -
Unfortunately, the output of Frames to Fields can't be compressed +
+Unfortunately, the output of Frames to Fields can’t be compressed as efficiently as the original because it introduces vertical twitter and a super high framerate. - -
Interlaced 29.97fps footage can be made to look like film by applying +
+Interlaced 29.97fps footage can be made to look like film by applying Frames to Fields and then reducing the project frame rate of the resulting 59.94fps footage to 23.97fps. This produces no timing jitter and the occasional odd field gives the illusion of more detail than there would be if you just line averaged the original. +
-HDTV exceptions - -
1920x1080 HDTV is encoded a special way. If it's a broadcast of -original HDTV film, an inverse telecine works fine. If it's a +
HDTV exceptions +
+1920x1080 HDTV is encoded a special way. If it’s a broadcast of +original HDTV film, an inverse telecine works fine. If it’s a rebroadcast of a 720x480 source, you need to use a time base and line doubling algorithm to deinterlace it, See 1080 TO 480. +
- +
+ ++++Next: CLEARING OUT HAZE, Previous: DEFEATING INTERLACING, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA [Contents]
+17.4 MAKING VIDEO LOOK LIKE FILM
+ + +Video sweetening is constantly getting better. Lately the best thing you can do for dirt cheap consumer camcorder video is to turn it into -progressive 24fps output. While you can't really do that, you can get +progressive 24fps output. While you can’t really do that, you can get pretty close for the money. Mind you, this procedure can degrade high quality video just as easily as it improves low quality video. It should only be used for low quality video. - -
-
-
-
+
+
-
+
- Step 1 - Set project framerate to twice the video framerate. -
- +
- Step 2 - Apply a Sharpen effect. Set it to sharpness: 25, no interlacing, and horizontal only. -
- +
- Step 3 - Drop a Frame to Fields effect on the same track. Set Average Empty Rows on and play through the video a few times to figure out which field is first. If the wrong field is first, the motion is shaky. Secondly, any editing in the doubled frame rate may now screw -up the field order. We're still figuring out the easiest way to +up the field order. We’re still figuring out the easiest way to support warnings for field glitches but for now you need to go back to the normal framerate to do editing or play test to make sure the fields are right. -
- + +
- Step 4 - Render just the video to the highest quality file possible. -
- +
- Step 5 - Import the video back to a new track. Set the project framerate to 24. The new track should now display more filmish and sharper images than the original footage. -
This entire procedure could be implemented in one nonrealtime effect, -but the biggest problem with that is you'll most often want to keep the +
This entire procedure could be implemented in one nonrealtime effect, +but the biggest problem with that is you’ll most often want to keep the field based output and the 24fps output for posterity. A nonrealtime effect would require all that processing just for the 24fps copy. Still debating that one. +
+ + + + + - +
+ ++++Next: MAKING A DVD, Previous: MAKING VIDEO LOOK LIKE FILM, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA [Contents]
+17.5 CLEARING OUT HAZE
-Let's face it, if you're employed you live in Silicon Valley. As such +
Let’s face it, if you’re employed you live in Silicon Valley. As such you probably photograph a lot of haze and never see blue sky ever. Even if you can afford to briefly go somewhere where there is blue sky, horizon shots usually can stand for more depth. This is what the gradient effect is for. - -
Drop the gradient effect on hazy tracks. Set the following parameters: - -
Angle: 0 - Inner radius: 0 - Outer radius: 40 - Inner color: blue 100% alpha - Outer color: blue 0% alpha -
-It's important to set the 0% alpha color to blue even though it's 0% +
+Drop the gradient effect on hazy tracks. Set the following parameters: +
+++ +Angle: 0 +Inner radius: 0 +Outer radius: 40 +Inner color: blue 100% alpha +Outer color: blue 0% alpha +
It’s important to set the 0% alpha color to blue even though it’s 0% alpha. The color of the outer alpha is still interpolated with the inner color. This is a generally applicable setting for the gradient. Some scenes may work better with orange or brown for an evening feel. +
- + + + +
+ ++++Next: MAKING A RINGTONE, Previous: CLEARING OUT HAZE, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA [Contents]
+17.6 MAKING A DVD
A single chapter DVD - -
Make a single chapter DVD by rendering video to an MPEG video file. +
+Make a single chapter DVD by rendering video to an MPEG video file. The video should be 720x480, 29.97fps. The aspect ratio should be 16x9 or 4x3. - -
Use the YUV 4:2:0 color model and DVD preset. Set the bitrate to the -desired bitrate. It's not clear exactly what other parameters the MPEG -encoder uses in the DVD preset but we've enabled the following: - -
Derivative: MPEG-2 - Fixed bitrate - I frame distance: 15 - P frame distance: 0 - Sequence start codes in every GOP -
-Render the audio to an AC3 audio file. Any bitrate can be used. - -
Dvdrtools must be downloaded to generate the actual DVD +
+Use the YUV 4:2:0 color model and DVD preset. Set the bitrate to the +desired bitrate. It’s not clear exactly what other parameters the MPEG +encoder uses in the DVD preset but we’ve enabled the following: +
+++ +Derivative: MPEG-2 +Fixed bitrate +I frame distance: 15 +P frame distance: 0 +Sequence start codes in every GOP +
Render the audio to an AC3 audio file. Any bitrate can be used. +
+Dvdrtools must be downloaded to generate the actual DVD filesystem. The actual usage of dvdrtools changes frequently but currently it involves the mkisofs and ifogen programs. Mkisofs is built automatically in dvdrtools but ifogen may have to be built manually by entering the video directory and running make ifogen. Mkisofs and ifogen must be put into /usr/bin manually. - -
Also, the mplex program from mjpegtools must be installed. The +
+Also, the mplex program from mjpegtools must be installed. The mjpegtools package is built in the hvirtual distribution and the mplex utility may be extracted from there. - -
Given the files audio.ac3 and video.m2v, rendered by Cinelerra, the +
+Given the files audio.ac3 and video.m2v, rendered by Cinelerra, the following commands pack them into a dvd readable by commercial appliances. - -
mplex -M -f 8 -o final.mpg audio.ac3 video.m2v - mkdir -p dvd/VIDEO_TS - ifogen final.mpg -o dvd - ifogen -T -o dvd - mkisofs -dvd-video -udf -o dvd.iso dvd/ -
-Chapters may be set with the following. The units are seconds. Version +
+++ +mplex -M -f 8 -o final.mpg audio.ac3 video.m2v +mkdir -p dvd/VIDEO_TS +ifogen final.mpg -o dvd +ifogen -T -o dvd +mkisofs -dvd-video -udf -o dvd.iso dvd/ +
Chapters may be set with the following. The units are seconds. Version 0.3.1 ignores the 1st chapter, so it has to be specified as 0. +
+++ +ifogen -o dvd --chapters=0,0021.788,0047.447,0077.043 final.mpg +
Replace the chapter times. +
+dvd.iso can be burned directly to a DVD with the following: +
+++ +dvdrecord -ignsize -dao -v dev=/dev/hdc fs=67108864 dvd.iso +
The argument to dev= is the IDE device of the DVD drive. Burning DVD’s +through SCSI is currently not supported. +
-ifogen -o dvd --chapters=0,0021.788,0047.447,0077.043 final.mpg -
-Replace the chapter times. -
dvd.iso can be burned directly to a DVD with the following: -
dvdrecord -ignsize -dao -v dev=/dev/hdc fs=67108864 dvd.iso -
-The argument to dev= is the IDE device of the DVD drive. Burning DVD's -through SCSI is currently not supported. -
+ +
+ ++++Next: TIME STRETCHING AUDIO, Previous: MAKING A DVD, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA [Contents]
+17.7 MAKING A RINGTONE
-This is how we made ringtones for the low end Motorola V180's and it'll +
This is how we made ringtones for the low end Motorola V180’s and it’ll probably work with any new phone. Go to File->Load files... and load a sound file with Insertion strategy: Replace current project. Go to Settings->Format change Channels to 1 and Samplerate to 16000 or 22050. - -
Either highlight a region of the timeline or set in/out points to use +
+Either highlight a region of the timeline or set in/out points to use for the ringtone. To improve sound quality on the cell phone, you need the maximum amplitude in as many parts of the sound as possible. Right click on track Audio 1 and select Attach effect... Highlight the Compressor effect and hit Attach in the attachment popup. - -
Make sure the insertion point or highlighted area is in the region with +
+Make sure the insertion point or highlighted area is in the region with the Compressor effect. Right click on track Audio 2 and select Attach effect... Highlight Audio 1: Compressor and hit -Attach. Click the Audio1 Compressor's magnifying glass -
to bring up the compressor GUI.
-
- Set the following parameters: - -
Reaction secs: -0.1 - Decay secs: 0.1 - Trigger Type: Total - Trigger: 0 - Smooth only: No -
-Click Clear to clear the graph. Click anywhere in the +Attach. Click the Audio1 Compressor’s magnifying glass +
+ to bring up the compressor GUI.
+Set the following parameters: +
+++ + +Reaction secs: -0.1 +Decay secs: 0.1 +Trigger Type: Total +Trigger: 0 +Smooth only: No +
Click Clear to clear the graph. Click anywhere in the grid area and drag a new point to 0 Output and -50 Input. The graph should look like this. +
+
+
- - -
-
-
- Go to File->Render. Specify the name of an mp3 file to output to. -Set the file format to MPEG Audio. Click the wrench
+Go to File->Render. Specify the name of an mp3 file to output to. +Set the file format to MPEG Audio. Click the wrench
for Audio and set Layer to III and Kbits per second to
24 or 32. Check Render audio tracks and uncheck Render
video tracks. Hit OK to render the file.
-
- The resulting .mp3 file must be uploaded to a web server. Then, the -phone's web browser must download the .mp3 file directly from the URL. +
+The resulting .mp3 file must be uploaded to a web server. Then, the +phone’s web browser must download the .mp3 file directly from the URL. There also may be a size limit on the file. +
+ + - + +
+ ++++Next: PITCH SHIFTING AUDIO, Previous: MAKING A RINGTONE, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA [Contents]
+17.8 TIME STRETCHING AUDIO
It may appear that time stretching audio is a matter of selecting a @@ -6824,35 +7509,34 @@ region of the audio tracks, enabling recording for the desired tracks, going to Audio->Render Effect, and applying Time Stretch. In actuality there are 3 audio effects for time stretching: Time Stretch, Resample, and Asset info dialog. - -
Time Stretch applies a fast fourier transform to try to change the +
+Time Stretch applies a fast fourier transform to try to change the duration without changing the pitch, but this introduces windowing -artifacts to the audio. It's only useful for large changes in time +artifacts to the audio. It’s only useful for large changes in time because obvious changes in duration make windowing artifacts less obtrusive. - -
For smaller changes in duration, in the range of 5%, Resample +
+For smaller changes in duration, in the range of 5%, Resample should be used. This changes the pitch of the audio but small enough -changes aren't noticable. Resample doesn't introduce any windowing +changes aren’t noticable. Resample doesn’t introduce any windowing artifacts, so this is most useful for slight duration changes where the -listener isn't supposed to know what's going on. - -
Another way to change duration slightly is to go to the Resources +listener isn’t supposed to know what’s going on. +
+Another way to change duration slightly is to go to the Resources window, highlight the media folder, right click on an audio file, click on Info. Adjust the sample rate in the Info dialog to adjust the duration. This method also requires left clicking on the right boundary of the audio tracks and dragging left or right to correspond to the length changes. +
-+
-
-Next: TEXT TO MOVIE, -Previous: TIME STRETCHING AUDIO, -Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA - ++- ++Next: TEXT TO MOVIE, Previous: TIME STRETCHING AUDIO, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA [Contents]
17.9 PITCH SHIFTING AUDIO
Like the time stretching methods, there are three pitch shifting @@ -6861,223 +7545,271 @@ Pitch shift is a realtime effect which can be dragged and dropped onto recordable audio tracks. Pitch shift uses a fast fourier transform to try to change the pitch without changing the duration, but this introduces windowing artifacts. - -
Because the windowing artifacts are less obtrusive in audio which is +
+Because the windowing artifacts are less obtrusive in audio which is obvously pitch shifted, Pitch shift is mainly useful for extreme pitch changes. For mild pitch changes, use Resample from the Audio->Render Effect interface. Resample can change the pitch within 5% without a noticable change in duration. - -
Another way to change pitch slightly is to go to the Resources +
+Another way to change pitch slightly is to go to the Resources window, highlight the media folder, right click on an audio file, click on Info. Adjust the sample rate in the Info dialog to adjust the pitch. This method also requires left clicking on the right boundary of the audio tracks and dragging left or right to correspond to the length changes. +
-+
-
-Previous: PITCH SHIFTING AUDIO, -Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA - ++- ++Previous: PITCH SHIFTING AUDIO, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA [Contents]
17.10 TEXT TO MOVIE
+ +Text to movie was added when another one of those startups whose name was an unmemorable combination of farting noises that the venture capitalist heard, started charging money for a ridulously simple program that converted scripts directly to movies. It was such a simple program, we decided to add most of the functionality to Cinelerra. - -
The easiest way to make a movie is to copy tests/text2movie and +
+The easiest way to make a movie is to copy tests/text2movie and tests/text2movie.xml as a starting point. Load the text2movie.xml file to see the movie. - -
The text2movie file acts like a normal asset, except changes to it +
+The text2movie file acts like a normal asset, except changes to it are immediately reflected on the timeline, without reloading. Also, the length is infiinite. Edit the text2movie file to change the script. If the length of the movie increases, drag the right edit handle to extend the edit or use edit->edit length. - -
1 audio channel is created for every character. The frame rate, sample +
+1 audio channel is created for every character. The frame rate, sample rate, and frame size are fixed. Get it from the asset window. Right click on the asset and go to Asset info... Camera angles are fixed. - -
Since its only use was to show dialog between 2 people, that's the +
+Since its only use was to show dialog between 2 people, that’s the functionality we focused on. The character model and voice is selected separately in the script, because that was how it was done with the fee service. The models are defined in model files, in the Cinelerra executable directory. Usually /opt/cinelerra/models. - -
There is a search path for models, starting with the directory the +
+There is a search path for models, starting with the directory the script is in. You can define new models for the script, without affecting the entire system. The model files are the exact name that appears in the script. They define the total size of the model and the images used in the model. - -
The models are 2D png images, because all the animations are baked. No +
+The models are 2D png images, because all the animations are baked. No custom movement is currently supported, that would require a 3D -renderer. - -
Some actions are implemented. Character2 can cut off character1 if -character1's dialog ends in ... - -
Inserting [pause] anywhere causes the character to pause. Useful +renderer. +
+Some actions are implemented. Character2 can cut off character1 if +character1’s dialog ends in ... +
+Inserting [pause] anywhere causes the character to pause. Useful for adjusting the timing of dialog. - -
Speech synthesis is pretty lousy. Punctuation and spelling needs to be +
+Speech synthesis is pretty lousy. Punctuation and spelling needs to be adjusted based on the sound. The dialog is rendered on-demand, so there is a delay when each character starts to speak. Split dialog into shorter blocks to reduce the delay. +
+ - + +
+ ++++Next: PLUGIN AUTHORING, Previous: SECRETS OF CINELERRA, Up: TOP [Contents]
+18 SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS
Most effects in Cinelerra can be figured out just by using them and tweeking. Here are brief descriptions of effects which you might not utilize fully by mere experimentation. - -
- -+ + ++
+ + + + +• 1080 TO 480: How to convert HDTV into SD + • CHROMA KEY: Create transparency based on color similarities. + • COMPRESSOR: How to reduce the dynamic range of audio. + • DECIMATE: How to reduce frame rates by eliminating similar frames. + • DEINTERLACE: How to convert interlaced video to progressive video. + • DIFFERENCE KEY: Create transparency based on color differences. + • FIELDS TO FRAMES: How to recover interlaced video from bobbed video + • FREEZE FRAME: How to stop action in the timeline. + • HISTOGRAM: How to change the mapping of different brightness values. + • INVERSE TELECINE: How to convert pulled down frames to progressive frames. + • INTERPOLATE VIDEO: How to create the illusion of higher framerates. + • LENS: Correcting spherical aberration + • LINEARIZE: Fix gamma in raw camera images + • LIVE AUDIO: Pass audio from the soundcard directly to the timeline. + • LIVE VIDEO: Pass video from the capture card directly to the timeline. + • LOOP: How to loop regions of the timeline. + • MOTION: Motion tracking with rotation. + • MOTION 2 POINT: Motion and rotation tracking from translation only. + • REFRAMERT: Changing the number of frames in a sequence. + • REFRAME: Changing the number of frames in a sequence with rendering. + • RESAMPLE: Change the number of samples in a sequence with rendering. + • REVERSE VIDEO/AUDIO: How to play regions in reverse. + • SWAP FRAMES: Fixing temporal field order + • THRESHOLD: How to get monochrome out of a region of the image. + • TIME AVERAGE: How to stack images. + • TITLER: How to add text to a track from inside Cinelerra. + • VIDEO SCOPE: How to view the dynamic range of intensity and hue. +
-
-Next: CHROMA KEY, -Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS - ++- ++Next: CHROMA KEY, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
18.1 1080 TO 480
+Most TV broadcasts are recieved with a 1920x1080 resolution but -originate from a 720x480 source at the studio. It's a waste of space +originate from a 720x480 source at the studio. It’s a waste of space to compress the entire 1920x1080 if the only resolvable details are -720x480. Unfortunately resizing 1920x1080 video to 720x480 isn't as +720x480. Unfortunately resizing 1920x1080 video to 720x480 isn’t as simple as shrinking it. - -
At the TV station the original 720x480 footage was first converted to +
+At the TV station the original 720x480 footage was first converted to fields of 720x240. Each field was then scaled up to 1920x540. The two 1920x540 fields were finally combined with interlacing to form the 1920x1080 image. This technique allows a consumer TV to display the resampled image without extra circuitry to handle 720x480 interlacing in a 1920x1080 image. - -
If you merely deinterlaced the 1920x1080 images, you would end up with +
+If you merely deinterlaced the 1920x1080 images, you would end up with resolution of 720x240. The 1080 to 480 effect properly extracts two 1920x540 size fields from the image, resizes them separately, and combines them again to restore a 1920x480 interlaced image. The scale effect must then be applied to reduce the horizontal size to 960 or 720 depending on the original aspect ratio. - -
The tracks to which 1080 to 480 is applied need to be at 1920x1080 +
+The tracks to which 1080 to 480 is applied need to be at 1920x1080 resolution. The project settings in settings->format should be at least 720x480 resolution. - -
The effect doesn't know if the first row in the 1920x1080 image belongs +
+The effect doesn’t know if the first row in the 1920x1080 image belongs to the first row of the 720x480 original. You have to specify what the first row is in the effect configuration. - -
The output of this effect is a small image in the middle of the +
+The output of this effect is a small image in the middle of the original 1920x1080 frame. Use the projector to center the output image in the playback. - -
Finally, once you have 720x480 interlaced video you can either apply +
+Finally, once you have 720x480 interlaced video you can either apply frames to fields of inverse telecine to further recover original progressive frames. +
+ - + + +
+ ++++Next: COMPRESSOR, Previous: 1080 TO 480, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.2 CHROMA KEY
+This effect erases pixels which match the selected color. They are replaced with black if there is no alpha channel and transparency if there is an alpha channel. The selection of color model is important to determine the behavior. - -
Chroma key uses either the lightness or the hue to determine what is +
+Chroma key uses either the lightness or the hue to determine what is erased. Use value singles out only the lightness to determine transparency. Select a center color to erase using the Color button. Alternatively a color can be picked directly from the output frame by first using the color picker in the compositor window and then selecting the Use color picker button. This sets the chroma key color to the current color picker color. - -
Be aware that the output of the chroma key is fed back to the +
+Be aware that the output of the chroma key is fed back to the compositor, so selecting a color again from the compositor will use the output of the chroma key effect. The chroma key should be disabled when selecting colors with the color picker. +
-If the lightness or hue is within a certain threshold it's erased. +
If the lightness or hue is within a certain threshold it’s erased. Increasing the threshold determines the range of colors to be erased. -It's not a simple on/off switch, however. As the color approaches the +It’s not a simple on/off switch, however. As the color approaches the edge of the threshold, it gradually gets erased if the slope is high or is rapidly erased if the slope is low. The slope as defined here is the number of extra values flanking the threshold required to go from opaque to transparent. - -
Normally threshold is very low when using a high slope. The two +
+Normally threshold is very low when using a high slope. The two parameters tend to be exclusive because slope fills in extra threshold. - -
The slope tries to soften the edges of the chroma key but it doesn't +
+The slope tries to soften the edges of the chroma key but it doesn’t work well for compressed sources. A popular softening technique is to use a maximum slope and chain a blur effect below the chroma key effect to blur just the alpha. +
+ + + + + - +
+ ++++Next: DECIMATE, Previous: CHROMA KEY, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.3 COMPRESSOR
Contrary to computer science experience, the audio compressor does not @@ -7085,23 +7817,23 @@ reduce the amount of data required to store the audio. The audio compressor reduces the dynamic range of the audio. In Cinelerra the compressor actually performs the function of an expander and compressor. - -
The compressor works by calculating the maximum sound level within a +
+The compressor works by calculating the maximum sound level within a certain time period of the current position. The maximum sound level is taken as the input sound level. For every input sound level there is an output sound level specified by the user. The gain at the current position is adjusted so the maximum sound level in the time range is the user specified value. - -
The compressor has a graph which correlates every input sound level to +
+The compressor has a graph which correlates every input sound level to an output level. The horizontal direction is the input sound level in dB. The vertical direction is the ouptut sound level in dB. The user specifies output sound levels by creating points on the graph. Click in the graph to create a point. If 2 points exist, drag one point across another point to delete it. The most recent point selected has its vales displayed in textboxes for more precise adjustment. - -
To make the compressor reduce the dynamic range of the audio, make all +
+To make the compressor reduce the dynamic range of the audio, make all the output values greater than the input values except 0 db. To make the compressor expand the dynamic range of the audio, make all the output values except 0 db less than the input values. The algorithm @@ -7109,91 +7841,102 @@ currently limits all sound levels above 0 db to 0 db so to get an overloaded effect put a gain effect before the compressor to reduce all the levels and follow it with another gain effect to amplify all the levels back over 0 db. - -
Reaction secs: This determines where in relation to the current +
+Reaction secs: This determines where in relation to the current position the maximum sound level is taken and how fast the gain is -adjusted to reach that peak. It's notated in seconds. If it's +adjusted to reach that peak. It’s notated in seconds. If it’s negative the compressor reads ahead of the current position to get the future peak. The gain is ramped to that peak over one reaction time. This allows it to hit the desired output level exactly when the input peak occurs at the current position. - -
If the reaction time is positive the compressor scans only the current +
+If the reaction time is positive the compressor scans only the current position for the gain and ramps gain over one reaction time to hit the desired output level. It hits the output level exactly one reaction time after detecting the input peak. - -
Decay secs: If the peak is higher than the current level, the +
+Decay secs: If the peak is higher than the current level, the compressor ramps the gain up to the peak value. Then if a future peak is less than the current peak it ramps the gain down. The time taken to ramp the gain down can be greater than the time taken to ramp the gain up. This ramping down time is the decay seconds. - -
Trigger type: The compressor is a multichannel effect. Several +
+Trigger type: The compressor is a multichannel effect. Several tracks can share one compressor. How the signal from many tracks is interpreted is determined by the trigger type. - -
The Trigger trigger type uses the value supplied in the Trigger +
+The Trigger trigger type uses the value supplied in the Trigger textbox as the number of the track to use as input for the compressor. -This allows a track which isn't even heard to determine the loudness of +This allows a track which isn’t even heard to determine the loudness of the other tracks. - -
The Maximum trigger takes the loudest track and uses it as the +
+The Maximum trigger takes the loudest track and uses it as the input for the compressor. - -
The Total trigger type adds the signals from all the tracks and +
+The Total trigger type adds the signals from all the tracks and uses the total as the input for the compressor. This is the most natural sounding compression and is ideal when multiple tracks are averaged into single speakers. +
-Trigger: The compressor is a multichannel effect. Several tracks + +
Trigger: The compressor is a multichannel effect. Several tracks can share one compressor. Normally only one track is scanned for the input peak. This track is specified by the Trigger. By sharing several tracks and playing with the trigger value, you can make a sine wave on one track follow the amplitude of a drum on another track for example. - -
Smooth only: For visualizing what the compressor is doing to the +
+Smooth only: For visualizing what the compressor is doing to the soundlevel, this option causes it to replace the soundwave with just the current peak value. It makes it very easy to see how reaction secs affects the detected peak values. +
- + + + +
+ ++++Next: DEINTERLACE, Previous: COMPRESSOR, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.4 DECIMATE
This effect drops frames from a track which are most similar in order to reduce the frame rate. This is usually applied to a DVD to convert the 29.97 fps video to the 23.97 fps film rate but this decimate effect can take any input rate and convert it to any lower output rate. - -
The output rate of decimate is the project frame rate. The input +
+The output rate of decimate is the project frame rate. The input rate is set in the decimate user interface. To convert 29.97fps progressive video to 23.97fps film, apply a decimate effect to the track. Set the decimate input rate to 29.97 and the project rate to 23.97. - -
Be aware every effect layered before decimate processes video at the +
+Be aware every effect layered before decimate processes video at the decimate input rate and every effect layered after decimate processes video at the project frame rate. Computationally intensive effects should come below decimate. +
+ + + - + +
+ ++++Next: DIFFERENCE KEY, Previous: DECIMATE, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.5 DEINTERLACE
The deinterlace effect has evolved over the years to deinterlacing and @@ -7203,16 +7946,21 @@ deinterlace effect offers several variations of line replication to eliminate comb artifacts in interlaced video. It also has some line swapping tools to fix improperly captured video or make the result of a reverse effect display fields in the right order. +
+ + + - + +
+ ++++Next: FIELDS TO FRAMES, Previous: DEINTERLACE, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.6 DIFFERENCE KEY
The differency key creates transparency in areas which are similar @@ -7223,103 +7971,113 @@ front of it. Apply the difference key to the track with the action and apply a shared copy of it to the track with the background. The track with the background should be muted and underneath the track with the action and the colormodel should have an alpha channel. - -
Pixels which are different between the background and action track are +
+Pixels which are different between the background and action track are treated as opaque. Pixels which are similar are treated as transparent. Change threshold in the differency key window to make -more pixels which aren't the same color transparent. Change slope +more pixels which aren’t the same color transparent. Change slope to change the rate at which the transparency tapers off as pixels get more different. - -
The slope as defined here is the number of extra values flanking the +
+The slope as defined here is the number of extra values flanking the threshold required to go from opaque to transparent. A high slope is more useful with a low threshold because slope fills in extra threshold. - -
Use value causes the intensity of pixels to be compared instead of +
+Use value causes the intensity of pixels to be compared instead of the color. - -
Applying a blur to the top track with just the alpha channel blurred +
+Applying a blur to the top track with just the alpha channel blurred can soften the transparency border. +
+ - +
+ ++++Next: FREEZE FRAME, Previous: DIFFERENCE KEY, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.7 FIELDS TO FRAMES
This effects reads frames at twice the project framerate, combining 2 input frames into a single interlaced output frame. Effects preceeding fields to frames process frames at twice the project frame rate. Each input frame is called a field. - -
Fields to frames needs to know what field corresponds to what lines +
+Fields to frames needs to know what field corresponds to what lines in the output frame. The easiest way to figure it out is to try both options in the window. If the input fields are the result of a line doubling process like frames to fields, the wrong setting results in blurrier output. If the input fields are the result of a standards -conversion process like 1080 to 480, the wrong setting won't make +conversion process like 1080 to 480, the wrong setting won’t make any difference. - -
The debobber which converts 720x480 interlaced into 1920x1080 +
+The debobber which converts 720x480 interlaced into 1920x1080 interlaced or 1280x720 progressive seems to degrade the vertical -resolution to the point that it can't be recovered. +resolution to the point that it can’t be recovered. +
- + + + +
+ ++++Next: HISTOGRAM, Previous: FIELDS TO FRAMES, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.8 FREEZE FRAME
In its simplest form, highlight a region of the track to freeze, drop the freeze frame effect on the highlighted region, and the lowest numbered frame in the affected area will play throughout the entire -region. - -
Freezeframe has an enabled option which can be keyframed. Regions +region. +
+Freezeframe has an enabled option which can be keyframed. Regions of a freeze frame effect which are enabled repeat the lowest numbered frame since the last keyframe. This has unique possibilities. - -
If a freeze frame effect has a keyframe in the middle of it set to +
+If a freeze frame effect has a keyframe in the middle of it set to enabled, the frame in the middle is repeated in the entire effect. - -
If a freeze frame effect has several keyframes, each set to +
+If a freeze frame effect has several keyframes, each set to enabled, every time a keyframe is encountered the frame under it becomes the frozen one. - -
If a freeze frame effect alternates between enabled and +
+If a freeze frame effect alternates between enabled and disabled, each time an enabled keyframe is encountered the frame under it is replicated until the next disabled keyframe. The disabled regions play through. +
- + + +
+ ++++Next: INVERSE TELECINE, Previous: FREEZE FRAME, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.9 HISTOGRAM
-This shows the number of occurances of each color on a histogram plot. -
It is always performed in floating point RGB regardless of +
This shows the number of occurances of each color on a histogram plot. +
+It is always performed in floating point RGB regardless of the project colorspace. The histogram has two sets of transfer parameters: the input transfer and the output transfer. - -
4 histograms are possible in the histogram viewer. The red, green, +
+4 histograms are possible in the histogram viewer. The red, green, blue histograms show the input histograms for red, green, blue and multiply them by an input transfer to get the output red, green, blue. Then the output red, green, blue is scaled by an output transfer. The @@ -7327,64 +8085,73 @@ scaled red, green, blue is converted into a value and plotted on the value histogram. The value histogram thus changes depending on the settings for red, green, blue. The value transfers are applied uniformly to R, G, B after their color transfers are applied. - -
Select which transfer to view by selecting one of the channels on the +
+Select which transfer to view by selecting one of the channels on the top of the histogram. +
-The input transfer is defined by a graph overlaid on the histogram. +
The input transfer is defined by a graph overlaid on the histogram. The horizontal direction corresponds to every possible input color. The vertical direction corresponds to the output color for every input color. Video entering the histogram is first plotted on the histogram plot, then it is translated so output values now equal the output values for each input value on the input graph. - -
The input graph is edited by adding and removing any number of points. +
+The input graph is edited by adding and removing any number of points. Click and drag anywhere in the input graph to create a point and move it. Click on an existing point to make it active and move it. The active point is always indicated by being filled in. The active -point's input and output color are given in text boxes on top of the +point’s input and output color are given in text boxes on top of the window. The input and output color of the point can be changed through these text boxes. - -
Points can be deleted by first selecting a point and then dragging it +
+Points can be deleted by first selecting a point and then dragging it to the other side of an adjacent point. They can also be deleted by selecting them and hitting delete. +
-After the input transfer, the image is processed by the output +
After the input transfer, the image is processed by the output transfer. The output transfer is simply a minimum and maximum to scale the input colors to. Input values of 100% are scaled down to the -output's maximum. Input values of 0% are scaled up to the output +output’s maximum. Input values of 0% are scaled up to the output minimum. +
-Input values below 0 are always clamped to 0 and input values above +
Input values below 0 are always clamped to 0 and input values above 100% are always clamped to 100%. Click and drag on the output -gradient's triangles to change it. It also has textboxes to enter +gradient’s triangles to change it. It also has textboxes to enter values into. - -
Enable the automatic toggle to have the histogram calculate an +
+Enable the automatic toggle to have the histogram calculate an automatic input transfer for the red, green, blue but not the value. It does this by scaling the middle 99% of the pixels to take 100% of the histogram width. The number of pixels permitted to pass through is set by the Threshold textbox. A threshold of 0.99 scales the input so 99% of the pixels pass through. Smaller thresholds permit fewer pixels to pass through and make the output look more contrasty. - -
Automatic input transfer is calculated for the R, G, and B channels but +
+Automatic input transfer is calculated for the R, G, and B channels but not the value. +
+ +PLOT HISTOGRAM +
+SPLIT OUTPUT +
+ -PLOT HISTOGRAM -
SPLIT OUTPUT -
+ +
+ ++++Next: INTERPOLATE VIDEO, Previous: HISTOGRAM, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.10 INVERSE TELECINE
This is the most effective deinterlacing tool when the footage is a @@ -7393,32 +8160,37 @@ video transfer of a film. Here the film was converted from 24fps to even lines and interlacing the lines. The IVTC effect is primarily a way to convert interlaced video to progressive video. It undoes three patterns of interlacing. - -
A AB BC CD D - AB CD CD DE EF - Automatic -
-The first two options are fixed patterns and affected by the pattern +
+++ +A AB BC CD D + AB CD CD DE EF + Automatic +
The first two options are fixed patterns and affected by the pattern offset and odd field first parameters. The last option creates several combinations of lines for each frame and picks the most -progressive combination. It's a brute force algorithm. - -
This technique doesn't rely on a pattern like other techniques and is +progressive combination. It’s a brute force algorithm. +
+This technique doesn’t rely on a pattern like other techniques and is less destructive but the timing is going to be jittery because of the lack of a frame rate reduction. In order to smooth out the timing, you need to follow inverse telecine with a decimate effect. +
+ - +
+ ++++Next: LENS, Previous: INVERSE TELECINE, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.11 INTERPOLATE VIDEO
+The interpolate video effect tries to create the illusion of a higher frame rate from source footage of very low framerates by averaging frames over time. It averages two input frames for each output frame. @@ -7427,203 +8199,225 @@ all output frames between the input frames. There are two ways of specifying the input frames. You can specify an input frame rate which is lower than the project frame rate. This causes input frames to be taken at even intervals, - -
You can also specify keyframe locations as the positions of the input +
+You can also specify keyframe locations as the positions of the input frames. In this mode the output frame rate is used as the input frame rate and you just create keyframes wherever you want to specify an input frame. +
-+
-
-Next: LINEARIZE, -Previous: INTERPOLATE VIDEO, -Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS - ++- ++Next: LINEARIZE, Previous: INTERPOLATE VIDEO, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
18.12 LENS
The lens affect stretches or shrinks to convert lens distorted images to rectilinear images. The most common use is converting fish eye lenses to rectilinear lenses. It is also useful for star tracking. - -
R, G, B, A Field of view: These determine how much the image is +
+R, G, B, A Field of view: These determine how much the image is stretched in each channel. - -
Lock: This causes changes to 1 channel to affect all the channels. +
+Lock: This causes changes to 1 channel to affect all the channels. This is normally the desired behavior. - -
Aspect Ratio: This changes the amount of stretching done in the X +
+Aspect Ratio: This changes the amount of stretching done in the X axis vs the Y axis. To crop less data from stretched images, this allows more stretching to be done on 1 axis without creating black borders in the other axis. - -
Radius: This determines the size of the stretched region. While +
+Radius: This determines the size of the stretched region. While adjusting the field of view, black borders may appear. Adjust the radius to shrink or expand the output so black borders are out of frame. - -
Center X, Y: The center of the stretched region. This is only +
+Center X, Y: The center of the stretched region. This is only useful if the image was previously translated by the software so the center of the lens is now off center. +
+Draw center: This is a visual aid when adjusting the Center X, Y +but doesn’t affect the results. +
+Mode: The type of stretching algorithm. +
+-
+
- Sphere shrink: This is for making an image look like it’s mapped to a sphere. + +
- Sphere expand: This is for unmapping an image mapped to a sphere and +flattening it. + +
- Rectilinear Stretch: This is for flattening a fish eye lens. + +
- Rectilinear Shrink: This is for making something flat look like it +was taken by a fish eye lens. + + +
Draw center: This is a visual aid when adjusting the Center X, Y -but doesn't affect the results. -
Mode: The type of stretching algorithm. -
-
-
- Sphere shrink: This is for making an image look like it's mapped to a sphere. -
- Sphere expand: This is for unmapping an image mapped to a sphere and -flattening it. -
- Rectilinear Stretch: This is for flattening a fish eye lens. -
- Rectilinear Shrink: This is for making something flat look like it -was taken by a fish eye lens. -
+ ++++Next: LIVE AUDIO, Previous: LENS, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.13 LINEARIZE
+Raw camera images store colors in a logarithmic scale. The blacks in these images are nearly 0 and the whites are supposed to be infinity. The graphics card and most video codecs store colors in a linear scale but Cinelerra keeps raw camera images in their original logarithmic scale when it renders them. This is necessary because the raw image -parser can't always decode the proper gamma values for the images. It +parser can’t always decode the proper gamma values for the images. It also does its processing in 16 bit integers, which takes away a lot of information. - -
The linearize effect converts the logarithmic colors to linear colors +
+The linearize effect converts the logarithmic colors to linear colors through a gamma value and a maximum value. The gamma value determines how steep the output curve is and the maximum value is where 1.0 in the output corresponds to maximum brightness in the input. - -
The linearize effect has 2 more parameters to simplify gamma +
+The linearize effect has 2 more parameters to simplify gamma correction. The automatic option causes it to calculate max from the histogram of the image. Use this when making a preview of a long list of images since it changes for every image. - -
The use color picker option uses the value currently in the color +
+The use color picker option uses the value currently in the color picker to set the max value. Note that every time you pick a color from the compositor window, you need to hit use color picker to apply the new value. +
+ + + - + +
+ ++++Next: LIVE VIDEO, Previous: LINEARIZE, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.14 LIVE AUDIO
This effect reads audio directly from the soundcard input. It replaces -any audio on the track so it's normally applied to an empty track. +any audio on the track so it’s normally applied to an empty track. +
-To use Live Audio, highlight a horizontal region of an audio track or +
To use Live Audio, highlight a horizontal region of an audio track or define in and out points. Then drop the Live Audio effect into it. Create extra tracks and attach shared copies of the first Live Audio effect to the other tracks to have extra channels recorded. - -
Live Audio uses the sound driver selected in +
+Live Audio uses the sound driver selected in Settings->Preferences->Playback->Audio Out for recording, but unlike recording it uses the playback buffer size as the recording buffer size and it uses the project sample rate as the sampling rate. - -
These settings are critical since some sound drivers can't record in +
+These settings are critical since some sound drivers can’t record in the same sized buffer they play back in. Live audio has been most reliable when ALSA is the recording driver and the playback fragment size is 2048. - -
Drop other effects after Live Audio to process soundcard input in -realtime. - -
Now the bad news. With live audio there is no readahead so effects +
+Drop other effects after Live Audio to process soundcard input in +realtime. +
+Now the bad news. With live audio there is no readahead so effects like compressor will either delay if they have readahead enabled or -playback will underrun. - -
Another problem is sometimes the recording clock on the soundcard is +playback will underrun. +
+Another problem is sometimes the recording clock on the soundcard is slightly slower than the playback clock. The recording eventually falls behind and playback sounds choppy. +
+Finally, live audio doesn’t work in reverse. +
-Finally, live audio doesn't work in reverse. -
+
+ ++++Next: LOOP, Previous: LIVE AUDIO, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.15 LIVE VIDEO
This effect reads video directly from the capture card input. It -replaces any video on the track so it's normally applied to an empty +replaces any video on the track so it’s normally applied to an empty track. The configuration for the capture card is taken from the recording preferences. Go to Settings->Preferences->Recording to set up the capture card. - -
Go to the Video In section where it says Record driver. It +
+Go to the Video In section where it says Record driver. It must be set to either Video4Linux2 or IEC 61883. Other video -drivers haven't been tested with Live Video and probably won't work. - -
For live video, the selection for File Format and Video needs +drivers haven’t been tested with Live Video and probably won’t work. +
+For live video, the selection for File Format and Video needs to be set to a format the timeline can use. The file format must be Quicktime for Linux and video recording must be enabled for it. -Click on the wrench
to set the video compression.
-
- The video compression depends on the recording driver. For the +Click on the wrench
+ to set the video compression.
+The video compression depends on the recording driver. For the Video4Linux2 recording driver, the compression must be Motion JPEG A. For the IEC 61883 driver, the compression must be DV. This gets the driver to generate output in a colormodel that the timeline can use. - -
Some cards provide color and channel settings. Live video takes the +
+Some cards provide color and channel settings. Live video takes the color settings from the values set in the Video In window. Go to File->Record to bring up the recording interface and the Video In window. Values set in the Video in window are used by Live Video. Any channels the capture card supports need to be configured in the Video in interface since the same channels are used by the Live Video effect. - -
With the video recording configured, highlight a horizontal region of a +
+With the video recording configured, highlight a horizontal region of a video track or define in and out points. Then drop the Live Video effect into it. Drop other effects after Live Video to process the live video in realtime. For best results, you should use OpenGL and a video card which supports GL shading language. Go to Settings->Preferences->Playback->Video Out to enable the OpenGL driver. +
+Only one Live Video effect can exist at any time on the timeline. It +can’t be shared by more than one track. +
+ -Only one Live Video effect can exist at any time on the timeline. It -can't be shared by more than one track. -
+ + +
+ ++++Next: MOTION, Previous: LIVE VIDEO, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.16 LOOP
Sections of audio or video can be looped by dropping a loop effect @@ -7631,28 +8425,35 @@ on them. Contrary to the the settings->loop playback option, the loop effects can be rendered where the settings->loop playback option can not be. The loop effects are also convenient for short regions. - -
The loop effects have one option: the number of frames or +
+The loop effects have one option: the number of frames or samples to loop. This specifies the length of the region to loop starting from either the beginning of the effect or the latest keyframe. The region is replicated for the entire effect. +
+Every time a keyframe is set in a loop effect, the keyframe becomes the +beginning of the region to loop. Setting several keyframes in +succession causes several regions to loop. Setting a single keyframe +causes the region after the keyframe to be looped throughout the +effect, no matter where the keyframe is. The end of an effect can be +looped from the beginning by setting the keyframe near the end. +
+ + + + + + -Every time a keyframe is set in a loop effect, the keyframe becomes the -beginning of the region to loop. Setting several keyframes in -succession causes several regions to loop. Setting a single keyframe -causes the region after the keyframe to be looped throughout the -effect, no matter where the keyframe is. The end of an effect can be -looped from the beginning by setting the keyframe near the end. -
- -
-Next: MOTION 2 POINT, -Previous: LOOP, -Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS +
+ ++- ++Next: MOTION 2 POINT, Previous: LOOP, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
18.17 MOTION
The motion tracker is almost a complete application in itself. The @@ -7660,50 +8461,50 @@ motion tracker tracks two types of motion: translation and rotation. It can track both simultaneously or one only. It can do 1/4 pixel tracking or single pixel tracking. It can stabilize motion or cause one track to follow the motion of another track. - -
Although the motion tracker is applied as a realtime effect, it usually +
+Although the motion tracker is applied as a realtime effect, it usually must be rendered to see useful results. The effect takes a long time to precisely detect motion. - -
The motion tracker works by using one region of the frame as the region +
+The motion tracker works by using one region of the frame as the region to track. It compares this region between 2 frames to calculate the motion. This region can be defined anywhere on the screen. Once the motion between 2 frames has been calculated, a number of things can be done with that motion vector. It can be scaled by a user value and clamped to a maximum range. It can be thrown away or accumulated with all the motion vectors leading up to the current position. - -
To save time the motion result can be saved for later reuse, recalled +
+To save time the motion result can be saved for later reuse, recalled from a previous calculation, or discarded. - -
The motion tracker has a notion of 2 tracks, the master layer and the +
+The motion tracker has a notion of 2 tracks, the master layer and the target layer. The master layer is where the comparison between 2 frames takes place. The target layer is where motion is applied either to track or compensate for the motion in the master layer. - -
The intricacies of motion tracking are enough to sustain entire +
+The intricacies of motion tracking are enough to sustain entire companies and build careers around. The motion tracker in Cinelerra -isn't as sophisticated as some world class motion trackers but it's +isn’t as sophisticated as some world class motion trackers but it’s enough to sweeten some camcorder footage. - -
Here is a brief description of the motion tracking parameters: - -
-
-
- Track translation: Enables translation operations.
-The motion tracker tracks X and Y motion in the master layer and
+
+
Here is a brief description of the motion tracking parameters: +
+-
+
- Track translation: Enables translation operations. +The motion tracker tracks X and Y motion in the master layer and adjusts X and Y motion in the target layer. -
- +
- Translation block size: For the translation operations, a block is compared to a number of neighboring blocks to find the one with the least difference. The size of the block to search for is given by this parameter. -
- +
- Translation search radius: The size of the area to scan for the translation block. -
- +
- Translation search steps: Ideally the search operation would compare the translation block with every other pixel in the translation search radius. To speed this operation up, a subset of @@ -7711,23 +8512,23 @@ the total positions is searched. Then the search area is narrowed and rescanned by the same number of search steps until the motion is known to 1/4 pixel accuracy. -
- +
- Block X, Y: These coordinates determine the center of the translation block based on percentages of the width and height of the image. The center of the block should be part of the image which is visible at all times. -
- +
- Maximum absolute offset: In track previous frame and previous frame same block modes, the motion detected between every frame is accumulated to form an absolute motion vector for the entire sequence. The amount of motion detected by the motion tracker is unlimited if this -is 100. If it's under 100 the amount of motion is limited to that +is 100. If it’s under 100 the amount of motion is limited to that percentage of the image size. The value must be smaller for larger translation block sizes so there is enough area under the block to sense motion with. -
- +
- Settling speed In track previous frame and previous frame same block modes, the motion detected between every frame is accumulated to form an absolute motion vector for the entire sequence. @@ -7737,23 +8538,23 @@ speed is 100 the absolute vector resets to 0 after every frame. If the settling speed is less than 100 the absolute vector is reduced slightly before the next frame is added. -
- +
- Track rotation: Enables rotation operations. The motion tracker tracks rotation in the master layer and adjusts rotation in the target layer. -
- +
- Rotation block size: For rotation operations a single block is compared to equally sized blocks, each rotated by a different amount. This is the size of the rotation block. -
- +
- Rotation search radius: This is the maximum angle of rotation from the starting frame the rotation scanner can detect. The rotation scan is from this angle counterclockwise to this angle clockwise. Thus the rotation search radius is half the total range scanned. -
- +
-
Rotation search steps: Ideally every possible angle would be tested
to get the rotation. To speed up the rotation search, the rotation
search radius is divided into a finite number of angles and only those
@@ -7761,33 +8562,33 @@ angles compared to the starting frame. Then the search radius is
narrowed and an equal number of angles is compared in the smaller
radius until the highest possible accuracy is achieved.
-
Normally you need one search step for every degree scanned. Since the +
Normally you need one search step for every degree scanned. Since the rotation scanner scans the rotation search radius in two directions, you need two steps for every degree in the search radius to search the complete range. - -
- + +
-
Draw vectors: When translation is enabled, 2 boxes are drawn on the
frame. One box represents the translation block. Another box outside
the translation block represents the extent of the translation search
radius. In the center of these boxes is an arrow showing the
translation between the 2 master frames.
-
When rotation is enabled a single box the size of the rotation block is +
When rotation is enabled a single box the size of the rotation block is drawn rotated by the amount of rotation detected. - -
- + +
- Track single frame: When this option is used the motion between a single starting frame and the frame currently under the insertion point is calculated. The starting frame is specified in the Frame number blank. The motion calculated this way is taken as the absolute motion vector. The absolute motion vector for each frame replaces the absolute motion vector for the previous frame. Settling speed has no -effect on it since it doesn't contain any previous motion vectors. +effect on it since it doesn’t contain any previous motion vectors. Playback can start anywhere on the timeline since there is no dependance on previous results. -
- +
- Track previous frame: Causes only the motion between the previous frame and the current frame to be calculated. This is added to an absolute motion vector to get the new motion from the start of the @@ -7796,7 +8597,7 @@ way, the block position is shifted to always cover the same region of the image. Playback must be started from the start of the motion effect in order to accumulate all the necessary motion vectors. -
- +
- Previous frame same block: This is useful for stabilizing jerky camcorder footage. In this mode the motion between the previous frame and the current frame is calculated. Instead of adjusting the block @@ -7804,52 +8605,64 @@ position to reflect the new location of the image, like Track Previous Frame does, the block position is unchanged between each frame. Thus a new region is compared for each frame. -
- +
- Master layer: This determines the track which supplies the starting -frame and ending frame for the motion calculation. If it's Bottom +frame and ending frame for the motion calculation. If it’s Bottom the bottom track of all the tracks sharing this effect is the master layer. The top track of all the tracks is the target layer. -
- +
- Calculation: This determines whether to calculate the motion at all -and whether to save it to disk. If it's Don't Calculate the motion -calculation is skipped. If it's Recalculate the motion calculation -is performed every time each frame is rendered. If it's Save the +and whether to save it to disk. If it’s Don’t Calculate the motion +calculation is skipped. If it’s Recalculate the motion calculation +is performed every time each frame is rendered. If it’s Save the motion calculation is always performed but a copy is also saved. If -it's Load, the motion calculation is loaded from a previous save +it’s Load, the motion calculation is loaded from a previous save calculation. If there is no previous save calculation on disk, a new motion calculation is performed. -
- +
- Action: Once the motion vector is known this determines whether to move the target layer opposing the motion vector or following the -motion vector. If it's Do Nothing the target layer is untouched. -If it's Track... the target layer is moved by the same amount as +motion vector. If it’s Do Nothing the target layer is untouched. +If it’s Track... the target layer is moved by the same amount as the master layer. This is useful for matching titles to objects in the -frame. If it's Stabilize... the target layer is moved opposite to +frame. If it’s Stabilize... the target layer is moved opposite to the motion vector. This is useful for stabilizing an object in the frame. The motion operations can be accurate to single pixels or subpixels by changing the action setting. -
+ ++++Next: 2 PASS MOTION TRACKING, Up: MOTION [Contents]
+18.17.1 SECRETS OF MOTION TRACKING
Since it is a very slow effect, there is a method to applying the @@ -7857,47 +8670,45 @@ motion tracker to get the most out of it. First disable playback for the track to do motion tracking on. Then drop the effect on a region of video with some motion to track. Then rewind the insertion point to the start of the region. Set Action -> Do Nothing. Set -Calculation -> Don't calculate. Enable Draw vectors. Then +Calculation -> Don’t calculate. Enable Draw vectors. Then enable playback of the track to see the motion tracking areas. - -
Enable which of translation motion or rotation motion vectors +
+Enable which of translation motion or rotation motion vectors you want to track. By watching the compositor window and adjusting the Block x,y settings, center the block on the part of the image you want to track. Then set search radius, block size, and block coordinates for translation and rotation. - -
Once this is configured, set the calculation to Save coords and do +
+Once this is configured, set the calculation to Save coords and do test runs through the sequence to see if the motion tracker works and to save the motion vectors. Once this is done, disable playback for the track, disable Draw vectors, set the motion action to perform on the target layer and change the calculation to Load coords. Finally enable playback for the track. - -
When using a single starting frame to calculate the motion of a +
+When using a single starting frame to calculate the motion of a sequence, the starting frame should be a single frame with the least motion to any of the other frames. This is rarely frame 0. Usually -it's a frame near the middle of the sequence. This way the search +it’s a frame near the middle of the sequence. This way the search radius need only reach halfway to the full extent of the motion in the sequence. - -
If the motion tracker is used on a render farm, Save coords and -previous frame mode won't work. The results of the save coords +
+If the motion tracker is used on a render farm, Save coords and +previous frame mode won’t work. The results of the save coords operation are saved to the hard drives on the render nodes, not the master node. Future rendering operations on these nodes will process different frames and read the wrong coordinates from the node filesystems. The fact that render nodes only visualize a portion of the timeline also prevents previous frame from working since it depends on calculating an absolute motion vector starting on frame 0. - -
+ +
-
-Next: USING BLUR TO IMPROVE MOTION TRACKING, -Previous: SECRETS OF MOTION TRACKING, -Up: MOTION - ++- ++Next: USING BLUR TO IMPROVE MOTION TRACKING, Previous: SECRETS OF MOTION TRACKING, Up: MOTION [Contents]
18.17.2 2 PASS MOTION TRACKING
The method described above is 2 pass motion tracking. One pass is used @@ -7905,295 +8716,327 @@ just to calculate the motion vectors. A second pass is used to apply the motion vectors to the footage. This is faster than a single pass because errors in the motion vector calculation can be discovered quickly. - -
This also allows the motion tracking to use a less demanding colormodel +
+This also allows the motion tracking to use a less demanding colormodel like RGB888 in the scanning step and a more demanding colormodel like RGB Float in the action step. The scanning step takes much longer than action. - -
This suffers the disadvantage of not being practical for extremely long +
+This suffers the disadvantage of not being practical for extremely long sequences where some error is acceptable and the picture quality is lousy to begin with, like stabilizing camcorder footage. - -
The slower method is to calculate the motion vectors and apply them +
+The slower method is to calculate the motion vectors and apply them simultaneously. This method can use one track as the motion vector calculation track and another track as the target track for motion vector actions. This is useful for long sequences where some error is acceptable. +
-+
-
-Next: USING HISTOGRAM TO IMPROVE MOTION TRACKING, -Previous: 2 PASS MOTION TRACKING, -Up: MOTION - ++- ++Next: USING HISTOGRAM TO IMPROVE MOTION TRACKING, Previous: 2 PASS MOTION TRACKING, Up: MOTION [Contents]
18.17.3 USING BLUR TO IMPROVE MOTION TRACKING
With extremely noisy or interlaced footage, applying a blur effect before the motion tracking can improve accuracy. Either save the motion vectors in a tracking pass and disable the blur for the action pass or apply the blur just to the master layer. +
-+
-
-Next: INTERPOLATING MOTION BETWEEN FRAMES, -Previous: USING BLUR TO IMPROVE MOTION TRACKING, -Up: MOTION - ++- ++Next: INTERPOLATING MOTION BETWEEN FRAMES, Previous: USING BLUR TO IMPROVE MOTION TRACKING, Up: MOTION [Contents]
18.17.4 USING HISTOGRAM TO IMPROVE MOTION TRACKING
A histogram is almost always applied before motion tracking to clamp out noise in the darker pixels. Either save the motion vectors in a tracking pass and disable the histogram for the action pass or apply the histogram just to the master layer. +
-- -+
-Next: FILLING IN THE BLACK AREAS, -Previous: USING HISTOGRAM TO IMPROVE MOTION TRACKING, -Up: MOTION -
+ ++++Next: FILLING IN THE BLACK AREAS, Previous: USING HISTOGRAM TO IMPROVE MOTION TRACKING, Up: MOTION [Contents]
+18.17.5 INTERPOLATING MOTION BETWEEN FRAMES
The motion tracker can simulate higher frame rates than the media frame rate by interpolating the motion. Interpolation is enabled with the maximum absolute offset and settling speed options. - -
First, go to Settings->Format in the main window and set the +
+First, go to Settings->Format in the main window and set the video frame rate to a number higher than the media frame rate. - -
In the Motion window, select a tracking option which accumulates +
+In the Motion window, select a tracking option which accumulates motion. This is either Track previous frame or Previous frame same block. These cause the maximum absolute offset and settling speed options to take effect. - -
maximum absolute offset must be set to the maximum motion to be +
+maximum absolute offset must be set to the maximum motion to be accumulated as a percentage of the video size. A value of 50 limits the motion to 50% of the video size. 50 works well. The value must be smaller for larger translation block sizes so there is enough area under the block to sense motion with. - -
settling speed must be set to the rate at which the accumulated +
+settling speed must be set to the rate at which the accumulated motion resets to 0 over time. The reset happens whether or not any motion was detected, so when the project frame rate is higher than the media frame rate, the frames between media frames regress towards the center. For interpolated motion, the settling speed value should be small, so the movement is smooth. 3 works well. +
+ + + - + + +
+ ++++Previous: INTERPOLATING MOTION BETWEEN FRAMES, Up: MOTION [Contents]
+18.17.6 FILLING IN THE BLACK AREAS
Stabilization always creates black borders in the track resolution. One solution is to shrink the project resolution so the borders are always cropped off the output. Another solution is to apply a Time Average effect after stabilization. +
+Configure Time Average the following way: +
+-
+
- Frame count: 1 +
- Accumulate sequence again: No +
- Replace: Yes +
- Threshold: 1 +
- Border: 4 +
This makes new frames replace only the pixels in the previous frames +where there is new data. The black areas in new frames don’t replace +previous data so the previous data shows through and fills them in. +
+ + + + -Configure Time Average the following way: -
-
-
- Frame count: 1 -
- Accumulate sequence again: No -
- Replace: Yes -
- Threshold: 1 -
- Border: 4 -
This makes new frames replace only the pixels in the previous frames -where there is new data. The black areas in new frames don't replace -previous data so the previous data shows through and fills them in. -
+ +
+ ++++Next: REFRAMERT, Previous: MOTION, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.18 MOTION 2 POINT
+The 2 point motion tracker is the same as using 2 of the translation -motion trackers to track 2 points. It doesn't have a rotation tracker. +motion trackers to track 2 points. It doesn’t have a rotation tracker. Instead, it uses the angle between the 2 translation points to determine rotation. The 2 points can be enabled separately. - -
If 1 point is enabled, only translation is tracked. - -
If 2 points are enabled, translation is tracked by point 1 and rotation +
+If 1 point is enabled, only translation is tracked. +
+If 2 points are enabled, translation is tracked by point 1 and rotation is tracked by point 2. Stabilization is performed with point 1 as the center. - -
The other parameters for the 2 point tracker are the same as the single +
+The other parameters for the 2 point tracker are the same as the single point tracker. In addition, the 2 point tracker supports TRANSLATION SEARCH OFFSET. - -
TRANSLATION SEARCH OFFSET forces the motion search to look in a +
+TRANSLATION SEARCH OFFSET forces the motion search to look in a region other than directly next to the translation block position. The translation search offset is added to the new search result, giving contiguous motion results throughout any changes in translation search area. - -
This is useful if the camera position changed in the middle of a +
+This is useful if the camera position changed in the middle of a sequence of images but the subject stayed the same. Offset the translation search area when the camera position changes and the detected motion stays contiguous through the entire sequence. - -
2 point tracking works best if the points don't change shape between +
+2 point tracking works best if the points don’t change shape between frames. It is more prone to rotation errors than single point motion tracking if the points change shape. 2 point tracking is mainly used for tracking stars. +
+Use the smallest search blocks possible since larger blocks are harder +to compare when they’re rotated. +
-Use the smallest search blocks possible since larger blocks are harder -to compare when they're rotated. -
+
+ ++++Next: REFRAME, Previous: MOTION 2 POINT, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.19 REFRAMERT
+ReframeRT changes number of frames in a sequence of video directly from the timeline. It has 2 modes, selected by the 2 toggles in the GUI. - -
Stretch mode multiplies the current frame number of its output by +
+Stretch mode multiplies the current frame number of its output by the scale factor to arrive at the frame to read from its input. If its current output frame is #55 and the scale factor is 2, frame #110 is read from its input. The stretch mode has the effect of changing the length of output video by the inverse of the scale factor. If the scale factor is greater than 1, the output will end before the end of -the sequence on the timeline. If it's less than 1, the output will end +the sequence on the timeline. If it’s less than 1, the output will end after the end of the sequence on the timeline. The ReframeRT effect must be lengthened to the necessary length to accomodate the scale factor. Change the length of the effect by clicking on the endpoint of the effect and dragging. - -
Although stretch mode changes the number of the frame read from its -input, it doesn't change the frame rate of the input. Effects before +
+Although stretch mode changes the number of the frame read from its +input, it doesn’t change the frame rate of the input. Effects before ReframeRT assume the same frame rate as ReframeRT. - -
Downsample mode doesn't change the length of the output sequence. +
+Downsample mode doesn’t change the length of the output sequence. It multiplies the frame rate of the output by the scale factor to arrive at a frame rate rate to read the input. This has the effect of replicating the input frames so that they only change at the scaled -frame rate when sent to the output. It doesn't change the length of +frame rate when sent to the output. It doesn’t change the length of the sequence. If the scale factor is 0.5 and the output frame rate is 30 fps, only 15 frames will be shown per second and the input will be read at 15 fps. Downsample is only useful for scalefactors below 1, hence the name downsample. - -
Downsample mode changes the frame rate of the input as well as the +
+Downsample mode changes the frame rate of the input as well as the number of the frame to read, so effects before ReframeRT see the frame rate * the scale factor as their frame rate. If the scale factor is 2 and the output frame rate is 30, the input frame rate will be 60 and -the input frame number will by doubled. This won't normally do +the input frame number will by doubled. This won’t normally do anything but some input effects may behave differently at the higher frame rate. +
- +
+ ++++Next: RESAMPLE, Previous: REFRAMERT, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.20 REFRAME
This does exactly the same thing as ReframeRT in Stretch mode. It multiplies the output frame number by the scale factor to arrive at the input frame number and changes the length of the sequence. Unlike ReframeRT, this must run from the Video menu and render its output. - -
Be aware Reframe doesn't write the scaled frame rate as the frame +
+Be aware Reframe doesn’t write the scaled frame rate as the frame rate of the rendered file. It produces a file of scaled length and equal frame rate as the project. The new length is 1/scale factor as big as the original sequence. +
+ + - + + +
+ ++++Next: REVERSE VIDEO/AUDIO, Previous: REFRAME, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.21 RESAMPLE
This multiplies the number of each output sample by a scale factor to -arrive at the number of the input sample. The output file's sample +arrive at the number of the input sample. The output file’s sample rate is set to the project sample rate but its length is changed to reflect the scaled number of samples. It also filters the resampled audio to remove aliasing. - -
If the scale factor is 2, every 2 input samples will be reduced to 1 +
+If the scale factor is 2, every 2 input samples will be reduced to 1 output sample and the output file will have half as many samples as the -input sequence. If it's 0.5, every 0.5 input samples will be stretched +input sequence. If it’s 0.5, every 0.5 input samples will be stretched to 1 output sample and the output file will have twice as many samples as the input sequence. +
+ + + + + - + +
+ ++++Next: SWAP FRAMES, Previous: RESAMPLE, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.22 REVERSE VIDEO/AUDIO
-Media can be reversed on the timeline in realtime. This isn't to be +
Media can be reversed on the timeline in realtime. This isn’t to be confused with using the reverse playback on the transport. The reverse effects reverse the region covered by the effect regardless of the transport direction. Apply reverse audio to an audio track and play it backwards. The sound plays forward. - -
The region to be reversed is first determined by what part of the track +
+The region to be reversed is first determined by what part of the track the effect is under and second by the locations of keyframes in the effect. The reverse effects have an enabled option which allows you to set keyframes. This allows may possibilities. - -
Every enabled keyframe is treated as the start of a new reversed +
+Every enabled keyframe is treated as the start of a new reversed region and the end of a previous reversed region. Several enabled keyframes in succession yield several regions reversed independant of each other. An enabled keyframe followed by a disabled keyframe yields one reversed region followed by a forward region. +
+Finally, be aware when reversing audio that the waveform on the +timeline doesn’t reflect the actual reversed output. +
-Finally, be aware when reversing audio that the waveform on the -timeline doesn't reflect the actual reversed output. -
- -
-Next: THRESHOLD, -Previous: REVERSE VIDEO/AUDIO, -Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS +
+ ++- ++Next: THRESHOLD, Previous: REVERSE VIDEO/AUDIO, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
18.23 SWAP FRAMES
This is normally used on interlaced video which has been converted to @@ -8201,16 +9044,25 @@ fields. One set of lines becomes one frame and the other set of lines becomes the next frame. Now the frame rate is double and is showing fields of the original video sequentially. The fields may be out of order, which is what SWAP FRAMES can correct. +
+ + + + + + - + + +
+ ++++Next: TIME AVERAGE, Previous: SWAP FRAMES, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.24 THRESHOLD
Threshold converts the image to pure luminance. Then luminance values @@ -8220,348 +9072,385 @@ The threshold window shows a histogram of luminance values for the current frame. Click dragging inside the histogram creates a range to convert to white. Shift-clicking extends one border of this range. Values for the threshold range can also be specified in the text boxes. - -
This effect is basically a primitive luminance key. A second track +
+This effect is basically a primitive luminance key. A second track above the track with the threshold effect can be multiplied, resulting in only the parts of the second track within the threshold being displayed. +
+ - + + +
+ ++++Next: TITLER, Previous: THRESHOLD, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.25 TIME AVERAGE
Time average is one effect which has many uses besides creating nifty -trail patterns of moving objects. It's main use is reducing noise in +trail patterns of moving objects. It’s main use is reducing noise in still images. Merely point a video camera at a stationary subject for 30 frames, capture the frames, and average them using TIME AVERAGE and -you'll have a super high quality print. In floating point colormodels, time +you’ll have a super high quality print. In floating point colormodels, time average can increase the dynamic range of lousy cameras. - -
Inside the time average effect is an accumulation buffer and a +
+Inside the time average effect is an accumulation buffer and a divisor. A number of frames are accumulated in the accumulation buffer and divided by the divisor to get the average. - -
Because the time average can consume enourmous amounts of memory, it is +
+Because the time average can consume enourmous amounts of memory, it is best applied by first disabling playback for the track, dropping the time average in it, configuring time average for the desired number of frames, and re-enabling playback for the track. - -
Frames count: This determines the number of frames to be accumulated -in the accumulation buffer. For extremely large integrations it's +
+Frames count: This determines the number of frames to be accumulated +in the accumulation buffer. For extremely large integrations it’s easier to edit the EDL in a text editor and put in the number of frames. - -
Accumulate sequence again: If an effect before the time average is -adjusted the time average normally doesn't reread the accumulation +
+Accumulate sequence again: If an effect before the time average is +adjusted the time average normally doesn’t reread the accumulation buffer to get the change. This forces it to reread the accumulation buffer when any other effects change. +
-Average: This causes the accumulation buffer to be divided before +
Average: This causes the accumulation buffer to be divided before being output. The result is the average of all the frames. - -
Accumulate: This outputs the accumulation buffer without dividing +
+Accumulate: This outputs the accumulation buffer without dividing it. The result is the sum of all the frames. - -
Accumulate only: - -
In order to accumulate only the specified number of frames, the time +
+Accumulate only: +
+In order to accumulate only the specified number of frames, the time average retains all the previous frames in memory and subtracts them out as it plays forward. Accumulate only: causes the history buffer to not be used in averaging and accumulating. Without the history -buffer, frames are added endlessly without ever being subtracted. It's +buffer, frames are added endlessly without ever being subtracted. It’s the same as an infinitely long accumulation buffer. The only difference is for Average mode, the output is still divided by the Frame count. Accumulate only is used where the number of frames in the accumulation would be too big to fit in memory. - -
Replace: This causes the accumulation buffer to be replaced by only -pixels which aren't transparent. This allows black borders from motion +
+Replace: This causes the accumulation buffer to be replaced by only +pixels which aren’t transparent. This allows black borders from motion tracking to be filled in. - -
Threshold: The value a pixel must be before it replaces the previous +
+Threshold: The value a pixel must be before it replaces the previous pixel. If alpha channels are enabled, the alpha is the value compared. If there is no alpha channel, the brightness is the value compared. - -
Border: The number of pixels on the border of the image to never +
+Border: The number of pixels on the border of the image to never replace. This hides errors in the replacement operation from the output, since errors occur at the transition between the replaced area and the ignored area. - -
Greater: Pixels are replaced if their value is greater than the +
+Greater: Pixels are replaced if their value is greater than the previous pixel. Use this to create star trails in stacks of many night sky photos or paint many copies of an object from its motion if it is lighter than the background. - -
Less: Pixels are replaced if their value is less than the previous +
+Less: Pixels are replaced if their value is less than the previous pixel. Use this to paint copies of an object from its motion if it is darker than the background. +
+ + - + +
+ ++++Next: VIDEO SCOPE, Previous: TIME AVERAGE, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.26 TITLER
While it is possible to add text to movies by importing still images from The Gimp and compositing them, the Titler allows you to add text -from within Cinelerra. - -
The titler has standard options for font, size, and style. The +from within Cinelerra. +
+The titler has standard options for font, size, and style. The best font is a generic, normal font like Arial in a large size. - -
The titler also has options you'll only find in moving pictures. The +
+The titler also has options you’ll only find in moving pictures. The Justify operation justifies the text relative to the entire frame. Once justified, the X and Y offset is applied. This allows text to be justified while at the same time letting you push it within the title safe region. - -
The motion type scrolls the text in any of the four directions. +
+The motion type scrolls the text in any of the four directions. When using this, the text may dissappear. Move the insertion point along the timeline until the text is far enough along the animation to reappear. The text scrolls on and scrolls off. - -
Setting loop causes the text to scroll completely off and repeat. +
+Setting loop causes the text to scroll completely off and repeat. Without loop the text scrolls off and never reappears. - -
The speed of the animation is determined by speed Set it higher to +
+The speed of the animation is determined by speed Set it higher to speed up the animation. - -
Drop shadow draws a black copy of the text to the bottom right of +
+Drop shadow draws a black copy of the text to the bottom right of the original text. Useful when drawing text over changing video to keep the border always visible. - -
In addition to the scrolling, Fade in/Fade out are a second type of +
+In addition to the scrolling, Fade in/Fade out are a second type of animation. If the fade seconds are 0, no fading is done. - -
Outline draws an outline on the characters if it's greater than 0. +
+Outline draws an outline on the characters if it’s greater than 0. Set the outline size by changing the number. Set the outline color with the OUTLINE COLOR button. If no outline is visible, make sure the alpha in OUTLINE COLOR is nonzero. To get pure outline characters, set COLOR alpha to 0. - -
COLOR picks the color to draw the text in. Usually white is the +
+COLOR picks the color to draw the text in. Usually white is the only practical color. - -
OUTLINE COLOR picks the color to draw the text outline in. - -
Stamp timecode replaces the text with the current position on the +
+OUTLINE COLOR picks the color to draw the text outline in. +
+Stamp timecode replaces the text with the current position on the timeline in seconds and frames. - -
SECRETS OF THE TITLER - -
- -+ +SECRETS OF THE TITLER +
+
+ +• ADDING FONTS TO THE TITLER: How to add fonts to the titler + • THE TITLE-SAFE REGION: How to keep text visible on output + • MAKING TITLES LOOK GOOD: How to make your titles look good. +
-
-Next: THE TITLE-SAFE REGION, -Up: TITLER - ++- ++Next: THE TITLE-SAFE REGION, Up: TITLER [Contents]
18.26.1 ADDING FONTS TO THE TITLER
-The X Window system originally didn't have a suitable font renderer for -video. It also is restricted to the current bit depth. It doesn't +
The X Window system originally didn’t have a suitable font renderer for +video. It also is restricted to the current bit depth. It doesn’t have a convenient way to know which fonts work with the suitable font -renderer in the desired bit depth. The easiest way we've found to +renderer in the desired bit depth. The easiest way we’ve found to support fonts in the titler is to have a directory for them at /usr/lib/cinelerra/fonts. - -
The titler supports mainly TTF, true type fonts. It supports +
+The titler supports mainly TTF, true type fonts. It supports others but TTF are the most reliable. To add true type fonts, copy the .TTF files to the /usr/lib/cinelerra/fonts directory. In that directory run ttmkfdir && mv fonts.scale fonts.dir and restart Cinelerra. The new fonts should appear. The usage of ttmkfdir changes frequently so this technique might not work. +
-- +
-
-Next: MAKING TITLES LOOK GOOD, -Previous: ADDING FONTS TO THE TITLER, -Up: TITLER - ++- ++Next: MAKING TITLES LOOK GOOD, Previous: ADDING FONTS TO THE TITLER, Up: TITLER [Contents]
18.26.2 THE TITLE-SAFE REGION
If the video is displayed on a consumer TV, the outer border is going to be cropped by 5% on each side. Moreover, text which is too close to the edge looks sloppy. Make sure when adding titles to have the -title-safe
- tool active in the compositor window.
-The text shouldn't cross the inner rectangle.
+title-safe tool active in the compositor window.
+The text shouldn’t cross the inner rectangle.
++
-
-Previous: THE TITLE-SAFE REGION, -Up: TITLER - ++- ++Previous: THE TITLE-SAFE REGION, Up: TITLER [Contents]
18.26.3 MAKING TITLES LOOK GOOD
No-one else is going to tell you this, but to make good looking titles, ignore most of the features of the titler. The best settings are: +
+-
+
- Font: Arial +
- Italic: off +
- Motion: No motion +
- Bold: on or off +
- Fade in: 0 +
- Fade out: 0 +
- Color: white +
- Outline color: black +
- Drop Shadow or outline: use either to improve contrast but not both +
-
-
- Font: Arial -
- Italic: off -
- Motion: No motion -
- Bold: on or off -
- Fade in: 0 -
- Fade out: 0 -
- Color: white -
- Outline color: black -
- Drop Shadow or outline: use either to improve contrast but not both -
Don't waste the audience's time with fading & crawls. Use crawls only -if there's too much text to fit on the screen. The title should be -legible enough to take the least amount of time to read. You're +
Don’t waste the audience’s time with fading & crawls. Use crawls only +if there’s too much text to fit on the screen. The title should be +legible enough to take the least amount of time to read. You’re supposed to show the story, not write it. If they wanted to read a story, they would be reading a book instead of watching video. +
+ + + + + + - + + + + +
+ ++++Previous: TITLER, Up: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS [Contents]
+18.27 VIDEO SCOPE
The video scope plots two views of the image. One view plots the intensity of each pixel against horizontal position. They call this the WAVEFORM. Another view translates hue to angle and saturation to radius for each pixel. They call this the VECTORSCOPE. - -
The vectorscope is actually very useful for determining if an image is -saturated. When adjusting saturation, it's important to watch the -vectorscope to make sure pixels don't extend past the 100 radius. - -
The waveform allows you to make sure image data extends from complete +
+The vectorscope is actually very useful for determining if an image is +saturated. When adjusting saturation, it’s important to watch the +vectorscope to make sure pixels don’t extend past the 100 radius. +
+The waveform allows you to make sure image data extends from complete black to complete white while adjusting the brightness/contrast. - -
Some thought is being given to having a video scope for recording. +
+Some thought is being given to having a video scope for recording. Unfortunately, this would require a lot of variations of the video scope for all the different video drivers. +
+ - +
+ ++++Next: KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS, Previous: SECRETS OF CINELERRA EFFECTS, Up: TOP [Contents]
+19 PLUGIN AUTHORING
The plugin API in Cinelerra dates back to 1997, before the LADSPA and -before VST became popular. It's fundamentally the same as it was in +before VST became popular. It’s fundamentally the same as it was in 1997, with minor modifications to handle keyframes and GUI feedback. The GUI is not abstracted from the programmer. This allows the programmer to use whatever toolkit they want and allows more flexibility in appearance but it costs more. - -
There are several types of plugins, each with a common method of +
+There are several types of plugins, each with a common method of implementation and specific changes for that particular type. The easiest way to implement a plugin is to take the simplest existing one -out of the group and rename the symbols. - -
- -+out of the group and rename the symbols. + + + ++
+ + + + +• INTRODUCING THE PULL METHOD: The current paradigm for plugin writing + • COMMON PLUGIN FUNCTIONS: What all effects have to do. + • REALTIME PLUGINS: What realtime effects have to do. + • NONREALTIME PLUGINS: What rendered effects have to do. + • AUDIO PLUGINS: What audio effects have to do. + • VIDEO PLUGINS: What video effects have to do. + • TRANSITION PLUGINS: What transitions have to do. + • PLUGIN GUI'S WHICH UPDATE DURING PLAYBACK: How to use currently playing data to draw the GUI. + • USING OPENGL: How to use hardware to speed up operations. + • PLUGIN QUERIES: How plugins get information about the data to be processed. +
-
-Next: COMMON PLUGIN FUNCTIONS, -Up: PLUGIN AUTHORING - ++- ++Next: COMMON PLUGIN FUNCTIONS, Up: PLUGIN AUTHORING [Contents]
19.1 INTRODUCING THE PULL METHOD
Originally plugins were designed with the push method. The push method is intuitive and simple. A source pushes data to a plugin, the plugin does math operations on it, and the plugin pushes it to a destination. For 6 years this was the way all realtime plugins were driven -internally but it didn't allow you to reduce the rate of playback in -realtime. While plugins can still be designed as if they're pushing -data, this is not the way they're processed internally anymore. - -
The latest evolution in Cinelerra's plugin design is the pull method. +internally but it didn’t allow you to reduce the rate of playback in +realtime. While plugins can still be designed as if they’re pushing +data, this is not the way they’re processed internally anymore. +
+The latest evolution in Cinelerra’s plugin design is the pull method. The rendering pipeline starts at the final output and the final steps in the rendering pipeline are reading the data from disk. Every step in the rendering chain involves requesting data from the previous step. When the rendering pipleline eventually requests data from a plugin chain, each plugin requests data from the plugin before it. - -
This is less intuitive than the push method but is much more powerful. +
+This is less intuitive than the push method but is much more powerful. Realtime plugins written using the pull method can change the rate data is presented to the viewer and the direction of playback. The pull method allows plugins to take in data at a higher rate than they send it out. - -
To get the power of rate independance, the pull method requires plugins +
+To get the power of rate independance, the pull method requires plugins to know more about the data than they needed to under the push method. Plugins need to know what rate the project is at, what rate their output is supposed to be at and what rate their input is supposed to be at. These different data rates have to be correlated for a plugin to configure itself properly. - -
Keyframes for a plugin are stored relative to the project frame rate. +
+Keyframes for a plugin are stored relative to the project frame rate. Queries from a plugin for for the current playback position are given -relative to the project frame rate. If the plugin's output was +relative to the project frame rate. If the plugin’s output was requested to be at twice the project frame rate, the positions need to be converted to the project rate for keyframes to match up. Two classes of data rates were created to handle this problem. - -
Rate conversions are done in terms of the project rate and the +
+Rate conversions are done in terms of the project rate and the requested rate. The project rate is identical for all plugins. It is determined by the settings->format window. The requested rate is determined by the downstream plugin requesting data from the current plugin. The requested rate is arbitrary. Exactly how to use these rates is described below. +
-- -
-Next: REALTIME PLUGINS, -Previous: INTRODUCING THE PULL METHOD, -Up: PLUGIN AUTHORING +
+ ++- ++Next: REALTIME PLUGINS, Previous: INTRODUCING THE PULL METHOD, Up: PLUGIN AUTHORING [Contents]
19.2 COMMON PLUGIN FUNCTIONS
All plugins inherit from a derivative of PluginClient. This @@ -8569,806 +9458,926 @@ PluginClient derivative implements most of the required methods in PluginClient, but users must still define methods for PluginClient. The most commonly used methods are predefined in macros to reduce the typing yet still allow flexibility. - -
The files they include depend on the plugin type. Audio plugins +
+The files they include depend on the plugin type. Audio plugins include pluginaclient.h and video plugins include pluginvclient.h. They inherit PluginAClient and PluginVClient respectively. - -
Cinelerra instantiates all plugins at least twice when they are used in +
+Cinelerra instantiates all plugins at least twice when they are used in a movie. Once instance is the GUI. The other instance is the signal processor. User input, through a complicated sequence, is propogated from the GUI instance to the signal processor instance. If the signal processor wants to alter the GUI, it propogates data back to the GUI instance. There are utility functions for doing all this. - -
All plugins define at least three objects: - -
-
-
-
+
+
All plugins define at least three objects: +
+-
+
- Processing object - Contains pointers to all the other objects and performs the signal processing. This object contains a number of queries to identify itself and is the object you register to register the plugin. -
- + +
-
User interface object - This is a subclass of
PluginClientWindow. It shows data on the screen and collects
parameters from the user.
-
The window has pointers to a number of widgets, a few initialization -methods, and a back pointer to the plugin's processing object. The GUI -uses Cinelerra's toolkit. The plugin abstraction layer handles creating +
The window has pointers to a number of widgets, a few initialization +methods, and a back pointer to the plugin’s processing object. The GUI +uses Cinelerra’s toolkit. The plugin abstraction layer handles creating a thread for the GUI. +
+ - - +
- Configuration object - This stores the user parameters and always needs interpolation, copying, and comparison functions. Macros for the plugin client automatically call configuration methods to interpolate keyframes. -
+
- +• THE PROCESSING OBJECT: + • THE CONFIGURATION OBJECT: + • THE USER INTERFACE OBJECT: +
+ ++++Next: THE CONFIGURATION OBJECT, Up: COMMON PLUGIN FUNCTIONS [Contents]
+19.2.1 THE PROCESSING OBJECT
-Load up a simple plugin like gain to see what this object looks like. +
Load up a simple plugin like gain to see what this object looks like. The processing object should inherit from the intended PluginClient derivative. Its constructor should take a PluginServer argument. +
++-MyPlugin(PluginServer *server); +
MyPlugin(PluginServer *server); -
-In the implementation, the plugin must contain a registration line with +
In the implementation, the plugin must contain a registration line with the name of the processing object like +
++-REGISTER_PLUGIN(MyPlugin) +
REGISTER_PLUGIN(MyPlugin) -
-Another function which is useful but not mandatory is -
int is_multichannel(); -
-It should return 1 if one instance of the plugin handles multiple + + +
Another function which is useful but not mandatory is +
+++ +int is_multichannel(); +
It should return 1 if one instance of the plugin handles multiple tracks simultaneously or 0 if one instance of the plugin only handles one track. The default is 0 if it is omitted. - -
Multichannel plugins in their processing function should refer to a +
+Multichannel plugins in their processing function should refer to a function called PluginClient::get_total_buffers() to determine the number of channels. +
-To simplify the implementation of realtime plugins, a macro for + + +
To simplify the implementation of realtime plugins, a macro for commonly used members has been created for the class header, taking the configuration object and user interface thread object as arguments. The macro definitions apply mainly to realtime plugins and are not useful in nonrealtime plugins. Fortunately, nonrealtime plugins are simpler. +
++-PLUGIN_CLASS_MEMBERS(config_name, thread_name) +
PLUGIN_CLASS_MEMBERS(config_name, thread_name) -
-The commonly used members in PLUGIN_CLASS_MEMBERS are described below. - -
-
-
- int load_configuration();
+
The commonly used members in PLUGIN_CLASS_MEMBERS are described below. +
+-
+
- int load_configuration();
-
Loads the configuration based on surrounding keyframes and current -position. The class definition for load_configuration should contain +
Loads the configuration based on surrounding keyframes and current +position. The class definition for load_configuration should contain +
++-LOAD_CONFIGURATION_MACRO(plugin_class, config_class) +
LOAD_CONFIGURATION_MACRO(plugin_class, config_class) -
-to implement the default behavior for load_configuration. This stores -whatever the current configuration is inside the plugin's configuration +
to implement the default behavior for load_configuration. This stores +whatever the current configuration is inside the plugin’s configuration object and returns 1 if the new configuration differs from the previous configuration. The return value of load_configuration is used by another commonly used function, update_gui to determine if the GUI really needs to be updated. - -
The plugin's configuration object is always called config inside +
+The plugin’s configuration object is always called config inside PLUGIN_CLASS_MEMBERS. +
+ - VFrame* new_picon(); -
- VFrame* new_picon();
-
-
Creates a picon for display in the resource window. Use +
Creates a picon for display in the resource window. Use +
++-#include "picon_png.h" +NEW_PICON_MACRO(plugin_class) +
#include "picon_png.h" - NEW_PICON_MACRO(plugin_class) -
-to implement new_picon. In addition, the user should create a +
to implement new_picon. In addition, the user should create a picon_png.h header file from a PNG image using pngtoh. pngtoh is compiled in the guicast/ARCH directory. - -
The source PNG image should be called picon.png and can be any format +
+The source PNG image should be called picon.png and can be any format supported by PNG. +
+ - char* plugin_title(); -
- char* plugin_title();
-
-
Returns a text string identifying the plugin in the resource window. +
Returns a text string identifying the plugin in the resource window. The string has to be unique. +
- - void update_gui(); +
- void update_gui();
-
Should first load the configuration, test for a return of 1, and then +
Should first load the configuration, test for a return of 1, and then redraw the GUI with the new parameters. All the plugins using GuiCast have a format like +
+++ +void MyPlugin::update_gui() +{ + if(thread) + { + if(load_configuration()) + { + thread->window->lock_window(); +// update widgets here + thread->window->unlock_window(); + } + } +} +to handle concurrency and conditions of no GUI. +
+ + + +
void MyPlugin::update_gui() - { - if(thread) - { - if(load_configuration()) - { - thread->window->lock_window(); - // update widgets here - thread->window->unlock_window(); - } - } - } --to handle concurrency and conditions of no GUI. - -
- int load_configuration();
-
Important functions the processing object must define are the + +
Important functions the processing object must define are the functions which load and save configuration data from keyframes. These functions are called by the macros so all you need to worry about is accessing the keyframe data. +
++-void save_data(KeyFrame *keyframe); +void read_data(KeyFrame *keyframe); +
void save_data(KeyFrame *keyframe); - void read_data(KeyFrame *keyframe); -
-The read data functions are only used in realtime plugins. The read +
The read data functions are only used in realtime plugins. The read data functions translate the plugin configuration between the KeyFrame argument and the configuration object for the plugin. The keyframes are stored on the timeline and can change for every project. - -
Use an object called FileXML to do the translation and some +
+Use an object called FileXML to do the translation and some specific commands to get the data out of the KeyFrame argument. See any existing plugin to see the usage of KeyFrame and FileXML. +
-int load_defaults(); - int save_defaults(); -
-The load defaults functions are used in realtime and non-realtime +
++ +int load_defaults(); +int save_defaults(); +
The load defaults functions are used in realtime and non-realtime plugins. The load defaults functions translate the plugin -configuration between a BC_Hash object and the plugin's +configuration between a BC_Hash object and the plugin’s configuration. The BC_Hash object stores configurations in a discrete -file on disk for each plugin but doesn't isolate different +file on disk for each plugin but doesn’t isolate different configurations for different projects. - -
The function overriding load_defaults also needs to call defaults +
+The function overriding load_defaults also needs to call defaults = new BC_Hash(path); with the configuration path. See any existing plugin to see the usage of BC_Hash. The function overriding save_defaults does not create defaults. - -
Other standard members may be defined in the processing object, +
+Other standard members may be defined in the processing object, depending on the plugin type. +
-- -
-Next: THE USER INTERFACE OBJECT, -Previous: THE PROCESSING OBJECT, -Up: COMMON PLUGIN FUNCTIONS + +
+ ++- ++Next: THE USER INTERFACE OBJECT, Previous: THE PROCESSING OBJECT, Up: COMMON PLUGIN FUNCTIONS [Contents]
19.2.2 THE CONFIGURATION OBJECT
The configuration object is critical for GUI updates, signal processing, and default settings in realtime plugins. Be aware it is not used in nonrealtime plugins. The configuration object inherits -from nothing and has no dependancies. It's merely a class containing -three functions and variables specific to the plugin's parameters. - -
Usually the configuration object starts with the name of the plugin +from nothing and has no dependancies. It’s merely a class containing +three functions and variables specific to the plugin’s parameters. +
+Usually the configuration object starts with the name of the plugin followed by Config. +
++-class MyPluginConfig +{ +public: + MyPluginConfig(); +class MyPluginConfig - { - public: - MyPluginConfig(); --Following the name of the configuration class, we put in three + +
Following the name of the configuration class, we put in three required functions and the configuration variables. +
+++ -int equivalent(MyPluginConfig &that); + void copy_from(MyPluginConfig &that); + void interpolate(MyPluginConfig &prev, + MyPluginConfig &next, + int64_t prev_position, + int64_t next_position, + int64_t current_position); + + + + float parameter1; + float parameter2; + int parameter3; +}; + +
int equivalent(MyPluginConfig &that); - void copy_from(MyPluginConfig &that); - void interpolate(MyPluginConfig &prev, - MyPluginConfig &next, - int64_t prev_position, - int64_t next_position, - int64_t current_position); - - - - float parameter1; - float parameter2; - int parameter3; - }; - -
-Now you must define the three functions. Equivalent is called by +
Now you must define the three functions. Equivalent is called by LOAD_CONFIGURATION_MACRO to determine if the local configuration parameters are identical to the configuration parameters in the -arguement. If equivalent returns 0, the LOAD_CONFIGURATION_MACRO +arguement. If equivalent returns 0, the LOAD_CONFIGURATION_MACRO causes the GUI to redraw. If equivalent returns 1, the -LOAD_CONFIGURATION_MACRO doesn't redraw the GUI. - -
Then there's copy_from which transfers the configuration values +LOAD_CONFIGURATION_MACRO doesn’t redraw the GUI. +
+Then there’s copy_from which transfers the configuration values from the argument to the local variables. This is once again used in -LOAD_CONFIGURATION_MACRO to store configurations in temporaries. Once +LOAD_CONFIGURATION_MACRO to store configurations in temporaries. Once LOAD_CONFIGURATION_MACRO has replicated the configuration, it loads a second configuration. Then it interpolates the two configurations to get the current configuration. The interpolation function performs the interpolation and stores the result in the local variables. - -
Normally the interpolate function calculates a previous and next +
+Normally the interpolate function calculates a previous and next fraction, using the arguments. - -
void MyPluginConfig::interpolate(MyPluginConfig &prev, - MyPluginConfig &next, - int64_t prev_position, - int64_t next_position, - int64_t current_position) - { - double next_scale = (double)(current_position - prev_position) / (next_position - prev_position); - double prev_scale = (double)(next_position - current_position) / (next_position - prev_position); --Then the fractions are applied to the previous and next configuration +
+++ +void MyPluginConfig::interpolate(MyPluginConfig &prev, + MyPluginConfig &next, + int64_t prev_position, + int64_t next_position, + int64_t current_position) +{ + double next_scale = (double)(current_position - prev_position) / (next_position - prev_position); + double prev_scale = (double)(next_position - current_position) / (next_position - prev_position); +Then the fractions are applied to the previous and next configuration variables to yield the current values. +
++-+ this->parameter1 = (float)(prev.parameter1 * prev_scale + next.parameter1 * next_scale); + this->parameter2 = (float)(prev.parameter2 * prev_scale + next.parameter2 * next_scale); + this->parameter3 = (int)(prev.parameter3 * prev_scale + next.parameter3 * next_scale); +} -
- this->parameter1 = (float)(prev.parameter1 * prev_scale + next.parameter1 * next_scale); - this->parameter2 = (float)(prev.parameter2 * prev_scale + next.parameter2 * next_scale); - this->parameter3 = (int)(prev.parameter3 * prev_scale + next.parameter3 * next_scale); - } - -
-Alternatively you can copy the values from the previous configuration -argument if no interpolation is desired. +
This usage of the configuration object is the same in audio and video +
Alternatively you can copy the values from the previous configuration +argument if no interpolation is desired. +
+This usage of the configuration object is the same in audio and video plugins. In video playback, the interpolation function is called for every frame, yielding smooth interpolation. In audio playback, the interpolation function is called only once for every console fragment and once every time the insertion point moves. This is good enough for updating the GUI while selecting regions on the timeline but it may not be accurate enough for really smooth rendering of the effect. - -
For really smooth rendering of audio, you can still use +
+For really smooth rendering of audio, you can still use load_configuration when updating the GUI. For process_buffer; however, ignore load_configuration and write your own interpolation routine which loads all the keyframes in a console fragment and interpolates every sample. This would be really slow and hard to debug, yielding improvement which may not be audible. Then of course, every country has its own wierdos. - -
An easier way to get smoother interpolation is to reduce the console +
+An easier way to get smoother interpolation is to reduce the console fragment to 1 sample. This would have to be rendered and played back with the console fragment back over 2048 of course. The Linux sound -drivers can't play fragments of 1 sample. +drivers can’t play fragments of 1 sample. +
+ + + - + +
+ ++++Previous: THE CONFIGURATION OBJECT, Up: COMMON PLUGIN FUNCTIONS [Contents]
+19.2.3 THE USER INTERFACE OBJECT
+The user interface object is derived from PluginClientWindow. The user must call NEW_WINDOW_MACRO in the processing object to create the PluginClientWindow. This system is used in realtime plugins but not in nonrealtime plugins. - -
Nonrealtime plugins create and destroy their own GUI in their -get_parameters function and there's no need for a +
+Nonrealtime plugins create and destroy their own GUI in their +get_parameters function and there’s no need for a PluginClientWindow subclass. - -
Now the window class must be declared in the plugin header. It's +
+Now the window class must be declared in the plugin header. It’s easiest to implement the window by copying an existing plugin and renaming the symbols. The following is an outline of what happens. -The plugin header must declare the window's constructor using the +The plugin header must declare the window’s constructor using the appropriate arguments. - -
- #include "guicast.h" - - MyWindow::MyWindow(MyPlugin *plugin) - : PluginClientWindow(plugin, - 440, - 500, - 440, - 500, - 0) - { - --This becomes a window on the screen with the size given by the arguments +
+++ ++#include "guicast.h" + +MyWindow::MyWindow(MyPlugin *plugin) + : PluginClientWindow(plugin, + 440, + 500, + 440, + 500, + 0) +{ + +This becomes a window on the screen with the size given by the arguments to PluginClientWindow. - -
It needs two methods - -
void create_objects(); -
-and a back pointer to the plugin - -
MyPlugin *plugin; -
-The create_objects member puts widgets in the window according to -GuiCast's syntax. A pointer to each widget which you want to +
+It needs two methods +
+++ +void create_objects(); +
and a back pointer to the plugin +
+++ + +MyPlugin *plugin; +
The create_objects member puts widgets in the window according to +GuiCast’s syntax. A pointer to each widget which you want to synchronize to a configuration parameter is stored in the window class. These are updated in the update_gui function you earlier defined for the plugin. The widgets are usually derivatives of a GuiCast widget and they override functions in GuiCast to handle events. Finally -create_objects calls - -
show_window(); -
-to make the window appear all at once. - -
Every widget in the GUI needs to detect when its value changes. In +create_objects calls +
+++ +show_window(); +
to make the window appear all at once. +
+Every widget in the GUI needs to detect when its value changes. In GuiCast the handle_event method is called whenever the value changes. In handle_event, the widget then needs to call plugin->send_configure_change() to propogate the change to any copies of the plugin which are processing data. +
+ + - + + + +
+ ++++Next: NONREALTIME PLUGINS, Previous: COMMON PLUGIN FUNCTIONS, Up: PLUGIN AUTHORING [Contents]
+19.3 REALTIME PLUGINS
Realtime plugins should use PLUGIN_CLASS_MEMBERS to define the basic set of members in their headers. All realtime plugins must define an +
++-int is_realtime() +
int is_realtime() -
-member returning 1. This causes a number of methods to be called +
member returning 1. This causes a number of methods to be called during live playback and the plugin to be usable on the timeline. - -
Realtime plugins must override a member called - -
process_buffer -
-This function takes different arguments depending on if the plugin +
+Realtime plugins must override a member called +
+++ +process_buffer +
This function takes different arguments depending on if the plugin handles video or audio. See an existing plugin to find out which usage applies. - -
The main features of the process_buffer function are a buffer to store +
+The main features of the process_buffer function are a buffer to store the output, the starting position of the output, and the requested -output rate. For audio, there's also a size argument for the number of +output rate. For audio, there’s also a size argument for the number of samples. - -
The starting position of the output buffer is the lowest numbered +
+The starting position of the output buffer is the lowest numbered sample on the timeline if playback is forward and the highest numbered sample on the timeline if playback is reverse. The direction of playback is determined by one of the plugin queries described below. - -
The position and size arguments are all relative to the frame rate and +
+The position and size arguments are all relative to the frame rate and sample rate passed to process_buffer. This is the requested data rate and may not be the same as the project data rate. - -
The process_realtime function should start by calling +
+The process_realtime function should start by calling load_configuration. The LOAD_CONFIGURATION_MACRO returns 1 if the configuration changed. - -
After determining the plugin's configuration, input media has to be +
+After determining the plugin’s configuration, input media has to be loaded for processing. Call - -
read_frame(VFrame *buffer, - int channel, - int64_t start_position, - double frame_rate) -
-or - -
read_samples(double *buffer, - int channel, - int sample_rate, - int64_t start_position, - int64_t len) -
-to request input data from the object which comes before this plugin. +
+++ +read_frame(VFrame *buffer, + int channel, + int64_t start_position, + double frame_rate) +
or +
+++ +read_samples(double *buffer, + int channel, + int sample_rate, + int64_t start_position, + int64_t len) +
to request input data from the object which comes before this plugin. The read function needs a buffer to store the input data in. This can either be a temporary you create in the plugin or the output buffer -supplied to process_buffer if you don't need a temporary. - -
It also needs a set of position arguments to determine when you want to +supplied to process_buffer if you don’t need a temporary. +
+It also needs a set of position arguments to determine when you want to read the data from. The start position, rate, and len passed to a read function need not be the same as the values recieved by the process_buffer function. This way plugins can read data at a different rate than they output data. - -
The channel argument is only meaningful if this is a multichannel +
+The channel argument is only meaningful if this is a multichannel plugin. They need to read data for each track in the get_total_buffers() value and process all the tracks. Single channel plugins should pass 0 for channel. +
-Additional members are implemented to maintain configuration in +
Additional members are implemented to maintain configuration in realtime plugins. Some of these are also needed in nonrealtime plugins. +
+-
+
- void read_data(KeyFrame *keyframe);
-
-
-
- void read_data(KeyFrame *keyframe);
-
-
Loads data from a keyframe into the plugin's configuration. Inside the -keyframe is an XML string. It's most easily parsed by creating a +
Loads data from a keyframe into the plugin’s configuration. Inside the +keyframe is an XML string. It’s most easily parsed by creating a FileXML object. See an existing plugin to see how the read_data function is implemented. - -
Read data loads data out of the XML object and stores values in the -plugin's configuration object. Since configuration objects vary from -plugin to plugin, these functions can't be automated. - -
- void save_data(KeyFrame *keyframe);
-
-
Saves data from the plugin's configuration to a keyframe. Inside the -keyframe you'll put an XML string which is normally created by a +
+Read data loads data out of the XML object and stores values in the +plugin’s configuration object. Since configuration objects vary from +plugin to plugin, these functions can’t be automated. +
+ - void save_data(KeyFrame *keyframe);
+
+
Saves data from the plugin’s configuration to a keyframe. Inside the +keyframe you’ll put an XML string which is normally created by a FileXML object. See an existing plugin to see how the save_data function is implemented. - -
Save data saves data from the plugin's configuration object into the +
+Save data saves data from the plugin’s configuration object into the XML object. +
+ - int load_defaults(); -
- int load_defaults();
-
-
Another way the plugin gets parameters is from a defaults file. The +
Another way the plugin gets parameters is from a defaults file. The load and save defaults routines use a BC_Hash object to parse the defaults file. The defaults object is created in load_defaults and -destroyed in the plugin's destructor. See an existing plugin to see +destroyed in the plugin’s destructor. See an existing plugin to see how the BC_Hash object is used. +
+ - int save_defaults();
+
+
Saves the configuration in the defaults object. +
+
- void read_data(KeyFrame *keyframe);
-
-
- int save_defaults();
-
Saves the configuration in the defaults object. -
+ ++++Next: AUDIO PLUGINS, Previous: REALTIME PLUGINS, Up: PLUGIN AUTHORING [Contents]
+19.4 NONREALTIME PLUGINS
Some references for non-realtime plugins are Normalize for audio and Reframe for video. - -
Like realtime plugins, load_defaults and save_defaults must be +
+Like realtime plugins, load_defaults and save_defaults must be implemented. In nonrealtime plugins, these are not just used for default parameters but to transfer values from the user interface to -the signal processor. There doesn't need to be a configuration class +the signal processor. There doesn’t need to be a configuration class in nonrealtime plugins. - -
Unlike realtime plugins, the LOAD_CONFIGURATION_MACRO can't be used in +
+Unlike realtime plugins, the LOAD_CONFIGURATION_MACRO can’t be used in the plugin header. Instead, the following methods must be defined. - -
The nonrealtime plugin should contain a pointer to a defaults object. - -
- BC_Hash *defaults; - -
-It should also have a pointer to a MainProgressBar. - -
- MainProgressBar *progress; -
-The progress pointer allows nonrealtime plugins to display their -progress in Cinelerra's main window. - -
The constructor for a nonrealtime plugin can't use +
+The nonrealtime plugin should contain a pointer to a defaults object. +
+++ ++BC_Hash *defaults; + +
It should also have a pointer to a MainProgressBar. +
+++ ++MainProgressBar *progress; +
The progress pointer allows nonrealtime plugins to display their +progress in Cinelerra’s main window. +
+The constructor for a nonrealtime plugin can’t use PLUGIN_CONSTRUCTOR_MACRO but must call load_defaults directly. - -
The destructor, likewise, must call save_defaults and delete +
+The destructor, likewise, must call save_defaults and delete defaults directly instead of PLUGIN_DESTRUCTOR_MACRO. +
+-
+
- VFrame* new_picon();
-
-
-
- VFrame* new_picon();
-
-
char* plugin_title(); - -
The usage of these is the same as realtime plugins. - -
- int is_realtime();
-
-
This function must return 0 to indicate a nonrealtime plugin. +
char* plugin_title(); +
+The usage of these is the same as realtime plugins. +
+ - int is_realtime(); -
-
+
This function must return 0 to indicate a nonrealtime plugin. +
+ -
int get_parameters();
-
Here, the user should create a GUI, wait for the user to hit an OK +
Here, the user should create a GUI, wait for the user to hit an OK button or a cancel button, and store the parameters in plugin variables. This routine must return 0 for success and 1 for failure. This way the user can cancel the effect from the GUI. - -
Unlike the realtime plugin, this GUI need not run asynchronously of the +
+Unlike the realtime plugin, this GUI need not run asynchronously of the plugin. It should block the get_parameters function until the user selects OK or Cancel. +
+ - int load_defaults(); -
- int load_defaults();
-
-
This should set the defaults variable to a new Defaults object +
This should set the defaults variable to a new Defaults object and load parameters from the defaults object into plugin variables. +
+ - int save_defaults(); -
- int save_defaults();
-
-
This should save plugin variables to the defaults object. It should not +
This should save plugin variables to the defaults object. It should not create the defaults object. +
- - int start_loop(); +
- int start_loop();
-
If get_parameters returned 0 for success, this is called once to +
If get_parameters returned 0 for success, this is called once to give the plugin a chance to initialize processing. The plugin should instantiate the progress object with a line like +
++-+progress = start_progress("MyPlugin progress...", + PluginClient::get_total_len()); -- progress = start_progress("MyPlugin progress...", - PluginClient::get_total_len()); - --The usage of start_progress depends on whether the plugin is -multichannel or single channel. If it's multichannel you always call -start_progress. If it's single channel, you first need to know whether -the progress bar has already started in another instance of the plugin. - -
If PluginClient::interactive is 1, you need to start the progress -bar. If it's 0, the progress bar has already been started. +
The PluginClient defines get_total_len() and get_source_start() +
The usage of start_progress depends on whether the plugin is +multichannel or single channel. If it’s multichannel you always call +start_progress. If it’s single channel, you first need to know whether +the progress bar has already started in another instance of the plugin. +
+If PluginClient::interactive is 1, you need to start the progress +bar. If it’s 0, the progress bar has already been started. +
+The PluginClient defines get_total_len() and get_source_start() to describe the timeline range to be processed. The units are either samples or frames and in the project rate. +
+ - int process_loop -
- int process_loop
-
-
This is called repeatedly until the timeline range is processed. It +
This is called repeatedly until the timeline range is processed. It has either a samples or frames buffer for output and a reference to write_length to store the number of samples processed. If this is an audio plugin, the user needs to call get_buffer_size() to know how many samples the output buffer can hold. - -
The plugin must use read_samples or read_frame to read the +
+The plugin must use read_samples or read_frame to read the input. These functions are a bit different for a non realtime plugin than they are for a realtime plugin. - -
They take a buffer and a position relative to the start of the -timeline, in the timeline's rate. Then you must process it and put the +
+They take a buffer and a position relative to the start of the +timeline, in the timeline’s rate. Then you must process it and put the output in the buffer argument to process_loop. write_length should -contain the number of samples generated if it's audio. - -
Finally, process_loop must test PluginClient::interactive and -update the progress bar if it's 1. - -
progress->update(total_written); -
-returns 1 or 0 if the progress bar was cancelled. If it's 1, +contain the number of samples generated if it’s audio. +
+Finally, process_loop must test PluginClient::interactive and +update the progress bar if it’s 1. +
+++ +progress->update(total_written); +
returns 1 or 0 if the progress bar was cancelled. If it’s 1, process_loop should return 1 to indicate a cancellation. In addition to progress bar cancellation, process_loop should return 1 when the entire timeline range is processed. +
+ - int stop_loop(); -
- int stop_loop();
-
-
This is called after process_loop processes its last buffer. - -
If PluginClient::is_interactive is 1, this should call +
This is called after process_loop processes its last buffer. +
+If PluginClient::is_interactive is 1, this should call stop_progress in the progress bar pointer and delete the pointer. Then it should delete any objects it created for processing in start_loop. +
-
- VFrame* new_picon();
-
-
+ ++++Next: VIDEO PLUGINS, Previous: NONREALTIME PLUGINS, Up: PLUGIN AUTHORING [Contents]
+19.5 AUDIO PLUGINS
The simplest audio plugin is Gain. The processing object should include pluginaclient.h and inherit from PluginAClient. Realtime audio plugins need to -define - -
int process_buffer(int64_t size, - double **buffer, - int64_t start_position, - int sample_rate); -
-if it's multichannel or - -
int process_buffer(int64_t size, - double *buffer, - int64_t start_position, - int sample_rate); -
-if it's single channel. These should return 0 on success and 1 on +define +
+++ +int process_buffer(int64_t size, + double **buffer, + int64_t start_position, + int sample_rate); +
if it’s multichannel or +
+++ +int process_buffer(int64_t size, + double *buffer, + int64_t start_position, + int sample_rate); +
if it’s single channel. These should return 0 on success and 1 on failure. In the future, the return value may abort failed rendering. - -
The processing function needs to request input samples with - -
int read_samples(double *buffer, - int channel, - int sample_rate, - int64_t start_position, - int64_t len); -
-It always returns 0. The user may specify any desired sample rate and +
+The processing function needs to request input samples with +
+++ +int read_samples(double *buffer, + int channel, + int sample_rate, + int64_t start_position, + int64_t len); +
It always returns 0. The user may specify any desired sample rate and start position. - -
Nonrealtime audio plugins need to define - -
int process_loop(double *buffer, int64_t &write_length); -
-for single channel or - -
int process_loop(double **buffers, int64_t &write_length); -
-for multi channel. Non realtime plugins use a different set of +
+Nonrealtime audio plugins need to define +
+++ +int process_loop(double *buffer, int64_t &write_length); +
for single channel or +
+++ +int process_loop(double **buffers, int64_t &write_length); +
for multi channel. Non realtime plugins use a different set of read_samples functions to request input data. These are fixed to the project sample rate. +
-- -
-Next: TRANSITION PLUGINS, -Previous: AUDIO PLUGINS, -Up: PLUGIN AUTHORING +
+ ++- ++Next: TRANSITION PLUGINS, Previous: AUDIO PLUGINS, Up: PLUGIN AUTHORING [Contents]
19.6 VIDEO PLUGINS
-The simplest video plugin is Flip. The processing object should -include pluginvclient.h and inherit from PluginVClient. -Realtime video plugins need to define - -
int process_buffer(VFrame **frame, - int64_t start_position, - double frame_rate); -
-if it's multichannel or - -
int process_buffer(VFrame *frame, - int64_t start_position, - double frame_rate); -
-if it's single channel. -
The nonrealtime video plugins need to define -
int process_loop(VFrame *buffer); -
-for single channel or -
int process_loop(VFrame **buffers); -
-for multi channel. The amount of frames generated in a single +
The simplest video plugin is Flip. The processing object should +include pluginvclient.h and inherit from PluginVClient. +Realtime video plugins need to define +
+++ +int process_buffer(VFrame **frame, + int64_t start_position, + double frame_rate); +
if it’s multichannel or +
+++ +int process_buffer(VFrame *frame, + int64_t start_position, + double frame_rate); +
if it’s single channel. +
+The nonrealtime video plugins need to define +
+++ +int process_loop(VFrame *buffer); +
for single channel or +
+++ +int process_loop(VFrame **buffers); +
for multi channel. The amount of frames generated in a single process_loop is always assumed to be 1, hence the lack of a write_length argument. Returning 0 causes the rendering to continue. Returning 1 causes the rendering to abort. - -
A set of read_frame functions exist for requesting input frames in +
+A set of read_frame functions exist for requesting input frames in non-realtime video plugins. These are fixed to the project frame rate. +
-+
-
-Next: PLUGIN GUI'S WHICH UPDATE DURING PLAYBACK, -Previous: VIDEO PLUGINS, -Up: PLUGIN AUTHORING - ++- ++Next: PLUGIN GUI'S WHICH UPDATE DURING PLAYBACK, Previous: VIDEO PLUGINS, Up: PLUGIN AUTHORING [Contents]
19.7 TRANSITION PLUGINS
+ + +The simplest video transition is wipe and the simplest audio transition is crossfade. These use a subset of the default class members of realtime plugins, but so far no analogue to PLUGIN_CLASS_MEMBERS has been done for transitions. - -
The processing object for audio transitions still inherits from +
+The processing object for audio transitions still inherits from PluginAClient and for video transitions it still inherits from PluginVClient. - -
Transitions may or may not have a GUI. If they have a GUI, they must +
+Transitions may or may not have a GUI. If they have a GUI, they must also manage a thread like realtime plugins. Do this with the same PLUGIN_THREAD_OBJECT and PLUGIN_THREAD_HEADER macros as realtime -plugins. Since there is only one keyframe in a transition, you don't +plugins. Since there is only one keyframe in a transition, you don’t need to worry about updating the GUI from the processing object like you do in a realtime plugin. - -
If the transition has a GUI, you can use PLUGIN_CONSTRUCTOR_MACRO and -PLUGIN_DESTRUCTOR_MACRO to initialize the processing object. You'll +
+If the transition has a GUI, you can use PLUGIN_CONSTRUCTOR_MACRO and +PLUGIN_DESTRUCTOR_MACRO to initialize the processing object. You’ll also need a BC_Hash object and a Thread object for these macros. - -
Since the GUI is optional, overwrite a function called uses_gui() +
+Since the GUI is optional, overwrite a function called uses_gui() to signifiy whether or not the transition has a GUI. Return 1 if it -does and 0 if it doesn't. - -
Transitions need a load_defaults and save_defaults function so -the first time they're dropped on the timeline they'll have useful +does and 0 if it doesn’t. +
+Transitions need a load_defaults and save_defaults function so +the first time they’re dropped on the timeline they’ll have useful settings. - -
A read_data and save_data function takes over after insertion +
+A read_data and save_data function takes over after insertion to access data specific to each instance of the transition. - -
The most important difference between transitions and realtime plugins +
+The most important difference between transitions and realtime plugins is the addition of an is_transition method to the processing object. is_transition should return 1 to signify the plugin is a transition. - -
Transitions process data in a process_realtime function. - -
int process_realtime(VFrame *input, - VFrame *output); -
-int process_realtime(int64_t size, - double *input_ptr, - double *output_ptr); -
-The input argument to process_realtime is the data for the next edit. +
+Transitions process data in a process_realtime function. +
+++ +int process_realtime(VFrame *input, + VFrame *output); +
++ +int process_realtime(int64_t size, + double *input_ptr, + double *output_ptr); +
The input argument to process_realtime is the data for the next edit. The output argument to process_realtime is the data for the previous edit. - -
Routines exist for determining where you are relative to the -transition's start and end. - -
-
-
- PluginClient::get_source_position() - returns the current
+
+
Routines exist for determining where you are relative to the +transition’s start and end. +
+-
+
- PluginClient::get_source_position() - returns the current position since the start of the transition of the lowest sample in the buffers. -
- PluginClient::get_total_len() - returns the integer length of +
- PluginClient::get_total_len() - returns the integer length of the transition. The units are either samples or frames, in the data rate requested by the first plugin. -
Users should divide the source position by total length to get the +
Users should divide the source position by total length to get the fraction of the transition the current process_realtime function is at. - -
Transitions run in the data rate requested by the first plugin in the +
+Transitions run in the data rate requested by the first plugin in the track. This may be different than the project data rate. Since process_realtime lacks a rate argument, use get_framerate() or get_samplerate to get the requested rate. +
- -19.8 PLUGIN GUI'S WHICH UPDATE DURING PLAYBACK
+ +
+ +++ ++Next: PLUGIN QUERIES, Previous: TRANSITION PLUGINS, Up: PLUGIN AUTHORING [Contents]
+19.8 PLUGIN GUI’S WHICH UPDATE DURING PLAYBACK
Effects like Histogram and VideoScope need to update the GUI during playback to display information about the signal. This is @@ -9377,422 +10386,476 @@ Normally in process_buffer, when the processing object wants to update the GUI it should call send_render_gui. This should only be called in process_buffer. Send_render_gui goes through a search and eventually calls render_gui in the GUI instance of the plugin. +
+Render_gui should have a sequence like +
++-void MyPlugin::render_gui(void *data) +{ + if(thread) + { + thread->window->lock_window(); + +// update GUI here + + thread->window->unlock_window(); + } +} + +Render_gui should have a sequence like - -
void MyPlugin::render_gui(void *data) - { - if(thread) - { - thread->window->lock_window(); - - // update GUI here - - thread->window->unlock_window(); - } - } - --Send_render_gui and render_gui use one argument, a void pointer to + +
Send_render_gui and render_gui use one argument, a void pointer to transfer information from the processing object to the GUI. The user should typecast this pointer into something useful. +
+ + + + + - + + +
+ ++++Next: USING OPENGL, Previous: PLUGIN GUI'S WHICH UPDATE DURING PLAYBACK, Up: PLUGIN AUTHORING [Contents]
+19.9 PLUGIN QUERIES
+There are several useful queries in PluginClient which can be accessed from the processing object. Some of them have different meaning in realtime and non-realtime mode. They all give information about the operating system or the project which can be used to improve the quality of the processing. +
++
- - + +• SYSTEM QUERIES: Utilities for determining the system resources. + • TIMING QUERIES: Utilities for performing time-dependant processing. +
+ ++++Next: TIMING QUERIES, Up: PLUGIN QUERIES [Contents]
+19.9.1 SYSTEM QUERIES
--
-
-
+
+
-
+
- get_interpolation_type() returns the type of interpolation the user wants for all scaling operations. This is a macro from overlayframe.inc. It can be applied to any call to the OverlayFrame object. -
- -get_project_smp() Gives the number of CPU's on the system minus 1. -If it's a uniprocessor it's 0. If it's a dual processor, it's 1. This +
- +get_project_smp() Gives the number of CPU’s on the system minus 1. +If it’s a uniprocessor it’s 0. If it’s a dual processor, it’s 1. This number should be used to gain parallelism. -
- +
- get_total_buffers() Gives the number of tracks a multichannel plugin needs to process. -
+ ++++Previous: SYSTEM QUERIES, Up: PLUGIN QUERIES [Contents]
+19.9.2 TIMING QUERIES
+There are two rates for media a realtime plugin has to be aware of: the project rate and the requested rate. Functions are provided for getting the project and requested rate. In addition, doing time dependant effects requires using several functions which tell where you are in the effect. - -
-
-
-
+
+
-
+
- get_project_framerate() Gives the frames per second of the video as defined by the project settings. -
- + +
- get_project_samplerate() Gives the samples per second of the audio as defined by the project settings. -
- +
- get_framerate() Gives the frames per second requested by the plugin after this one. This is the requested frame rate and is the same as the frame_rate argument to process_buffer. -
- +
- get_samplerate() Gives the samples per second requested by the plugin after this one. This is the requested sample rate and is the same as the sample_rate argument to process_buffer. -
- +
- get_total_len() Gives the number of samples or frames in the range covered by the effect, relative to the requested data rate. -
- +
- get_source_start() For realtime plugins it gives the lowest sample or frame in the effect range in the requested data rate. For -nonrealtime plugins it's the start of the range of the timeline to +nonrealtime plugins it’s the start of the range of the timeline to process. -
- -get_source_position() For realtime plugins it's the lowest numbered +
-
+get_source_position() For realtime plugins it’s the lowest numbered
sample in the requested region to process if playing forward and the
highest numbered sample in the region if playing backward. For video
-it's the start of the frame if playing forward and the end of the frame
+it’s the start of the frame if playing forward and the end of the frame
if playing in reverse. The position is relative to the start of the
EDL and in the requested data rate.
-
For transitions this is always the lowest numbered sample of the region +
For transitions this is always the lowest numbered sample of the region to process relative to the start of the transition. - -
- + +
- get_direction() Gives the direction of the current playback operation. This is a macro defined in transportque.inc. This is useful for calling read functions since the read functions position themselves at the start or end of the region to read, depending on the playback operation. -
- +
- local_to_edl() -
- +
-
edl_to_local()
-
These convert between the requested data rate and the project data +
These convert between the requested data rate and the project data rate. They are used to convert keyframe positions into numbers which can be interpolated at the requested data rate. The conversion is automatically based on frame rate or sample rate depending on the type of plugin. +
+ - get_prev_keyframe(int64_t position, int is_local) -
- get_prev_keyframe(int64_t position, int is_local) +
- get_next_keyframe(int64_t position, int is_local) -
- get_next_keyframe(int64_t position, int is_local)
-
-
These give the nearest keyframe before or after the position given. +
These give the nearest keyframe before or after the position given. The macro defined version of load_configuration automatically retrieves the right keyframes but you may want to do this on your own. - -
The position argument can be either in the project rate or the -requested rate. Set is_local to 1 if it's in the requested rate and 0 -if it's in the project rate. - -
In each keyframe, another position value tells the keyframe's position +
+The position argument can be either in the project rate or the +requested rate. Set is_local to 1 if it’s in the requested rate and 0 +if it’s in the project rate. +
+In each keyframe, another position value tells the keyframe’s position relative to the start of the timeline and in the project rate. - -
The only way to get smooth interpolation between keyframes is to +
+The only way to get smooth interpolation between keyframes is to convert the positions in the keyframe objects to the requested rate. Do this by using edl_to_local on the keyframe positions. +
+
- -+
-Next: PLUGIN QUERIES, -Previous: PLUGIN GUI'S WHICH UPDATE DURING PLAYBACK, -Up: PLUGIN AUTHORING -
+ ++++Next: PLUGIN QUERIES, Previous: PLUGIN QUERIES, Up: PLUGIN AUTHORING [Contents]
+19.10 USING OPENGL
+ +Realtime video plugins support OpenGL. Using OpenGL to do plugin routines can speed up playback greatly since it does most of the work in hardware. Unfortunately, every OpenGL routine needs a software counterpart for rendering, doubling the amount of software to maintain. Fortunately, having an OpenGL routine means the software -version doesn't need to be as optimized as it did when software was the +version doesn’t need to be as optimized as it did when software was the only way. - -
As always, the best way to design a first OpenGL plugin is to copy an +
+As always, the best way to design a first OpenGL plugin is to copy an existing one and alter it. The Brightness plugin is a simple OpenGL plugin to copy. There are 3 main points in OpenGL rendering and 1 point for optimizing OpenGL rendering. +
++
- -• GETTING OPENGL DATA: Getting video data in a form usable by OpenGL + • DRAWING USING OPENGL: The method of drawing video in OpenGL + • USING SHADERS: Routines to simplify shader usage + • AGGREGATING PLUGINS: Combining OpenGL routines from different plugins into one. + - -
-Next: DRAWING USING OPENGL, -Up: USING OPENGL +
+ ++- ++Next: DRAWING USING OPENGL, Up: USING OPENGL [Contents]
19.10.1 GETTING OPENGL DATA
The first problem is getting OpenGL-enabled plugins to interact with software-only plugins. To solve this, all the information required to do OpenGL playback is stored in the VFrame object which is passed to process_buffer. To support 3D, the VFrame contains a PBuffer and a -texture, in addition to VFrame's original rows. - -
In OpenGL mode, VFrame has 3 states corresponding to the location of +texture, in addition to VFrame’s original rows. +
+In OpenGL mode, VFrame has 3 states corresponding to the location of its video data. The opengl state is recovered by calling get_opengl_state and is set by calling set_opengl_state. The states are: - -
-
-
-
+
+
-
+
- VFrame::RAM - This means the video data is stored in the traditional row pointers. It must be loaded into a texture before being drawn using OpenGL routines. -
- VFrame::TEXTURE - The video data is stored in texture -memory. It's ready to be drawn using OpenGL routines. +
- VFrame::TEXTURE - The video data is stored in texture +memory. It’s ready to be drawn using OpenGL routines. -
- VFrame::SCREEN - The video data is stored in a frame buffer +
- VFrame::SCREEN - The video data is stored in a frame buffer in the graphics card. For plugins, the frame buffer is always a -PBuffer. The image on the frame buffer can't be replicated again +PBuffer. The image on the frame buffer can’t be replicated again unless it is read back into the texture and the opengl state is reset to TEXTURE. The frame buffer is limited to 8 bits per channel. If an OpenGL effect is used in a floating point project, it only retains 8 bits. -
In the plugin's process_buffer routine, there is normally a call to +
In the plugin’s process_buffer routine, there is normally a call to read_frame to get data from the previous plugin in the chain. -read_frame takes a new parameter called use_opengl. - -
The plugin passes 1 to use_opengl if it intends to handle the data +read_frame takes a new parameter called use_opengl. +
+The plugin passes 1 to use_opengl if it intends to handle the data using OpenGL. It passes 0 to use_opengl if it can only handle the data using software. The value of use_opengl is passed up the chain to ensure a plugin which only does software only gets the data in the row pointers. If use_opengl is 0, the opengl state in VFrame is RAM. - -
The plugin must not only know if it is software-only but if its output +
+The plugin must not only know if it is software-only but if its output must be software only. Call get_use_opengl to determine if the output can be handled by OpenGL. If get_use_opengl returns 0, the plugin must pass 0 for use_opengl in read_frame and do its processing in software. If get_use_opengl is 1, the plugin can decide based on its implementation whether to use OpenGL. +
-The main problem with OpenGL is that all the gl... calls need to be run +
The main problem with OpenGL is that all the gl... calls need to be run from the same thread. To work around this, the plugin interface has -routines for running OpenGL in a common thread. +routines for running OpenGL in a common thread. +
-run_opengl transfers control to the common OpenGL thread. This is +
run_opengl transfers control to the common OpenGL thread. This is normally called by the plugin in process_buffer after it calls read_frame and only if get_use_opengl is 1. - -
Through a series of indirections, run_opengl eventually transfers +
+Through a series of indirections, run_opengl eventually transfers control to a virtual function called handle_opengl. handle_opengl must be overridden with a function to perform all the OpenGL routines. The contents of handle_opengl must be enclosed in #ifdef HAVE_GL ... #endif to allow it to be compiled on systems with no graphics support, like render nodes. The return value of handle_opengl is passed back from run_opengl. - -
read_frame can't be called from inside handle_opengl. This +
+read_frame can’t be called from inside handle_opengl. This would create a recursive lockup because it would cause other objects to call run_opengl. - -
Once inside handle_opengl, the plugin has full usage of all the +
+Once inside handle_opengl, the plugin has full usage of all the OpenGL features. VFrame provides some functions to automate common OpenGL sequences. - -
The VFrame argument to process_buffer is always available through +
+The VFrame argument to process_buffer is always available through the get_output(int layer) function. If the plugin is multichannel, the layer argument retrieves a specific layer of the output buffers. The PBuffer of the output buffer is where the OpenGL output must go if any processing is done. +
-- -
-Next: USING SHADERS, -Previous: GETTING OPENGL DATA, -Up: USING OPENGL +
+ ++- ++Next: USING SHADERS, Previous: GETTING OPENGL DATA, Up: USING OPENGL [Contents]
19.10.2 DRAWING USING OPENGL
+The sequence of commands to draw on the output PBuffer stars with getting the video in a memory area where it can be recalled for drawing: - -
get_output()->to_texture(); - get_output()->enable_opengl(); -
-to_texture transfers the OpenGL data from wherever it is to the -output's texture memory and sets the output state to TEXTURE. - -
enable_opengl makes the OpenGL context relative to the output's +
+++ +get_output()->to_texture(); +get_output()->enable_opengl(); +
to_texture transfers the OpenGL data from wherever it is to the +output’s texture memory and sets the output state to TEXTURE. +
+enable_opengl makes the OpenGL context relative to the output’s PBuffer. - -
The next step is to draw the texture with some processing on the +
+The next step is to draw the texture with some processing on the PBuffer. The normal sequence of commands to draw a texture is: - -
get_output()->init_screen(); - get_output()->bind_texture(0); - get_output()->draw_texture(); -
-VFrame::init_screen sets the OpenGL frustum and parameters to known +
+++ +get_output()->init_screen(); +get_output()->bind_texture(0); +get_output()->draw_texture(); +
VFrame::init_screen sets the OpenGL frustum and parameters to known values. - -
VFrame::bind_texture(int texture_unit) binds the texture to the given +
+VFrame::bind_texture(int texture_unit) binds the texture to the given texture unit and enables it. - -
VFrame::draw_texture() calls the vertex functions to draw the +
+VFrame::draw_texture() calls the vertex functions to draw the texture normalized to the size of the PBuffer. Copy this if you want custom vertices. - -
The last step in the handle_opengl routine, after the texture has been -drawn on the PBuffer, is to set the output's opengl state to SCREEN +
+The last step in the handle_opengl routine, after the texture has been +drawn on the PBuffer, is to set the output’s opengl state to SCREEN with a call to VFrame::set_opengl_state. The plugin should not read back the frame buffer into a texture or row pointers if it has no further processing. Plugins should only leave the output in the texture or RAM if its location results from normal processing. They should set the opengl state to RAM or TEXTURE if they do. - -
Colormodels in OpenGL - -
The colormodel exposed to OpenGL routines is always floating point since +
+Colormodels in OpenGL +
+The colormodel exposed to OpenGL routines is always floating point since that is what OpenGL uses, but it may be YUV or RGB depending on the -project settings. If it's YUV, the U & V are offset by 0.5 just like in +project settings. If it’s YUV, the U & V are offset by 0.5 just like in software. Passing YUV colormodels to plugins was necessary for speed. The other option was to convert YUV to RGB in the first step that needed OpenGL. Every effect and rendering step would have needed a YUV to RGB routine. With the YUV retained, only the final compositing step needs a YUV to RGB routine. - -
The OpenGL mode differentiates between alpha & flat colormodels even +
+The OpenGL mode differentiates between alpha & flat colormodels even though OpenGL always has an alpha channel. For RGB colormodels, you must multiply the alpha component by the RGB & set the alpha component to 1 whenever the colormodel has no alpha to ensure consistency with the software mode. +
+++ -Rout = Rin * Ain +Gout = Gin * Ain +Bout = Bin * Ain +Aout = 1 +
Rout = Rin * Ain - Gout = Gin * Ain - Bout = Bin * Ain - Aout = 1 -
-For YUV colormodels, you must multiply the alpha using the following +
For YUV colormodels, you must multiply the alpha using the following formula. +
++-Yout = Yin * Ain +Uout = Uin * Ain + 0.5 * (1 - Ain) +Vout = Vin * Ain + 0.5 * (1 - Ain) +Aout = 1 +
Yout = Yin * Ain - Uout = Uin * Ain + 0.5 * (1 - Ain) - Vout = Vin * Ain + 0.5 * (1 - Ain) - Aout = 1 -
- + + + +
+ ++++Next: AGGREGATING PLUGINS, Previous: DRAWING USING OPENGL, Up: USING OPENGL [Contents]
+19.10.3 USING SHADERS
Very few effects can do anything useful with just a straight drawing of -the texture on the PBuffer. It's also not easy to figure out exactly +the texture on the PBuffer. It’s also not easy to figure out exactly what math is being used by the different OpenGL blending macros. -Normally you'll use shaders. The shader is a C program which runs on +Normally you’ll use shaders. The shader is a C program which runs on the graphics card. Since the graphics card is optimized for graphics, it can be much faster than running it on the CPU. - -
Shaders are written in OpenGL Shading Language. The shader source code +
+Shaders are written in OpenGL Shading Language. The shader source code is contained in a string. The normal sequence for using a shader comes after a call to enable_opengl. - -
char *shader_source = "..."; - unsigned char shader_id = VFrame::make_shader(0, shader_source, 0); - glUseProgram(shader_id); - // Set uniform variables using glUniform commands -
-The compilation and linking step for shaders is encapsulated by the +
+++ +char *shader_source = "..."; +unsigned char shader_id = VFrame::make_shader(0, shader_source, 0); +glUseProgram(shader_id); +// Set uniform variables using glUniform commands +
The compilation and linking step for shaders is encapsulated by the VFrame::make_shader command. It returns a shader_id which can be passed to OpenGL functions. The first and last arguments must always by 0. And arbitrary number of source strings may be put between the -0's. The source strings are concatenated by make_shader into one huge +0’s. The source strings are concatenated by make_shader into one huge shader source. If multiple main functions are in the sources, the main functions are renamed and run in order. - -
There are a number of useful macros for shaders in playback3d.h. All +
+There are a number of useful macros for shaders in playback3d.h. All the shaders so far have been fragment shaders. After the shader is initialized, draw the texture starting from init_screen. The shader program must be disabled with another call to glUseProgram(0) and 0 as the argument. - -
The shader_id and source code is stored in memory as long as Cinelerra +
+The shader_id and source code is stored in memory as long as Cinelerra runs. Future calls to make_shader with the same source code run much faster. +
- +
+ ++++Previous: USING SHADERS, Up: USING OPENGL [Contents]
+19.10.4 AGGREGATING PLUGINS
Further speed improvements may be obtained by combining OpenGL routines @@ -9802,190 +10865,241 @@ Aggregations of more than two plugins are possible but very hard to get working. Aggregation is useful for OpenGL because each plugin must copy the video from a texture to a PBuffer. In software there was no copy operation. - -
In aggregation, one plugin processes everything from the other plugins +
+In aggregation, one plugin processes everything from the other plugins and the other plugins fall through. The fall through plugins must copy their parameters to the output buffer so they can be detected by the processing plugin. - -
The VFrame used as the output buffer contains a parameter table for -parameter passing between plugins and it's accessed with +
+The VFrame used as the output buffer contains a parameter table for +parameter passing between plugins and it’s accessed with get_output()->get_params(). Parameters are set and retrieved in the table with calls to update and get just like with defaults. - -
The fall through plugins must determine if the processor plugin is +
+The fall through plugins must determine if the processor plugin is attached with calls to next_effect_is and prev_effect_is. These take the name of the processor plugin as a string argument and return 1 if the next or previous plugin is the processor plugin. If either returns 1, the fall through plugin must still call read_frame to propogate the data but return after that. - -
The processor plugin must call next_effect_is and -prev_effect_is to determine if it's aggregated with a fall through +
+The processor plugin must call next_effect_is and +prev_effect_is to determine if it’s aggregated with a fall through plugin. If it is, it must perform the operations of the fall through plugin in its OpenGL routine. The parameters for the the fall through plugin should be available by get_output()->get_params() if the fall through plugin set them. +
+ - + + + +
+ ++++Previous: PLUGIN AUTHORING, Up: TOP [Contents]
+20 KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
Alex Ferrer started summarizing most of the keyboard shortcuts. Most of the keys work without any modifier like shift or ctrl. Most windows can be closed with a Ctrl-w. Most operations can be cancelled with ESC and accepted with Enter. - +
+20.1 PROGRAM WINDOW
+ +20.1.1 Editing Media
-z Undo - Shift Z Re-Do - x Cut - c Copy - v Paste - Del Clear - Shift Spc Paste Silence - m Mute region - a Select all - shift + click When done over an edit causes the highlighted selection to extend to the cursor position. - When done over the boundary of an effect causes the trim operation to apply to one effect. -
+++ +z Undo +Shift Z Re-Do +x Cut +c Copy +v Paste +Del Clear +Shift Spc Paste Silence +m Mute region +a Select all +shift + click When done over an edit causes the highlighted selection to extend to the cursor position. + When done over the boundary of an effect causes the trim operation to apply to one effect. +
20.1.2 Editing Labels & In/Out Points
-[ Toggle In point - ] Toggle Out point - l Toggle label at current position - Ctrl <- Go to Previous Label - Ctrl -> Go to Next Label -
+++ + +[ Toggle In point +] Toggle Out point +l Toggle label at current position +Ctrl <- Go to Previous Label +Ctrl -> Go to Next Label +
20.1.3 Navigation
-Right arrow Move right* - Left arrow Move left* - Up arrow Zoom out* - Down arrow Zoom in* - Ctrl Up Expand waveform amplitude - Ctrl Dn Shrink waveform amplitude - Alt Up Expand curve amplitude - Alt Dn Shrink curve amplitude - f Fit time displayed to selection - Alt f Fit curve amplitude to highlighted section of curves - Alt Left Move left one edit - Alt Right Move right one edit - Page Up Move up* - Page Dn Move down* - Ctrl Page Up Expand track height - Ctrl Page Dn Shrink track height - Home Go to beginning of timeline* - End Go to end of timeline* - -
-* You may have to click on the timeline to deactivate any text boxes or +
++ +Right arrow Move right* +Left arrow Move left* +Up arrow Zoom out* +Down arrow Zoom in* +Ctrl Up Expand waveform amplitude +Ctrl Dn Shrink waveform amplitude +Alt Up Expand curve amplitude +Alt Dn Shrink curve amplitude +f Fit time displayed to selection +Alt f Fit curve amplitude to highlighted section of curves +Alt Left Move left one edit +Alt Right Move right one edit +Page Up Move up* +Page Dn Move down* +Ctrl Page Up Expand track height +Ctrl Page Dn Shrink track height +Home Go to beginning of timeline* +End Go to end of timeline* + +
* You may have to click on the timeline to deactivate any text boxes or tumblers before these work. +
+ + +20.1.4 File operations
-n New project - o Load Files - s Save Project - r Record - Shift R Render - q Quit - Shift P Preferences - Shift B Batch Render - Shift F Set Format -
+++ +n New project +o Load Files +s Save Project +r Record +Shift R Render +q Quit +Shift P Preferences +Shift B Batch Render +Shift F Set Format +
20.1.5 Key Frame Editing
-- Shift X Cut keyframes - Shift C Copy keyframes - Shift V Paste keyframes - Shift Del Clear keyframes - Alt c Copy default keyframe - Alt v Paste default keyframe - -
+++ + ++Shift X Cut keyframes +Shift C Copy keyframes +Shift V Paste keyframes +Shift Del Clear keyframes +Alt c Copy default keyframe +Alt v Paste default keyframe + +
20.1.6 Track Manipulation
-- t Add Audio Track - u Insert default Audio Transition - Shift T Add Video Track - Shift U Insert Default Video Transition - d Delete last Track - Shift L Loop playback - Tab Toggle single track arming status - Shift-Tab Toggle every other track's arming status - -
-20.1.7 What's drawn on the timeline
- -- 1 Show titles - 2 Show transitions - 3 Fade keyframes - 4 Mute keyframes - 5 Mode keyframes - 6 Pan keyframes - 7 Camera keyframes - 8 Projector keyframes - 9 Plugin keyframes - 0 Mask keyframes - - Camera Zoom - = Projector Zoom - -
+++ + ++t Add Audio Track +u Insert default Audio Transition +Shift T Add Video Track +Shift U Insert Default Video Transition +d Delete last Track +Shift L Loop playback +Tab Toggle single track arming status +Shift-Tab Toggle every other track's arming status + +
20.1.7 What’s drawn on the timeline
+ +++ + ++1 Show titles +2 Show transitions +3 Fade keyframes +4 Mute keyframes +5 Mode keyframes +6 Pan keyframes +7 Camera keyframes +8 Projector keyframes +9 Plugin keyframes +0 Mask keyframes +- Camera Zoom += Projector Zoom + +
20.2 VIEWER & COMPOSITOR WINDOWS
-- x Cut - c Copy - v Paste - v Splice - b Overwrite - [ Toggle In point - ] Toggle Out point - l Toggle label at current position - Ctrl <- Go to Previous Label - Ctrl -> Go to Next Label - Home Go to beginning - End Go to end - z Undo - Shift Z Re-Do - + Zoom in - - Zoom out - -
+++ + + ++x Cut +c Copy +v Paste +v Splice +b Overwrite +[ Toggle In point +] Toggle Out point +l Toggle label at current position +Ctrl <- Go to Previous Label +Ctrl -> Go to Next Label +Home Go to beginning +End Go to end +z Undo +Shift Z Re-Do ++ Zoom in +- Zoom out + +
20.3 PLAYBACK TRANSPORT
Transport controls work in any window which has a playback transport. They are accessed through the number pad with num lock disabled. +
++-4 Frame back 5 Reverse Slow 6 Reverse + Reverse Fast +1 Frame Forward 2 Forward Slow 3 Play Enter Fast Forward +0 Stop -
4 Frame back 5 Reverse Slow 6 Reverse + Reverse Fast - 1 Frame Forward 2 Forward Slow 3 Play Enter Fast Forward - 0 Stop - -
-[ Space bar ] is normal Play, Hitting any key twice is Pause. +
Hitting any transport control with CTRL down causes only the region -between the in/out points to be played, if in/out points are defined. +
[ Space bar ] is normal Play, Hitting any key twice is Pause. +
+Hitting any transport control with CTRL down causes only the region +between the in/out points to be played, if in/out points are defined. +
+20.4 RECORD WINDOW
-- Space Start and pause recording of the current batch - l Toggle label at current position. - -
- +++ ++Space Start and pause recording of the current batch +l Toggle label at current position. + +
+ + + +